4am RelaSthintt t- ia tinh hicte. eo Mit A td aloes ‘ Nag Bae we «mate aa ach 5 PSA, city tn Piewinereaa et os Aether naib BGA Pin da, Pace ne > oe ee or 3 eee ee Tia A rte ‘ SSRN dog WAG -LSNI_ NWINOSHLIWS saiuvugly LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN NVINOS ye e 20ND SMITHS‘ NVINOS|I ase WAS SMITHS( Ww == Ww ey é : é "ty, 3 7 w eat w yi d ON < = & Gf 2 BONEN a ee eo ae 2) SS as ro) = oO Noses = =) =z | = RIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1yNY iS Sf = x = ~ , Y = is (@) HS¥. 3 cd = o UNS > 4a > ie aed 2) > 4 iw . = ae: Pe) = 0 = o a on = S a 2 Z 4 Nz | HISNI_NVINOSHLINS S3A1YVUIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUT z = aS \ Ss < & z 4 Pim Ss =| +} Uf 3 z GE Qe FZ EG i =a One cE NN oO ce y * 2 ES 2 : } = > , = SON x Ss ‘ v) ma Ww 20 ee HO & RIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI Saluvue w = ” =| ” om ' aW ut ioe) eae LvZ LY, = Ne 5 : : 2 5 ye CE = = ee = QWwree a =e = ae f a i RIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI_NVINOSHLINS, Sa1uVvYd = a 4 = ee = yy 4 rs = Vly ene = = YE N 3 : i OP 3 ww; \ fe) Ee fe) Ef he as fe) I / WE = aN IW ase ls 2 vs = = = >" | ; 2 a oe: 2 a 2 | ILSNI_NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTIC Zz =f Zz ie Zz | 7) o w uJ = 7a s =: Pm Gy, 4 oz an - a = os Wy 4 Gc . sar SN Se = EMA AAS Oo ae sa eo) aa Oo i on 2 = 2 | RIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLIWS saiuvud aa a z= te Pun Zz | Nia o me") ERR) ° MA 5 of fy > (AMD = Game SS EF Kamp Gf % ” NVINOSH $O, So NV z eS tL On DC SMITHSO ee Mi Ki ty NVINOSH SMITHSO Kae : 2 . is wasn’ NVINOSH * “NVINOSHIINS S3IUVUGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INST Vy. Z : 4 = O° =. WY. < si Dy he a] (= SS ay . fod to foal GM; S S RS \S oo a i ad ali a = Ss = mM. _ o) BS = e) aes re) = a) 2 = Pd 3RARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31 = 7 Zz - x ° — iS) a Oo 5 a a 3) = E 3 = z al - ra e rt z i > eagle zZ 4 po ILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS (Sa 1yvug Houl BRARI ES SMITHSONIAN INS Re z & es As = ae : 3 ' & Ss = z S y as , ” NS ‘. wo io N i eye <= \ 1e) pa N Vif < ei. ~ Z = GG > = : > = : ee Ww) m Zz u”) BRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS $31 NOILNLILSNI LIBRARIES ILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3SI1uYVudiIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _ INS S3IYVUGIT_LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI S3JINVYUGIT- LIBRARIES INSTITUTION S3IYVUSIT INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLIWS Sal z wn ” = < = I 4 = 2 g 2 £% z ch 3 & Yb By = = SG fe aie Y > = . =). > * 2 ” + ee — z ILNLILSNI_ NVINOSHLINS S3!1YVYSIT LIBRARIES INS SMITHSONIAN Yagi LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN 2 e 2 z n cs Yy, = 4 Y jin, * = % Vp = a heck 4 Yj, Vie 4 S cx © his = aa m =, , ru x fe) ‘ ve fe) je) 2 ef 2 = BRARIES SMITHSCNIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S24) = i z ei es ENON La 12) “Oo See Oo Coa) AS “ 2) , ie, ray Peale (“Ey — Kar, WS OE 4 ul i Mery sis : i / rai) (2 i) Wikis CY | ABU here OP bog) Sree a) bey | : i. Ja THE ANNALS AND MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY, INCLUDING ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, ann GEOLOGY. (BEING A CONTINUATION OF THE ‘ANNALS’ COMBINED WITH LOUDON AND CHARLESWORTH’S ‘ MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.’ ) CONDUCTED BY ALBERT C. L. G. GUNTHER, M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.B.S., WILLIAM §S. DALLAS, F.LS., WILLIAM CARRUTHERS, F.R.S., P.L.S., F.G.S., AND WILLIAM FRANCIS, Ph.D., F.L.S. OO eee VOL. L.—SIXTH SERIES. Oooo \sonian Inst; ~S beg at > Om \\ ( a4a\o5 —}} Ay, Nationa LONDON: PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS. SOLD BY LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO.; SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, AND CO.; KENT AND CO.; WHITTAKER AND CO.: BAILLIERE, PARIS: MACLACHLAN AND STEWART, EDINBURGH : HODGES, FOSTER, AND CO., DUBLIN: AND ASHER, BERLIN. 1888. “Omnes res creatze sunt divine sapientiz et potenti testes, divitiz felicitatis humane :—ex harum usu donitas Creatoris; ex pulchritudine sapientia Domini; ex cconomia in conservatione, proportione, renovatione, potentia majestatis elucet. Harum itaque indagatio ab hominibus sibi relictis semper sstimata ; a veré eruditis et sapientibus semper exculta; malé doctis et barbaris semper inimica fuit.”—Linavs. “Quel que soit le principe de la vie animale, il ne faut qu’ouvrir les yeux pour voir qu’elle est le chef-d’ceuvre de la Toute-puissance, et le but auquel se rappor- tent toutes ses opérations.”—Bruckner, Théorie du Systeme Animal, Leyden, 1767. Seeks gilmore see arlhersyhvanupoywers Obey our summons; from their deepest dells The Dryads come, and throw their garlands wild And odorous branches at our feet; the Nymphs That press with nimble step the mountain-thyme And purple heath-flower come not empty-handed, But scatter round ten thousand forms minute Of velvet moss or lichen, torn from rock Or rifted oak or cavern deep: the Naiads too Quit their loved native stream, from whose smooth face They crop the lily, and each sedge and rush That drinks the rippling tide: the frozen poles, Where peril waits the bold adventurer’s tread, The burning sands of Borneo and Cayenne, All, all to us unlock their secret stores And pay their cheerful tribute. J. Taytor, Norwich, 1818, Qo ALERE FLAMMAM. CONTENTS OF VOL, I. [SIXTH SERIES. ] NUMBER I. I. On the Structure and Affinities of the Genus Parkeria, Carp. By H. Attryne Nicuorson, M.D., D.Sc., Regius Professor of Natural History in the University of Aberdeen. (Plate III.) ; II. Notes on some Australian Polyzoa. By T. WHITELEGGE III. Description of two new Chameleons from Nossi Bé, Mada- gascarg day G. A. bOULENGER. «(Plate dls) aui cts erate eee aus IV, Ona rare American Newt, Molge meridionalis, Cope. By G. Ji\o J EICUAETONS (C17), Rae etn, Se eneemtn he hepa een sat ey ner RE V. On the Affinity of the North-American Lizard-Fauna. By AES TES AGN TLE, EWES RUN wre 5 cp ePo eeu ayer afaes etait 8) Vasa aye eralelt OR Ia VI. Contributions to the Knowledge of the Reproduction of Eu- glypha alveolata, Duj. By Dr. F. BhocumMann (Plate IV.) ...... VII. Notes on the Determination of the Fossil Teeth of Mylio- batis, with a Revision of the English Eocene Species. By A. Smita WoopwarbD, F.G.S., F.Z.8., of the British Museum (Natural His- CORY ae Ch MLS Tea thee, alates aieials weheieistae wisi esanel sl Hae Lao R tae VIII. On three extremely interesting new Moths of the Family Chaleoside from Kilima-njaro and Natal. By A. G. Bur.er, PMNS Ee ino Wolo Mare nner Bae Caren k «ike ta se st ae ee te ens Bare New Books :—Contributions a étude des Bopyriens. Par ALFRED Giarp et JULES Bonnier.—F reshwater Sponges: a Monograph. By Epwarp Ports. Including ‘ Diagnosis of the European Spongillide. By Prof. Franz Vespovsky (Prague). — A Manual of Zoology for the Use of Students, with a General Intro- duction on the Principles of Zoology. By Henry ALLEYNE Nicnoison, M.D. &c.—Living Lights: a Popular Account of Page il 24 wb. 27 36 47 Phosphorescent Animals and Vegetables. By C. F. Horper 51—57 Proceedine's of the Geological Society 2.2.20. .5.600ee vec e eee lv CONTENTS. Note on the Genus Lophopus, by T. Whitelegge ; On the Existence of a Fish belonging to the Genus Nevpercis in the Atlantic, by M. Léon Vaillant; On the Pelagic Fauna of some Lakes in Auvergne, by M. J. Richard; The Fauna of the Podophthal- mous Crustacea of the Bay of Marseilles, by M. Paul Gourret ; On the supposed Peripheral Processes of the Clone, by M. E. Topsent; On the Formation of Vegetable Mould by the Action Page obcertain Animals, by Dr. Cy Weller oa)... tee ee 62—68 NUMBER II. IX. On some new Species of the Genus Spongodes, Less., from the Philippine Islands and the Japanese Seas. By Dr. Tu. SrupER, ORO oer: ave hieiotea staan Se evan See Ste ee oe ES in om eyy ante X. Polyzoa of Mauritius. By R. Kirxparrick, Assistant in the British Museum (Nattiral History). (Plates VIL-X.)............ XI. Note on the Extinct Reptilian Genera Megalania, Owen, and Meiolania, Owen. By A. SmirH Woopwarp, F.G.S., F.Z.S., of the British Museum) (Nattiral History), ::3 .4.-5s) is close to the ambulacro-interradial suture in a rather broad, low, demi-plate, whilst the aboral pair (c) is nearly vertical to the adoral pair (a). Both of these pairs are in primary plates, the adoral being in the largest. As in the other genera the pores of a peripodium are much closer than their continuations within the test. Microcyphus. (Pl. XI. figs. 1, 6-12.) There are some very remarkable and, in my experience, unique structural characters about the ambulacra of Micro- cyphus zigzag, Agass., which appear to be due to the growth in thickness, externally and internally, of the plates and to the very oblique paths of the canals of the pores. Blocking out of the ends of component plates occurs, and some plates which are perfectly visible on the inside of the test are not seen on the outside, and they have been hidden by the con- tinuous superficial deposit of test material. Moreover, parts of the component plates of compound ones are sometimes sepa- rated from their sutures in a very unusual manner (fig. 1). On looking at the ambitus of a specimen (fig. 6) the low broad ambulacral plates, which are broader superficially than within, are noticed to have an adoral pair of pores (a) nearer the median line of the ambulacrum than the other pairs, which are oblique and close to the ambulacro-interradial suture ; a number of plain tubercles and miliaries are upon 114 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the the plate, some small ones being amongst the pairs of pores, which are large and in peripodia and separated by a narrow process. On looking at the inside of the corresponding part of the test (fig. 7) it is impossible to recognize the ex- ternal arrangement. ‘The pairs of pores are in a very slightly curved vertical series, and the adoral pair of perforations (a) is not much or at all out of the direction of the other two pairs. But the obliquity of the canals of the adoral pair is great (fig. 8), and in all cases there is more plate-structure between the pairs of pores and the ambulacro-interradial suture than is visible on the outside. ‘The pores are quite 1 millim. to 1°5 millim. apart, on the inside of the test. The test is very thick, and the ambulacro-interradial sutures are quite obliterated, and fracture will most certainly not occur along that line. The sutures between the compound plates are slightly depressed or broadly grooved on the free outer surface of the test, and the pits are exceedingly shallow. Taking a plate at the ambitus which is normal, and they are rare, and applying benzule, a line of suture is seen to pass below the upper peripodium of the triplet with a down- ward curve across the plate, to reach the median sutural edge close to the aboral median angle. ‘This suture marks the adoral boundary of the upper component of the plate, and it is a primary (fig. 6, ¢). A line passes adorally to the middle peripodium (4) of the three, and curves with a slant upwards and joins the other suture at no great distance towards the median line. This line is the adoral suture of the median plate of the compound, and it is a small demi-plate (fig. 6, 0). The line just mentioned nearly touches the aboral edge of the lowest or adoral peripodium (a) of the innermost pair of pores, and they are placed in a primary plate, which carries the ornamentation of the greater part of the combination (fig. 6, a). An inner view of this plate (fig. 7) shows a simple curved series of pores, the width apart of the pores of a pair being much greater than in a peripodium. ‘The path of the sutures is very distinct and is very like that of Salmacis. The ob- liquity of one of the canals of the adoral pair is shown in fig. 8. Near the apical system the compound ambulacral plates are narrower than at the ambitus, but are made much upon the same plan; but a little lower down very remarkable differ- ences are seen on the inside of the test. A compound plate will be seen not far from the apex, within, and its component plates are all primaries (fig. 9, @), Anatomy of the Temnopleuride. 115 and if their middle sutures were more curved, the arrange- ment would be Diadematoid; but the adoral suture of the upper and the aboral suture of the lower primary are nearly transverse. Nearer the ambitus are some arrangements of plates unlike any hitherto noticed. There is an upper compound ambulacral plate (fig. 10) and the aboral com- ponent is a long low primary (c) with its adoral suture dipping towards the next plate in adoral succession. This plate (0) is a small triangular one, and its adoral suture does not reach the adoral pore of the pair belonging normally to the plate. Under the use of evaporating benzule I cannot detect any suture coming from the adoral pore. Conse- quently the adoral component (a) of the plate under considera- tion is a large primary, and includes the adoral pore of the pair properly belonging to the demi-plate above. In the compound plate next below, the upper component plate (c) is the usual primary, and the next (4) is a demi-plate with its suture passing from the adoral pore of its pair vertically to the corresponding or adoral pore of the pair of the primary above. The dotted line is in the path of a thickening which recalls the position of the suture in fig. 9. In the next plate (fig. 11) the suture of the adoral pore of the middle plate (b) is plainly turned obliquely upwards and outwards to reach the small demi-plate, and the first stage of the exclusion of a pore from its plate is exemplified. Fig. 11 is of two compound triple plates, and in the upper one the aboral member is a low primary (c) ; the next plate (6), which should have been a perfect demi-plate, is one which only contains the aboral pore of its pair, and is excluded from the ambulacro-interradial suture. The adoral pore of the pair (6) has its suture just touching the union of the adoral suture of the single pore-bearing plate with the adoral suture of the upper primary (c). The lowest plate (a) is a large irregular primary. The same condition of things is seen in the next or actinal com- pound plate (the lowest of fig. 11), but the aborted plate (0), with only one pore, is not excluded from the ambulacro-inter- radial suture. Below the ambitus of the test the variety in the distribution of the sutures, as seen from within under benzule, is as extraordinary as abactinally, for (fig. 12) in a well-marked example the upper (¢) component is a low primary with a dip down of its adoral suture towards the space between the pores of the middle (6) component plate, and the adoral pore has got above and out of the touch of the adoral suture. ‘The middle pair of pores (>) has its aboral pore in a demi-plate; but the adoral pore ts on the line of the adoral suture of the upper 116 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the primary plate (c). The lower component isa normal primary Q). If the ambulacral plates are separated along the ambulacral median suture the usual knobs and sockets are seen upon the opposite edges of the plates, and amongst them dark lines are seen under benzule (fig. 1). The knobs and sockets in the figure are in lines and groups, and most are near the outer part of the test ; the lines are almost straight and some reach from one surface to the other, and all are the joined sutures of primary components of compound plates. Some lines, however, have a slant, and whilst most are simple, others have acurved offshoot which starts below the outer surface and, after curving, becomes straight. As the space included be- tween two lines of sutures is a plate or part of one, so the surface between the bend and the straight suture is a part of a plate. That this is the case is easily noticed in such plates as fig. 9* (a), for the line of the adoral suture of the upper primary (c) can be traced to the median edge of the plate and partly upwards, but not to the surface of the test; it is represented in fig. 9 at x. In every instance of this bending of a sutural line as it passes from within outwards in the test there are proots of the outward addition of material having buried the suture and its plate, so that the outer markings of such a plate would not tally with the inner, and these last are relics of the early state of growth of the test. Amblypneustes. The ambulacral plates of Amblypneustes (fig. 13) are low, broad, and thin, and the pairs of pores are in large peripodia ; the adoral pair of a triplet is not placed relatively so far inwards as in Microcyphus ; but the appearance on the inside of the test is very different. In Amblypneustes the middle pair of a triplet is nearest the ambulacro-interradial suture, and the aboral pair is placed obliquely above and inwards to the middle pair; and this obliquity is continued to the adoral pair of pores of the plate next in vertical succession. Hence there is the common appearance presented of sets of oblique pairs in threes, and this is shown to perfection inside the test, and the appearance is intensified by the obliquity of succeeding sets of three having their inner pores along the same oblique line as the outer pores of triple pairs placed above and below. A primary plate, which is the aboral constituent of Micro- cyphus (c, fig. 6), does not exist, however, in Amblypneustes, for the aboral component (fig. 13, c) is a low broad demi- Anatomy of the 'Temnopleuride, LIZ plate ; the middle plate (4) is a low narrow demi-plate, and the adoral pair of pores is in a large primary plate (a). Holopneustes. The nature of the ambulacral plates of Holopneustes purpu- rescens, Liitk. sp., is much easier to comprehend than that of the other and broad poriferous zoned species, HZ. porosissimus, Agass. But the same method of examination must be em- ployed as in other polypores, and when it has been mastered in the first-named species the difficulty vanishes with regard to the apparent confusion of the plates in the other form. The rule must be followed which enables the adoral pair of pores or their peripodium to be distinguished; and it must be remembered that in the great majority of instances the pair is nearer the ambulacral median line than the other pairs of a compound plate. In Holopneustes purpurescens (figs. 14, 15, 16) the ambu- lacral plates are low and broad, and usually there are double plates near the ambitus (fig. 14) consisting of two vertical sets of triplets combined in a geometrical plate; elsewhere the plates are single, or there may be an alternation of single and double plates. The test is rather thin and the poriferous zone is rather broad, the peripodia being triserial in arrange- ment. ‘The pairs are close vertically and rather distant hori- zontally. One vertical row of pairs is very regular and is internal, that is nearest the interporiferous area, and each pair is in the adoral plate (a) of acompound plate. This adoral plate is a primary, and forms most of the interporiferous part of the geometrical plate ; it extends to the median suture; but it may be excluded from that part of the poriferous zone which is close to the ambulacro-interradial suture (figs. 14- 16), or, as is the case near the apical system, it forms all the adoral part of the compound plate and reaches the ambulacro- interradial suture (fig. 15, a). The outer vertical series of pairs of pores is also a very regular one and consists entirely of those belonging to the middle components (9, figs. 14 and 16) of compound plates, the component plate being a narrow demi-plate. Near the apical system the little demi-plate (, fig. 15) is separated from the adoral suture of its geometrical compound by a low part of the primary just noticed; but usually there is no such inter- val, and the expansion of the demi-plate has caused the exclusion of the portion of the primary immediately adoral to a (figs. 14-16). It is this blotting-out of part of a plate Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. 9 118 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the which causes the outer and inner pairs of pores of a triplet to be so nearly on the same horizontal line. The middle series of pairs (c) confused or not in vertical succession relates invariably to the upper or aboral plate of a compound geometrical plate; and this should not be forgotten in investigating the distribution of plates in the very compli- cated poriferous zones of the other species of the genus. Each pair of the middle series is in a low but broad demi- plate, and is placed remotely from the ambulacro-interradial suture (fig. 14, c). Every compound plate consists therefore of a low triple set of pairs. It should be noticed that the pores are very oblique in a peripodium. On examining the test from within, a different arrangement of the pores is observed, but the great dissimilarity noticed in Microcyphus does not occur. Nevertheless the pores of a pair are much further apart than on the free surface, and the great horizontal distance of the pairs is not recognized. Seen on the inside of the test (figs. 15, 16) the pairs of pores are in zigzag, but the adoral pair can be recognized by a certain vertical arrangement and by the inner or adoral pore of the pair being large and at the end of a short groove; the other or aboral pore is small, circular, and is placed obliquely upwards and outwards. Fig. 15 is a view, slightly diagram- matic, of two compound plates near the apex, seen on the inside of the test during the action of benzule. he adoral pairs of pores are readily distinguished, because the adoral] pore is upon the lower horizontal suture of the compound plate. ‘The contact of the adoral primary plate is seen with the ambulacro- interradial suture. In fig. 16 the exclusion of the corre- sponding plate a is seen, and in all plates a singular curva- ture of the lower horizontal suture occurs, and it is curved up towards the upper pore of the pair before passing outwards to the ambulacro-interradial suture. ‘This curving is very anomalous, and is especially distinct when the primary is excluded. The outer and more or less vertical row of pairsof pores, with one of the pores close to the ambulacro-interradial suture, is the middle pair of the compound, and is in a small demi-plate ; its pores are much more horizontal when seen from within than in the peripodium (figs. 15, 16, 6). The highest pair of pores of a plate is further from the ambulacro-inter- radial suture than the pair just described, and its pores are variably placed as regards verticality, and they often overlap the outer pore of the adoral pair and the inner pore of the Anatomy of the Temnopleuride. ite pair in the demi-plate; the inner pore of this aboral pair is usually nearly vertical to the outer pore of the adoral pair. The pair corresponds to one of the middle vertical series (ce) seen on the outside of the test, and is in a low broad demi- plate. It is not difficult to make out the sutures of the compound plates with benzule near to the apical system ; but the crowd- ing of the plates lower down and the absorption of a part of the adoral primary, together with the horizontal curvatures of some of the sutures, place considerable difficulties in the way. The adoral suture of a compound plate (fig. 15, @) is hori- zontal near the apical system, and usually but not invariably so when the primary is not partly excluded (fig. 1). The adoral or large pore of the primary plate, a, is of course tra= versed by the more or less horizontal adoral suture of the geometrical plate; but the small circular aboral pore of the pair is not remote from the suture, as is usually the case in Echinoidea, for the suture bends up to it more or less. ‘The direction of the suture from the aboral pore outwards is either straight or in a slight curved convexity directed upwards. In this last instance the suture is in contact with the adoral pore of the narrow demi-plate 6, fig. 16. It is anomalous for one line of suture to cross the adoral canals of a lower and upper plate; but it is well exemplified in the case of this Hlolopneustes. When the primary is not excluded (fig. 15, a) the middle demi-plate of the compound has an adoral suture of its own, and at or close to the adoral pore of the pair it turns upwards with a curved concavity towards the ambulacral median line, to reach the adoral suture of the aboral or upper component of the compound plate. The aboral or outer pore of the pair is not remote from the horizontal suture (fig. 15, 6), and is often upon it. The aboral plate of the compound seen from within (figs. 15, 16, c) is a low demi-plate which is longer than the middle demi-plate, and when the primary (@) is not excluded its adoral suture is horizontal and turns up with a curve to reach the upper edge of the compound plate just between the pores of the adoral pair of the next geometrical plate in vertical succession. But when the primary is excluded the adoral suture of this upper component is curved convexly downwards, and it has its curvature continued so as to join the horizontal suture between the compound plate and its fellow above, a little external to the adoral pore of the pair belonging to the adoral primary component of the plate above. ‘Lhe appear- * 120 Prof. P. M. Dunean on the ance given under benzule is of a number of low ellipses placed vertically, and they are formed by the adoral sutures of the upper plates and the aboral sutures of the lower plates in succession (fig. 16). The Pits. The pits at the sutural angles and elsewhere are described in the communication already alluded to (Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool. vol. xvi.). The distinctness of the pits in Amb/ypneustes and their slight depth in Mespilia, Microcyphus, and Holopneustes is evident, and A. Agassiz has pointed them out along the lines of sutures as well as at the angles in Pleurechinus and in a species of Amblypneustes. But the pitting is in excess in Temnopleurus and Salmacis, and is less in the genera just mentioned. The pits near the peristome in Temnopleurus toreumaticus have a large and rather depressed spheroidal spheridium at their entrance *, and many others have a pedi- cellaria close by. It does not appear that there are any special functions relating to the pits, and the same thing may be said in respect of the deepening, grooving, widening, and depressing of the outer surfaces of the plates close to the sutural lines; but it is clear that these modifications of the test enable a larger amount of outer test surface to come in contact with water. The Articulation and Muscles of the primary Spines. The spines are for the most part slightly compressed, and some are very much so; they have a well-developed milled ring, which is broader than the rest, and which has its milling continuous with the longitudinal fluting of the spine. The spine diminishes in breadth below the milled ring very rapidly, and the hollow cotyloid cavity has a blunt free edge more or less notched. The spines are cellular within, with a double series of radi- ating processes and a very narrow circular central space (fig. 28). The primary tubercles have a well-formed scrobicule, which slants down from the boss and is often slightly raised exter- nally, so as to present a prominent circular border ; it is plain and smooth, except close to the boss, which has a decided crenulation upon it close to the neck of the imperforate and projecting globose mamelon. The cotyloid cavity of the spine fits upon the mamelon, and the notched free edge comes * Lovén, Etudes, pl. x. fig. 38. “ Anatomy of the 'Temnopleuride. 121 in contact with the crenulation of the boss, so that the mamelon is well hidden. As Valentin described in 1841, the joint of the spine and tubercle has three layers—the outer an epithelial, pigmented and ciliated, thin layer, a middle thin and more or less fasciculate layer of muscular fibres, and an inner articular capsule. Valentin’s researches were made upon species of Hchinus with smooth bosses, and as those of Temnopleurus are crenu- late their examination is not devoid of interest, especially as the question of the classificatory value of crenulation is con- stantly arising. In Yemnopleurus the inner structure surrounding the joint is the articular capsule, which is a white, soft, mass of im- perfectly differentiated matter, with granules, connective tissue, and extremely indistinct fibres. ‘The microscopic ap- pearances are very negative. The white matter adheres to the lower part of the spine, below the milled ring, and to the edge of the cotyloid cavity ; it is firmly adherent to the crenu- lation on the top of the boss of the tubercle. A quantity of the white enclosing substance is spread over the surface of the boss and scrobicule like a flap, but there is some definite connexion between the hard and soft parts. ‘This soft cap- sular structure is very weak, however, and if the outer muscular layer is ruptured, soon gives way to a slight pull or to unusual depression of the top of the spine. ‘The fracture occurs at the point where the free edge of the lower end of the cotyloid cavity is movable upon the crenulation of the boss. Dislocation of the spine then occurs. The muscular layer is considerable in height, although very thin, and it reaches from its origin around the edge of the scrobicule of a tubercle, upwards to the inferior edge of the milled ring of the spine; it covers the articular capsule and neither receives fibres from the boss nor from its crenulation. The muscular fibres arise from the connective tissue of the outer edge of the scrobicule, and they are very delicate, separate under the microscope, and exceedingly simple. There are no differentiated structures in them, and the dis- tribution in bundles is not striking, and indeed it does not usually exist. ‘Ihe nervous supply is considerable, beneath the muscular fibres, and the very minute nervous fibres have ganglion-shaped parts upon them*, ‘The delicate layer of * The minute anatomy of most of the parts of some species of Hchi- nometradz and Echini has been of late worked out with great success, and published by Otto Hamann (“ Beitrige zur Histologie der Echino- dermen,” Jenaische Zeitschrift, Bd. xxi. Neue Folge, Bd. xi. p. 87, 1887). 122 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the cells which is situated upon the muscular layer may deceive a young microscopist into crediting that there are cross light and dark marks in the muscular fibres; but careful illumina- tion and the use of a lens capable of good definition expose the error. Diadema setosum has the primary tubercles with crenulated bosses and perforated mamelons, and the part of the spine between the lower end or edge of the cotyloid cavity and the milled ring is very long. I find that the muscular investment of the joint greatly resembles that of Temnopleurus, that it arises from the outer edge of the scrobicule of the primary tubercle, and is inserted at the lower edge of the milled ring, and possibly here and there upon the outside of the spine below the milled ring and the capsule of the joint. This capsule covers the ends of thespine and the top of the boss and covers the crenulation and extends as a flat layer beyond it. No muscular fibres penetrate this capsule, and none arise from the crenulation. It is interesting to note that in the same specimen of Diadema some of the bosses are perfectly crenulated, others are half crenulated, and not a few may be destitute of the structure. This is not uncommon in other forms. It would therefore appear that crenulation and perforation of the tubercles is not of sufficient physiological importance to distinguish genera, although it may be useful in grouping species. The Branchie. (Pl. XI. figs. 17-21.) The branchiee of Temnopleurus and Salmacis are small and narrow, although moderately long. They are situated upon the peristomial membrane, close to the small so-called “ in- cisions” or rather grooves, one of which is placed close to each ambulacro-interradial suture at the peristomial margin. The branchie protrude and reach up over the edge of the grooves and may be 2 millim. in vertical measurement. In Temnopleurus (tig. 17) the narrow branchiew are in finger- shaped processes, from six to twelve or more in number ; they arise from a hollow stem and rarely biturcate, but some are in tufts which come from the same source. All are tumid, rounded at the free end, and hollow. Decalcified specimens show that there is an outer thick layer of columnar epithe- lium (fig. 18), the cells containing granules which are most numerous at their bases (fig. 19) ; but it appears that there may be groups of cells so crowded with pigment corpuscules that a definite pattern is presented on the outside of the finger-shaped body, consisting of longitudinal, irregular, Anatomy of the Temnopleurida. 123 narrow, wavy lines. This ornamentation is also seen upon the main stem or water-tube. The hollow of a process is lined with a smaller and less columnar endothelium, with granules, and it appears to linea somewhat irregular basement membrane (fg. 18). Between the outer and inner series of cells is a somewhat wide space readily transmitting light, and having no definite structures in it, and in specimens which have not been decalcified cal- careous spicules are found there in some abundance. In Salmacis (fig. 20) the branchiz are larger and stouter than in Zemnopleurus; they are, however, narrow and spring from a larger and higher stem, The processes are more in tufts, and are shorter and more numerous than in Temno- pleurus. These branchiz pass up over the margin of the peristome at the branchial grooves and reach along the flanks of the ambulacra for a line or two. The principal structure to be noticed is that which is visible before applying acids. The calcareous spicula are separate, moderately numerous, and variable in size and shape. ‘‘C”-shaped spicula are seen, but are not common, and the others are bifurcate or pinnate ; and on the water-tube there are numerous fenestrated elliptical or irregularly shaped plates. The Ampulle. (Pl. XI. figs. 21, 22.) Decalcified portions of the ambulacra of Temnopleurus toreumaticus stained with hematoxylon were used. ‘The ampulle are small and bolster-shaped near the apical disk and become gradually larger and closer in vertical succession towards the ambitus, where they are large, long, from side to side, and tallest near the median ambulacral water-tube (fig. 21). Their actinal edge is tuinid and more or less gibbous, a swelling being noticed close to the water-tube and a con- traction midway between the two ends, and there is more or less of a narrowing quite at the part which corresponds to the poriferous zone. “The abactinal edge is less irregular and runs up to a blunt point at the poriferous zone end. They are broader than high and tumid. ‘The opening into the water tube is seen by transmitted light very plainly, but the holes for the tentacular canals are indistinct. ‘l'hey are placed in the interradial side half of the ampulle and are recognized as a dull elliptical space, which appears to be more or less occupied by fibres of the inner part of the base of a tentacle which have become compressed over the openings of the pores externally. The structure of the walls of the ampulle is very interest- 124 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the ing, and they are not simple bags with a contractile coat. The bag is composed of very delicate, close, exceedingly narrow circular fibres, which in the main are vertical, although they depart from that direction in the gibbous parts. The accessory structures are irregular transverse rows of small elongate pigmented spots, which, in sections or oblique views of the ampulle, are seen to be the outer terminations of fibres resembling the usual unstriped fibres of small spines, which pass inwards to varying depths in the hollow of the ampulle, and are attached to reticulations of connective tissue (fig. 22). These fibres exist in Psammechinus and are very suggestive of less definite structures, which may be noticed in the abac- tinal branchial tentacles of Calopleurus. 'These spots give a very marked aspect to the outside of the ampullee, and their inner prolongations probably prevent too sudden expansion of the calibre of the ampulla, and may also assist in the con- traction required for the infilling of the tentacle. A very delicate epithelium and endothelium * occur. It is interesting to notice the great size of the ampulle in relation to the dimensions of the bases of their tentacles at a slight distance from the apical system, and to observe that the bags reach quite across the whole breadth of the ambu- lacral plates. It appears from the examination of the bases of the tentacles, that the so-called geminous or reverse condition of the pores of the pairs ts not of the least physiological importance, and whether there is a groove externally on the test between the pores or whether there ts a granule or nodule between them is of no significance in a natural system of classification. In the specimens which gave the above results the ampulle were tense and tumid, but in some others, in which they were seen to be empty and flaccid, there was some departure from the exact shape, and moreover the internal fibrous arrange- ment was not visible. This was doubtless due to the con- siderable time during which the test had been in impure alcohol. The two openings for the tentacular canals were, however, very visible, and there was no vestige of any val- vular structure. But a fortunate section of the tentacle of one of the ampulle showed that the inner membrane is con- tinuous through the pores with that of the ampulla. The Tentacles. (Pl. X1. figs. 26, 27.) , These well-developed structures of Temnopleurus are similar throughout the ambulacra, and the genus is therefore homceo- * See also Hamann, op, cit. pl. xiv. fig. 3. Anatomy of the Temnopleuride. 125 podous. The tentacles are moderately long and_ stout in alcoholic specimens, and their bases are broad and encircle the not very strongly marked peripodia; the stem soon becomes cylindrical and very slightly tapering, and it di- minishes somewhat suddenly in diameter close to the large suctorial or cup end. ‘The hollow of the tentacle is well seen, and it is the outcome of the junction of two short canals which come through the two pores of each pair. The sepa- ration between these canals is very slight in the base of the tentacle. The plan adopted was to decalcify some specimens and to colour and mount in balsam, and to mount others without decaleifying them. In the decalcified specimens the tumid edges of the sucker end are more or less faintly lobed, and there is evidently some circular arrangement of fibres there. This would tighten the grasp of the cup-shaped end, and would act upon the quadripartite calcareous cirelets which will be mentioned further on. A thick epithelium and much connective tissue below it form the bulk of the cup, and are continuous with the similar structures of the outside of the body of the ten- tacle. On the body this structure is very delicate, and the epithelium is rather more columnar than flat, it contains granules and has cilia. In some tentacles there is much thickening of the epithelial part near the neck of the cup, and much transverse folding of it and the subjacent structures, but elsewhere the cells may be excessively thin and trans- parent. Four sets of muscular fibres are visible in a tentacle: first, the circular fibres of the cup; secondly, the concentric and radiating fibres of the top of the tentacular cavity and base of the cup (see Lovén, ‘ Pourtalesia,’ p. 49, pl. x1. figs. 112-115) ; thirdly, the outer layers of circular fibres ; and fourthly, the innermost muscular layer composed of longi- tudinal fibres. The circular fibres are most developed near the cup and in what may be called the neck of the tentacle ; but elsewhere their presence varies most remarkably. In some tentacles a delicate close layer can be distinguished composed of exceedingly narrow, close, circular fibrils of great slenderness ; they appear to be nucleated here and there and separate; striation does not occur. In other examples the circular fibres are very scarce and wide apart; in some they do not exist. The longitudinal fibres reach from the base at the peripo- dium, where they are stout and very visible, up the shaft, where they become excessively attenuate and slightly dis- 126 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the tant, to the base of the cup below the calcareous structure. They are often slightly wavy, nucleated, and unstriated (see also Hamann, op. cit. pl. xiv. fig. 7). The circular fibres are placed over a delicate mem- branous tissue which may sometimes be seen projecting beyond the cut end of a tentacle, and this is clearly epithe- liate and very minutely granular. Probably it is ciliated, but no trace of cilia came under observation. The longi- tudinal fibres are usually somewhat coloured naturally at the peripodia, and arise by broadish bases, and soon attenuate ; they are apparently separate and not in fascicles. As is the case around the origin of the muscles of the spines, there is a very fine lax entanglement of threads much less in diameter than the thinnest muscular fibre around the peripodium, and it is apparently nervous in character. ‘The nerves have small simple ganglionic swellings, and conform to Lovén’s well-known description, except that I have not seen multi- polar cells uniting. The tentacles which are between the ambitus and apical system are larger than those situated actinaliy, and their calibre and middle space are greater, the muscular walls are more attenuate, and the cup end is more tumid and smaller. These tentacles have a more baggy appearance than the others, and when decalcified the muscular layers are very distinct, especially the transverse or circular series, which is so feebly developed in the actinal set. In fact these tentacles resemble in a minor degree the similarly placed structures of Salmacis. The muscular fibres which close in the free end of the tentacle pass inwards from the stout continuous calcareous spicules which form the foundation of the circlet of calcareous reticulation of the cup; this more or less quadrangular con- tinuous structure Lovén has called the foot-ring or “ psellion” (Lovén, op. cét. pp. 49, 50). The muscular fibres unite at the centre of the neck of the tentacle and form the floor of the sucker or adhering apparatus. The psellion is so arranged that the spoke-like spicules of the four parts of the calcareous circlet spring generally from the middle of one of the four main spicules of it, and the junction of one main spicule with another marks the line of separation of the parts of the circlet (figs. 26, 27). Imme- diately below the psellion are two very slender spicules of the same length, and they are connected by vertical and distant short spicules. Sometimes a ragged areolar lamina extends slightly over the edge of the muscular circle. The calcareous circlet of the cup, springing as it were from Anatomy of the ‘Temnopleuride. 127 the psellion, and nearly reaching the cireumference of the free end of the cup, is very decidedly divided into four parts, and each part is composed of a reticulation which has five or six spoke-like processes which traverse the lamina of the circlet and are free at its circumference, some ends being simple points, others double or cellular. Between the spokes are cross pieces, and hence the reticulate and fenestrated appearance. At the sides of each lamina, that is at the four divisions of the circlet, the radiating spicular elements are stouter and not on the same plane; the consequence is that the space between the contiguous side spicules is not very distinct and sometimes it is clearly vacant, or there may be a slight reticulation in parts. Lovén con- sidered that probably there are muscular fibres between the side spicules of the four parts of the circlet in Towopneustes, and although they are not visible in the specimens before me, the possibility of their existence in fresh specimens is very considerable ; certainly these separate parts of the circlet would be approximated by the contraction of the circular fibres of the soft parts of the cup. Very few ‘C-shaped spicules are present in the tentacles of Temnopleurus, and I have only seen one instance of an acerate spicule. The circlet of the cup of the larger and wider abactinal tentacles is smaller than that of the actinal and is less elaborately ornamented. Salmacis differs decidedly in the construction of its ten- tacles from Temnopleurus. ‘he abactinal tentacles are large, long, baggy, and have small terminal cups; the actinal have stout walls, are shorter, thicker, have a narrow calibre, and the cup is large, fleshy, and the circlets are well developed and very large. A circlet of an actinal tentacle has six or even seven divi- sions, and each is as distinct as it is in Zemnopleurus ; the spoke-like processes are much more numerous and pointed, and on the same circularline. ‘The psellion is well developed, and its accessory processes also. ‘The central muscular struc- ture is larger than in Temnopleurus, and there are many “C”- shaped spicules all about the cup and the upper part of the tentacle. The muscular structures are as in Temnopleurus. Now the cup of the abactinal tentacles supports a very small circlet, and its divisions are fewer in number than they are in the actinal tentacles, but the “C”-shaped spicules are in greater profusion, and the muscular layers are composed of better developed circular fibres and very distinct longitudinal ones. 128 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the The Pedicelluria. (Pl. XI. figs. 23, 24, 25.) These beautiful organs occur in vast numbers in Temno- pleurus toreumaticus, but it must be understood that dry tests do not furnish a moderate proportion of those which may be seen in specimens preserved in alcohol immediately after capture. The reason is that most of all kinds of the pedi- cellarie have soft and long or short flexible limp necks, others are placed upon solid stalks. The majority of the soft- necked pedicellariz fall off in drying and are lost. This can be easily proved by examining dry specimens and col- lecting their pedicellariz, and then comparing the results with the appearances presented by decalcified and coloured parts of the test preserved in balsam. very pedicellaria of an ambulacrum and of a radial plate can then be preserved, and it is remarkable how they crowd some spots and how long the necks are in relation to tentacles. The very fleshy look of the heads of pedicellariz is striking, and so are the muscular developments of many. The removal of some of the larger spines is necessary before parts of the test are decalcified, but care must be taken to notice the numerous pedicellarie which are around the scrobicular circles. Some of the pedicellariz are very large, and on the other hand the majority are exceedingly small. Sladen’s gland within the body is visible and moderately developed in one group; but the glandular structure common on the stems of the pedicellariz of some other generaare absent. There is no difficulty in distinguishing four kinds of pedi- cellarize in Temnopleurus. 1. Large tridactyle forms with a broad base to the body and very long prongs which are moderately broad, arched, becoming slightly narrower and not very sharp-pointed at the free end, being well fenestrated, and having a wide space between the lower parts of the prongs of contiguous valves. The sides of the prongs are slightly dentate, but there are no terminal teeth. These largest forms are rare and are seen near the basal plates upon the interradia, and here and there close to an ambulacrum. One or two are upon short stalks, others are upon long and slender ones placed upon small secondary tubercles or upon miliaries, and having muscles at the joint. The most interesting series has a long, soft, transparent neck placed upon a stalk and consisting of a glairy-looking struc- ture, in which a few longitudinally placed muscular fibres, some indefinite granular tissue, and pigment-spots occur. These necks are long or short and limp, and they are found Anatomy of the Temnopleuride. 129 curled around neighbouring structures after death ; they are continuous with the outer tissue of the stalk, and are exces- sively fragile. 2. Common tridactyle pedicellariz with smaller valves than the above, the base wide and suddenly diminishing, the prongs narrow, slender, very wide apart, long, and ended by a sharp curved point, below which are two others, one on each side (fig. 23). ‘The whole is fenestrated. The largest of these forms are seen actinally, as well as close to the apical system, and around the bases of the large spines. The ambulacro-interradial sutural region is a common spot. Smaller tridactyles with slightly stouter prongs are very common, and are found very generally distributed. Both of these forms of tridactyles often have long, soft necks and are placed upon long or short spinules ; some are without necks, and are either sessile or with stalks. 3. The globifera (fig. 24)* are very common, and there are a few very large ones near the apical system and a host of smaller forms very generally placed, and notably along the ambulacra and the median area of the interradia. The large and small have the same structure. The base is broad and tumid, gracefully merging into the broad, moderately long, broad, boldly curved, slightly angularly-ending prongs. The sides of the valves are distantly serrate, and a stout cal- careous ridge runs along the median line, and has lateral off- shoots, and in the hollows between are minute openings. This is a very marked character. These pedicellariz are, as the others, either placed upon soft necks or upon stalks of varying length, some 1 millim. 4, The triphylta or ophiocephalous pedicellariz (fig. 25) are in vast numbers, and are at once recognized by their very small size, their blunt free ends, tumid subcylindrical shape slightly longer than broad, and their very minute perforations. The have very blunt terminations to their valves, no teeth, and when looked at from above a trefoil appearance is seen. ‘They occur in vast numbers in the actinal region of the ambulacra and around all primary and secondary spines, around many tentacles, and upon the radial plates. ‘There are none upon the peristomial membrane or upon buccal plates. Most are * The globifera of authors, not especially of Otto Hamann, who would term them vemmiformes, The globifera of that excellent microscopist are large tumid tripartite globose-looking pedicellarize without calcareous heads, and with a very strong muscular layer. They secrete, and are, according to Hamann, very generally found on certain species of Hchi- noidea. I have evidence of their occurrence in Temnopleurus, near the apical disk, although I was not fortunate enough to discover them in Spherechinus. 130 Prof. P. M. Duncan on the placed upon soft necks, and these are of different lengths, and so are the stems on which the necks are situated. In Sa/macis the distribution of pedicellariz is not the same as in Temnopleurus. The peristomial membrane of Salmacis bicolor has ten buccal plates, which not only carry tentacles but a crowd of rather long-stemmed ophiocephalous pedicellariz or tryphylta occurs, and with them are sometimes found small globifera with unusually long valves; these may be on stalks or they may have soft long necks besides stalks, and they are smaller and not so tumid as the globifera of the test itself. Upon the test there are many pedicellarie, and the globi- fera are usually tumid at the base, but with a duck-mandible shaped valvular end; they are very regularly fenestrate, but the median thickening and ridge observed in Zemnopleurus are wanting. In both genera there are usually pedicellarie close to the pits of the sutures. The pedicellariz with long and short soft necks are common and are of all kinds. The Madveporite. The madreporite of the Temnopleurine is not like that of Echinus and Cidaris, for instead of the upper surface being spongy-looking and with very irregular openings, it is well defined in Temnopleurus, Salmacis, Amblypneustes, &c., and the water-openings are separate and large, and when decalcified they are tubular, andresemble distant cylindrical straight pipes; they have thick edges or sides lined with epithelium. ‘The height of these cylindrical pipes is not great. The madre- porite is well separated from the structure of the basal plate in which it is placed. Valentin described and drew some fusiform, band-like muscular slips which arise at the inner edge of the peri- procteal ring and pass inwards to the edge of the anus. He called them “ motores ani.” They are well seen in Tem- nopleurus, and staining with carmine shows very thin fibrillar muscular slips, with a considerable quantity of nerve filaments. The slips are distinct and separated. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI. Fig. 1. Microcyphus zxgzag, Agass, Side view of the plates on one side of the median ambulacral suture; knobs and sockets; dark lines indicating the sutures of the component plates of the geometrical ambulacral plates. ~X refers to fig. 9. Mag. Pp. Ad mia, 116. Anatomy of the Temnopleuride. 131 . Temnopleurus toreumaticus, Agass. A compound ambulacral plate. a, adoral primary; 6, middle demi-plate ; ¢, aboral pri- mary component plate. Mag. P. 112. . A plate seen from within, during the drying of benzule, showing the great separation of the pores of the pairs. Mag. P. 113. . Salmacis bicolor, Agass. Inner view of ambulacral plates. Same references as in fig. 3. Mag. P. 113. . Mespilia globulus, Agass. An ambulacral plate seen from within the test under benzule. Mag. P. 113. . Microcyphus zigzag, Agass. An ambulacral plate, sutures seen under benzule. Mag. Pp. 113, 114. . Same plate from within. Mag. P. 114. . Diagram of an adoral canal of a pair, oblique and reaching the peripodium. Mag. P. 114. . Ambulacral plates near the apex, seen from within, under benzule. Mag. P. 114. . Plates nearer the ambitus, abnormal distribution of sutures. Mag, P. 115. . Plates still nearer the ambitus, abnormal, under benzule. Mag. PL 115, . Plate below the ambitus, abnormal. Mag. P. 115. . Amblypneustes ovum, Lamk., sp. Ambulacral plates with sutures under benzule: ¢ is a low, broad demi-plate. P. 116. . Holopneustes purpurescens, A. Ag. A single and double com- pound ambulacral plate under benzule : a, the adoral component plate, is a primary which is excluded at the ambulacro-inter- radial suture. P. 117. . Inside view of plates nearer the apex. Mag. Pp. 118, 119. . View corresponding to fig. 14, from within. Mag. Pp. 118, 119. . Temnopleurus toreumaticus. A branchia decalcified and mag. 30. P. 122. . Part of a finger-shaped process highly magnified. Mag. 60. P. 122, . Epithelium. Mag. 120. P. 122. . A small tuft of the branchia of Salmacis not decalcified. Mag. POs. : . Ampulle of Temnopleurus, decalcified: a, water-canal. Mag. Pais: . Spots upon the ampulle, with muscle-fibres leading inwards into the ampulla. Mag. 80. P. 124. 3. End of a prong of a tridactyle pedicellaria of Temnopleurus. Mag. P. 129. 24. Head of a large globifera. Mag. P. 129. . A triphyltous pedicellaria, with a soft stalk placed upon a spinule. Mag. P. 129. . Part of the calcareous circlet of a tentacle of Temmnopleurus, Mag. P. 126. 7. The psellion. Mag. P. 126. . Section of a spine of Temnopleurus. Mag. P. 120. The amplification in most of these drawings is small. 132 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera XVI.—An Account of three Series of Lepidoptera collected in North-west India by Major Yerbury. By Artuur G. Butter, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e. Since the publication of my paper on Lepidoptera from Campbellpore and Murree (Proce. Zool. Soe. 1886, pp. 355- 395) Major Yerbury has forwarded to me from time to time no less than three collections, containing eight hundred speci- mens, accompanied by many additional notes of interest ; the series thus brought together enables one to form a very good idea of the fauna of Campbellpore and the neighbourhood, and also of the constancy or variability of the species; some of those which were represented in his first collection by single specimens are now represented by perhaps a dozen or more, whilst numerous species are added *, of which one is new to science. The following is a list of the species. RHOPALOCERA. Nymphalide. Danan. 1. Tirumala limniace. Papilio imniace, Cramer, Pap. Exot. i. pl. lix. D, E (1779). 3 2. Khairabad, 25th July, 1886. Var. a. Danais leopardus. Danais leopardus, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1866, p, 62. n. 36. g. Campbellpore, 30th March, 1886; Futch Khan’s bungalow, 23rd April. Var. Ob. Like 7. leopardus this has the patch on the interno-median interspace of primaries divided, but the upper half is united by a pedicle to the inner spot of the discal series. * Since this paper was commenced Major Yerbury has come to England and has brought his private collection and numerous other specimens with him, enabling me to introduce many additional species into this account of his captures. All that were required for perfecting the Museum series were most generously presented to the Trustees by Major Yerbury. Srom North-west India. 133 3 ¢. Campbellpore, 8th and 16th May, 1886. L. leopardus and var. b would appear to be the early forms of 7. limniace. “Common round Campbellpore in May and June; a few at Murree ; not seen on Thundiani.”—J, W. Yerbury, 2 2, Limnas chrysippus. Papilio chrysippus, Linneus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 263 (1764). Var. g. Campbellpore, 13th July, 1886. ‘‘Common everywhere except Thundiani; not seen on the hill, but was common about Abbottabad.”—J. W. Y. Var. Limnas alcippoides. Limnas alcippoides, Movre, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1883, p. 238, pl. xxxi. fig. 1. S$, 16th June, 2, 15th July, 1885; g, 30th May and 12th July, 1886. “Ten or twelve specimens taken in May and June, 1885; only two specimens seen in 1886. Varies greatly in amount of white.’—./. W. Y, 3. Salatura genutia. Papilio genutia, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. cevi. C, D (1782). 9, Campbellpore, 25th; ¢@, Hassan Abdal, 27th June; Hurripur, 14th October, 1886, “ A few at Campbellpore, June and July 1886; common at Hassan Abdal in June; seen about Abbottabad, August 1886 ; uncommon at Murree, August and September 1885; a single specimen seen on Thundiani, 12th September, 1886— the only Danats seen on the hill.’"—J. W, Y. SATYRINa”. A. Aulocera saraswati. Satyrus saraswatt, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iy. 2, p. 445, pl. xiv, figs. 3, 4 (1848). 6. Thundiani, 19th August, 1886. Common at Cotton’s Folly, below Murree; rare on Thundiani.”—J. W. Y. 5. Aulocera swaha, Satyrus swaha, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p, 444, pl. xiv. fies. 1, 2 (1848). g. Thundiani, 10th August; Nandar, 25th Sevtember, 1886. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. 10 134 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera “Common at Murree and Thundiani in August 1885 and 1886.7—7. W: Y. 6. Mipparchia parisatis. Satyrus parisatis, Kollar, Denkschr, Akad. Wien, Math.-nat. Cl. i. p. 52. n. 7 (1850). $. Khairabad, 2nd May, ¢ ?. 6th June; ¢. Kala Pani, 1st September, 1886. “Common on the hills round Abbottabad in August. Common at Khairabad in May and June. Seen at Attock and Tret.”—J. W. Y. 7. Callerebia nirmala. Erebia nirmala, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 501. n. 91. Between Kala Pani and Thundiani, 10th August, 1886. Major Yerbury mentions a second species, C. annada, Moore (C. hybrida, De Nicéville, nec Butler), as_ being “common on the lower slopes of the hill below Kala Pani— a few taken above Tret, 8th October, 1885,” and he thinks “it is possible that the Thundiani specimens are the former and the Tret specimens the latter species.” No specimens having been forwarded in the three series before me, I cannot speak positively ; but the species sent in the last collection, identified as C. hybrida by Mr. De Nicéville, was simply typical C. annada, and therefore I think it highly improbable that the hybrid form between C. annada and C. scanda occurs in the neighbourhood ; if it does, C. scanda must be there also, yet nothing like it has yet been sent home by Major Yerbury. Of another species not yet sent to us and the identification of which I consider extremely doubtful *, viz. Callerebia daksha, Major Yerbury writes :—‘* Not uncommon at Murree in company with 583 (OC. nirmala), a few at Thundiani, August and September 1886.” The male of C. daksha differs from that sex of C. nirmala in its distinctly longer wings, the ocellus of primaries more transverse and oval, with equal pupils and very indistinct iris ; on the upper surface of the secondaries are three ocelloid white spots in addition to the ocellus, which is large and has a conspicuous white pupil, as in the female of C. nirmala; the under surface of the wings is quite plain, not mottled with paler scales as in C. nirmala (when seen through a lens), and * Specimens of C. irmala were identified as C. daksha in the former collection, and I have no doubt that such is the case in the present instance, Jrom North-west India. 135 therefore is of a richer brown colour; the secondaries also are distinctly marked with tive snow-white spots, followed by two ocelli, the first twice the size of the second. I have taken this comparative description from a Cashmere example of C. daksha labelled and presented to us by Mr. F. Moore, and doubtless a co-type; although in some respects it approaches the female of C. nivmala, the uniform rich brown colouring below and the sharply defined pure white spots on the wings give it a very different aspect *. The supposed specimens of CO. daksha sent in the former collection were typical females of C. nirmala, C. duksha is not in Major Yerbury’s boxes or cabinet. 8. Lethe verma. Satyrus verma, Kollar, in Higel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 447, pl. xvi. fies. 1, 2 (1848). Thundiani, 24th September, 1885. 9. Lethe dyrta. Debis dyrta, Felder, Reise der Noy., Lep. p. 497. n. 860 (1867). 3. Futch Khan’s bungalow near Kooteer, Chittah Pahar, ? 2000 feet; 9. 14th October, 1886. “Very common below Bugnoter (Murree and Abbottabad Road), also near Kala Pani in September 1885. A single specimen taken in the Chittar Pahar, 23rd April, 1886; also taken at Dewal, Murree, and the Kashmir Road.” —J. W. Y. 10. Amecera schakra. Satyrus schakra, Kollar, in Higel’s Kaschmir, iy. 2, p. 446, pl. xv. figs. 3, 4 (1848). 3S. Thundiani, 10th, 15th, and 25th August; 9. Near Abbottabad, 30th September, 1886. “ Common all along the hills from Murree to Thundiani; descends the hills below Kala Pani and Bugnoter, but was not seen in the immediate neighbourhood of Abbottabad.”’— dW. Y. 11. Ypthima avanta. Yphthima (sic) avanta, Moore, Proc. Zool, Soc. 1874, p. 567. Kala Pani, lst September; Bugnoter, 29th; Dhum tower, near Abbottabad, 30th September, 1886. Evidently occurs in company with Y. ordinata, which, in * After writing the above I looked up Mr. Moore’s figure, which is by no means good, since the white spots on the upper surface of the secon- daries mentioned in the description are obliterated by the colourer. LO* 136 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera the former collection, was forwarded under the same name. Major Yerbury says of it:—Ypthima avanta, De N., ordt- nata, B. Fairly common between Kala Pani and Abbottabad and between Bugnoter and Abbottabad in September.” Although the types of these two Ypthimas differ just as De Nicéville’s dry- and wet-season forms are supposed to do, they occur together in the same months, and therefore cannot be associated as one species on that supposition ; whether they are varieties or good species can only be decided by careful breeding from eggs which have been deposited. They differ as follows :— Y. ordinata. Y. avanta. Ocellus of primaries above Jarge Ocellus small and indistinct or and distinct; below larger than absent. in Y. avanta. Secondaries below without any With two more or less distinct distinct bands. bands. Any one seeing only the types of Y. ordinata and Y. avanta would believe them to be good distinct species ; but with the series which we now possess before me, I confess to having serious doubts of their distinctness ; at the same time there is not sufficient evidence to allow of their being associated under one name at present. 12. Ypthima bolanica. Ypthima bolanica, Marshall, Butt. Ind. i. p. 231. n. 224 (1883), Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, 4th April; Attock, 10th April; Khairabad, 11th April; Campbellpore, 13th April, 1886. The ocelli on the under surface vary as much as in some of the supposed dry- and wet-season forms of other species. “Common on the hills round Campbellpore, Attock, and Khairabad in March and April.”—J. W. Y. 13. Ypthima sakra. Ypthima sakra, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 286. n. 508 (1857). & 2 (in coiti). Thundiani, 27th August; ¢ var. 14th September, 1886. The male taken in September has a different formula to the ocelli on the under surface of the secondaries, 1 x 3 instead of 2x3; the upper ocellus, however, has a projection behind on the right-hand wing and in front on the left-hand wing; the ocellus of primaries also differs from the normal type in being smaller and less distinct above; all the other characters are from North-west India. 137 identical, so that there is no doubt that we have to do here with nothing more than individual variation. ““Common.on the lower slopes of Thundiani above Kala Pani; a few at Murree and Dewal, Aug. and Sept.”—dJ. W. Y. 14. Ypthima alemola, Ypthima alemola, Swinhoe, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1885, p. 127. Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, 28th March; Attock, 10th April; Campbellpore, 13th and 17th April; Khairabad, 11th and 18th; Akhor, 22nd; Hassan Abdal, 9th May, 1886. This and the following are sent under one number and are identified by De Nicéville as Y. asterope. We possess thirteen examples of the latter from Aden and Somali, and there is no difficuity in separating the Y. alemola type from it, as the latter has very minute oval ocelli on the under surface of the secondaries ; both forms are rather browner above, with more ochreous irides to the ocelli; but on the under surface there is really very little to separate Y. mahratta from Y. asterope. 1a Ypthima mahratta. Ypthima mahratta, Moore, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. vol. lili. pt. ii. 1, p. 16 (1884). 3S %. Khairabad, 11th and 18th April; Campbellpore, 13th April, 2nd June, 11th and 23rd July; Hassan Abdal, 27th June, 18th July ; road between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 9th August; Kala Pani, lst September, 1886. It will be seen that most of the specimens ot this form with the round ocelli were taken later in the year than Y. alemola ; but, as four of them were obtained in April, Y. mahratta cannot be regarded as a seasonal form of Y. alemola. Major Yerbury says of these two torms :—‘‘ Common on the hills round Campbellpore ; also on the lower slopes of the hills near Abbottabad.” 16. Ypthima nareda. Satyrus nareda, Kollar, in Miigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 451 (1848). One example, road between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 9th August, 1886. “ airly common between Abbottabad and Kala Pani; common at Murree in August 1885.” 138 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera NYMPHALINA. 17. Melitea persea. Melitea persea, Kollar, Denkschr. Akad. Wien, Math.-nat. Cl. i. p. 52. n. 6 (1850). Campbellpore, 23rd and 25th March, 1st April, and 16th May, 1886. The whole of the specimens are typical J. persea, and therefore perfectly distinct from the Afghan M. LRobertsii, with which Mr. De Nicéville continues to confound it. Major Yerbury says that it was ‘‘ not uncommon round Campbell- pore in June 1885 and again in March 1886; the spring brood seemed to be larger, darker-coloured, and with the base of the wings invaded with dusky : common also at Attock and Khairabad.’’ In the specimens now forwarded I note that those taken in March are darker but scarcely larger than those obtained in May, but the one specimen taken in April is unusually large, though not darker; it is a female. Of the two specimens taken near Attock Bridge in November and recorded in my former paper, one is much larger and slightly darker than the other, so that the specimens sent us by Major Yerbury up to the present time hardly bear out his views ; at the same time he is in a far better position to form an opinion upon the matter than I am, and therefore I do not call in question the general accuracy of his distinctions, whilst pointing out that they are by no means constant. 18. Argynnis tssea. Argynnis issea, Moore, Cat. Lep. EK. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 156. n. 828 (1857). 6 ¢ (in coité). Thundiani, 11th August; ¢. 15th August, 1886. “ Common on Murree and Thundiani; some of the speci- mens taken in the latter place have the black markings both on the fore and hind wings confluent, forming Blane mela- noid varieties.” —J. W. Y. 19. Argynnis kamala. Argynnis kamala, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 156. n. 824 (1857). Two females. Thundiani, 13th, 18th, and 20th August, and 9th October, 1886. So far Major Yerbury has only sent us females of this species, and, from a note which he appends to the number in his M§., it would seem that the male is unknown to him; valle Jrom North-west India. 139 yet he says that the species was “common at Thundiani in August and September 1886; a few seen at Murree, Sep- tember 1885.” 20. Atella phalanta. Papilio phalanta, Drury, Il. Ex. Ent. i. pl. xxi. figs. 1, 2 (1778). Campbellpore, 13th July ; Abbottabad, 1st October. “ Fairly common about Campbellpore and at Hassan Abdal in October.”—/J. W. Y. 21. Pyrameis cardut. Papilie cardui, Linnzeus, Fauna Suecica, p. 276. n. 1054 (1761). 3 ¢. Thundiani, 14th and 15th August, 1886. ““ Common everywhere.” —J. W. Y. 22. Pyrameis indica. Papilio atalanta indica, Herbst, Natur. Schmett. vii. pl. clxxx. figs. 1, 2 (1794). Thundiani, 13th August, 3rd, 9th, and 16th September, 1886. ‘*Common at Thundiani, August and September 1886; a single specimen seen in a mustard-field near Laurencepore, wth February, 1886.”—J. W. Y. 23. Vanessa kaschmirensis. Vanessa kaschmirensis, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 442, pl. xi. figs. 3, 4 (1848). Thundiani, 11th, 12th, and 17th August, 1886. “Probably the commonest butterfly on Thundiani; only two or three specimens taken at Murree.”—J. W. Y. 24. Vanessa charonia. Papilio charonia, Drury, Ill, Ex, Ent. i. pl. xv. figs. 1, 2 (1778). g. Thundiani, 9th and 21st September, 1886. ‘“Common round Murree; fairly common at Thundiani and Dewal in August and September.”—J. W. Y. 25. Vanessa agnicula. Grapta agnicula, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 559. g@. Thundiani, 17th August; 9. 12th September, 1886. Incorrectly identified as V. c-album, from which (apart trom other differences) it may easily be distinguished by its superior size and much blacker markings above. I have 140 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera fourteen examples of V. c-album from Zeller’s collection before me, and although they exhibit all the usual varieties of that species, not one of them at all nearly approaches V. agn7- cula; the Indian insect indeed far more nearly resembles V. hamigera of Japan, but has a broader external border on the upper surface of primaries, smaller submarginal spots on the secondaries, greyer and darker under surface, and a num- ber of little differences (quite constant) in the details of pattern on the same surface. Dr. Staudinger and others would doubtless regard both the Indian and Japanese forms as varieties of V. c-album (this they do in the case of the North-American forms, although the larva have been carefully figured in all stages and shown to be wholly unlike that of the European species)! but to attempt to follow them would involve sinking not only the whole of the species of the imaginary genus Grapta, but nearly the whole of the more typical Vanesse, since every form from V. ¢duterrogationis to V. xanthomelas (if not to V. ichnusa) has about equal specific value. Our species are arranged as follows, and form a pretty complete gradation from one type to the other :— 1. Vanessa interrogationis, Fab. (10 examples). N. America. Var. Labricit, Edw. (9 examples). N. America. V. comma, Harr. (9 examples). N. America. V. gracilis, Gr. & Rob. (2 examples). N. America. V. faunus, Edw. (9 examples). N. America. . stlenus, Edw. (1 example). N. America. V. zephyrus, Kdw. (2 examples). N. America. V. satyrus, Edw. (12 examples). N. America. V. progne, Cram. (10 examples). N. America. V. c-album, Linn. (14 examples). Europe. 10. V. hamigera, Butl. (5 examples). Japan. 11. V. agnicula, Moore (3 examples now). N.W. India. 12. V. Hentont, Butl. (1 example). Japan. 13. V. egea, Cram. (13 examples). Europe. 14. V. Pryert, Janson (6 examples). Japan. 15. V. c-aureum, Linn. (11 examples). Japan, China, &e. 16. V. t-album, Boisd. (5 examples). N. America, 17. V. v-album, Schiff. (10 examples). Europe. 18. V. californica, Boisd. (8 examples). California. 19. V. polychloros, Linn. (10 examples). Europe. 20. V. wanthomelas, Schiff. (11 examples). Europe and Japan. 21. V., var. ? (3 examples). India and Japan. CO OF 51 D> Dry go ww = ~ from North-west India. 141 If any of the Asiatic or North-American forms above recorded are to be considered conspecific with V.c-album there is no reason why the whole 164 examples enumerated here should not be equally regarded as varieties of one species. My view of a true variety is that it isa sport, either individual or often recurring, but never necessarily reproducing itself in the next generation; thus the white females of Colcas or the dark females of Argynnis are true varieties ; but to speak of a fixed local form as a variety appears to me to be wholly incorrect ; indeed, my expressed opinion that local forms are the highest type of existing species in the Lepidoptera, can never be disproved until the whole world has been collected over, whilst every collection which arrives goes to strengthen it. Major Yerbury says that he met with a few specimens of V. agnicula on Thundiani in August and September 1886, and that it “ affects yarrow and ragwort (?).” 26. Junonia asterie. Papilio asterte, Linneeus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 769. n. 133 (1767). 6. Khairabad, 18th April; ¢ 9. 23rd May, 25th July ; 3d. Campbellpore, 8th May; ?. Hassan Abdal, 9th May, 1886. Major Yerbury thinks with Mr. De Nicéville that J. almana is the cold-weather form of this species ; but from what I can learn the idea of its being a form at all of J. asterve (an idea which I never for a moment entertained) is likely to be deti- uitely disproved ; even in the collection now betore me [| see that one of the two specimens of J. a/mana was taken in May ; indeed, I do not remember to have received a collection from any part of India in which both species occurred, but they were taken at the same time, often on the same day: as to their being varieties, the totally different form of the wings renders this highly improbable. We have an enormous series ot both species, but nothing intermediate between them. Major Yerbury says that he obtained a few specimens of J. asterte at Campbellpore in July, but that it was very common at Khairabad and Hassan Abdal in June and July. Among the specimens brought ome in papers is one taken at Kala Panion the 30th August, 27. Junonia almana. Fapilio almana, Linnzeus, Mus. Lud. Uly. p. 272 (1764). Attock, 2nd May; Hurripur, 14th October, 1886. “Common round Campbellpore in the cold weather ; also 142 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera at Hassan Abdal. ‘This seems to be the cold-weather form.” —J.W. Y. The idea of this species being a seasonal form of J. asterte originated, Iam told, with a Mr, Doherty (now collecting in Timor, and likely to proceed to New Guinea) ; but he tells me, in a letter recently received, that he has since seen reason to doubt the correctness of this notion. Mr. De Nicéville has, however, taken up the cause of seasonal dimorphism, and played considerable havoc with the synonymy of the Lepi- doptera: some of his suggestions may turn out to be correct ; but such as prove to be unfortunate guesses will only have uselessly hindered the advance of knowledge. 28. Junonia Swinhoet. Junonia Swinhoet, Butler, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. Oct. 1885, p. 308. & ¢. Campbellpore, 3rd April; ¢. Attock, 10th April; 3. Bugnoter, 29th September, 1886. Major Yerbury says that this is probably the commonest butterfly all the year round both at Campbellpore and Murree, but that on Thundiani it is uncommon. J. orithyta, with which the Indian species has been con- founded, is a much larger Chinese form, having the under surface suffused throughout with rufous-brown, most strongly in the female; the species is found in North-eastern, but not (so far as I know) in North-western India. Of C. Swinhoedt we now possess a series of twenty-four good specimens. 29. Junonia enone. Papilio enone, Linnzeus, Mus. Lud. Ul. pp. 274, 275 (1764). One bad male, Kala Pani, 1st September, 1886. ‘¢ Khairabad (single specimen), 8th November, 1885; a few between Kala Pani and Abbottabad and between Bug- noter and Abbottabad in September 1885 and 1886.”— ele Wald 30. Hypolimnas bolina. Papilio bolina, Linnzeus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 295 (1764). Campbellpore, 2, 21st, ¢, 27th July, 1886. ‘Uncommon, none taken in 1885; two females and one male to date, 1886.”—J. W. Y. 31. Athyma opalina. Limenitis opalina, Wollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 427 (1848). 3d. Thundiani, 10th and 19th August; 2. 10th Septem- ber, 1886. =<" Strom North-west India. 143 “Common at Murree and Thundiani in August 1885 and 1886. — J) W. ¥- 32. Neptis astola. Neptis astola, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 560. Chittar, between Tret and Barracoo, 9th October, 1885 ; Thundiani, 20th September ; Hurripur, 14th October, 1886. Three examples, all more or less worn, mixed up with a series of N. mahendra. 33. Neptis Yerburit. 3. Neptis Yerburii, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 360. n. 17. ?. Dhum tower, near Abbottabad, 12th October, 1886. The female is larger than the male and on the primaries the spots of the oblique series from inner margin are slightly smaller (in which respects it is rather more like N. nandina than the male) ; in the pale lines between the bands, the white markings, and other respects it resembles it. Major Yerbury correctly names this insect, but says ‘‘I am unable to recog- nize this form,” from which I conjecture that he is not sure how it can be at once distinguished from N. mahendra. The latter is a short-winged species of the N. columella group, the males having the white spots on the disk of primaries sepa- rated into three distinct patches ; in the females, however, the two lower patches are sometimes only divided by the first median branch (blackened) ; nevertheless the inner edge of the short white band thus formed is invariably angulated internally and deeply excised externally at this pomt. In N. Yerburti, on the other hand, there is an oblique series of white spots as in N. nandina, with a straight inner edge; in N. mahendra again there is a wide break in the middle of the submarginal series of white spots on the primaries, the triangular spot beyond the cell is short and obtuse, and the pale submarginal stripe on the secondaries is wanting; on the under surface the ground-colour is of a much more uniform coffee-red colour, and the female has no whitish border to the secon- daries ; there is therefore no difficulty in separating the two species, indeed there are many other species of Neptis much less readily distinguishable. 34. Neptis mahendra. Neptis mahendra, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 560, pl. xxxii. fig. 3. Thundiani, 15th, 19th, 21st, and 29th August, 15th Sep- tember, 1886. 144 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera “Common at Murree and Thundiani, August and Septem- ber 1886.”—2J. W. Y. Erycinide. DLipyrHeEin 2. 35. Libythea lepita. Libythea lepita, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 240, n. 519 (1857). Thundiani, 13th and 26th August, 2nd September, 1886. “A few taken round Campbellpore in November and April; very common at Murree and Thundiani.”—/J. W. Y. Among the specimens in papers recently brought home there is a female of the northern representative of L. myrrha from Mir Jani, above Kalabagh, about 9000 feet, taken the 16th September. NEMEOBIINA. 36. Taxila durga. Melitea durga, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 441, pl. xiii. figs. 8, 4 (1848). — @. Dhum tower, near Abbottabad, 29th September; ¢. Kala Pani, 2nd October, 1886. “Common at Murree and between Kala Paniand Abbottabad, August and September 1886.”—J. W. Y. Lycenide. 37. Panchala dodonea. Amblypodia dodonea, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 43. n. 65, pl. i. a, fig. 8 (1857). 2. Thundiani, 10th October, 1886. “Common at Dewal, 26th August, 1885; frequents //ex trees. I am not quite sure of the distinction between this species and P. rama.”—J. W. Y. The distinction between P. dodonwa and P. rama has never hitherto (to my knowledge) been called in question ; the two species are easily separable. Both sexes of P. dodonwa* have the pattern of the female P. rama, but are above of a shining lilac-blue colour, whereas both sexes of P. rama are of a deep purplish ultramarine colour ; on the under surface, moreover, P. dodonea is of a pale brown or whitish stone-colour, with * Major Yerbury sent the male in the last collection, the female in this one, from North-west India. 145 well-defined dusky markings on the primaries, whereas P. rama is of a rosy lilac colour, indistinctly banded with bronze- brown. 38. Panchala rama. Thecla rama, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 412, pl. iv. figs. 1, 2 (1848). 3d. Thundiani, 12th September, 10th October; Bava Gulley, 29th September, 1886. The males are larger fhan the females and have a narrower black border to the “primaries. This and the preceding are both common species. 39. Polyommatus beticus. Papilio beticus, Linnzeus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 789. n. 226 (1767). 3 (dwarfed, with broad border to primaries above). Camp- bellpore, 2nd June; ¢. 19th July; g@. Thundiani, 13th August, 1886. 40. Catochrysops cnejus. Hesperia cnejus, Fabricius, Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 430 (1798). 3d @. Campbellpore, 2nd June; Hassan Abdal, 18th July; ?. Thundiani, 3rd September; ¢ 9. Nandar, 25th September; ¢. Hurripur, 13th October, 1886. ‘Common round Campbellpore.’”—/. W. Y. 41. Catochrysops hapalina. Catochrysops hapalina, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1883, p. 148, pl. xxiv. figs. 2, 3, g. Khairabad, 11th April; 9. Campbellpore, L1th Sep- tember; ¢ 9. Hurripur, 14th October ; ; o. Campbellpore, 21st October, 1886. “Catochry ysops strabo, De N. Common on babul-bushes aoe arabica) near Campbellpore in October 1885.”— J. W. Y. C. strabo of Fabricius is one of the commonest Indian Lycene and closely resembles C. lithargyria of Moore, excepting in its lilac instead of silvery blue upper surface. It varies considerably in size, but many of the specimens are almost twice as large as C. hapalina, and all of them are totally unlike it in the pattern of the under surface. One of the males (11th April) and one of the females (14th October) were labelled as C. ella, but erroneously ; the latter is a brilliantly blue species, with a broad black border to the primaries in the male; it can readily be recognized from its 146 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera vague resemblance to some of the species of Jamides (J. plato, for instance) ; it is not quite so brilliantly coloured, though brighter than any other Catochrysops. 42. Everes dipora. Lycena dipora, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 506. n. 108, pl. xxxi. fig. 8. §. Campbellpore, 1st June; (dwarfed), Kala Pani, 2nd October, 1886. A rare species in collections; yet Major Yerbury says that it is “not uncommon at Campbellpore from July; common at Thundiani, August and September ; a pair only taken at Murree in August 1885.” The two males now sent are both imperfect, and we only have three others in the Museum series. 43. Azanus zena. Lycena zena, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 505. n. 107, pl. xxxi. fig. 9. 3g. Hassan Abdal, 13th November; ¢ 2. Campbellpore, 17th and 21st November, 1886. “ Common on babul-bushes at Campbellpore and Hassan Abdal in the cold weather.”—J. W. Y. 44. Azanus uranus. es uranus, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 866. n. 40, pl. xxxv. gl. 9. Campbellpore, 29th October and 21st November, 1885 ; g. 8th June, 1886; Chitta Pahar, Lumbahdoon, 2000 feet, 28th November, 1885. “Common on babul-bushes near Campbellpore in No- vember 1885.” —J. W. Y. It appears from Major Yerbury’s notes that this is the A. ubaldus of De Nicéville; it is, however, perfectly distinct from the true A. ubaldus. It is true that both A. wranus and A. ubaldus agree in the uniform lilac colouring of the upper surface in the males; but the pattern of the under surface and the colouring of the female on both surfaces in A. whaldus much more nearly agree with A. zena; indeed, though the males of A. zena and A. ubaldus are as unlike and as easy to separate as any two species of Lycaena, the females may readily be confounded. The female of A. wranus is either pale copper-brown suffused with lilac, or lilac bordered with copper- brown, on the upper surface; on the under surface it only differs from the male in having the black spots of the secon- from North-west India. 147 daries rather better defined; the bands on the under surface are (as in the male) grey, whereas in A. zena and A. ubaldus they are copper-brown; the pattern of the bands differs chiefly in their more macular character. 45. Tarucus extricatus. Tarucus extricatus, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 366. n. 45, pl. xxxv. fig. 2. g. Campbellpore, 3rd April, 1886. This specimen is of about twice the size of my type, or about as large as the smaller examples of 7. nara. Of this form we now possess six specimens, 46. Tarucus callinara. Tarucus callinara, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xviii. p. 185. n. 24 (1886). @. Hurripur, 13th October, 1886. We have nineteen examples of this butterfly, in both sexes. AT. Tarucus nara. Lycena nara, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 421 (1848). g . Campbellpore, 3rd April, 1886. Seven examples of typical 7’. nara are in our collection. 48. Tarucus venosus. Tarucus venosus, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1882, p. 245, pl. xii. figs. 6, 6a. 3S. Kala Pani, 30th August, 1886. A very distinct species, readily recognizable by the broad blackish border to the wings. ‘The four preceding forms are all associated by Major Yerbury as the Terucus theophrastus of De Nicéville; if 7. extricatus and callinara should prove to be forms of 7’. nara, that species must be very variable. T. venosus is distinct beyond all question, and none of them is the Z. theophrastus of Fabricius. Major Yerbury says they are ‘‘ common at Campbellpore almost all the year round. Common on the lower slopes at Murree and Thundiani in August and September.” 49, Cyaniris vardhana. Polyommatus vardhana, Moore, Proce. Zool. Soe. 1874, p. 572, pl. Ixvi. fig. 5. 6. Thundiani, 6th September; Kala Pani, 11th October, 1886. 148 Mr. A. G, Butler on Lepidoptera 50. Cyaniris kasmira. ~ Polyommatus kasmira, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 503, pl. xxxi. fie. 1 $. Thundiani, 20th August, 1886. In 1882 Mr. Moore regards this as a synonym ot C, Kollari; itis, however, decidedly larger than that species (= C.calestina of De Nicéville, vide Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 867), whilst its female resembles that sex of C, Hiigelit, excepting that the outer border of the primaries is narrower ; in size this form is intermediate between C. Hiigelit and C. Kollart. 51. Cyaniris Kollari. Tycena Kollari, Westwood, Gen. Diurn. Lep. p. 491. n. 69 (1852). 9. Thundiani, 17th August; ¢ 2. 19th August, 1886. The three preceding forms were associated under one number; but although it is possible that C. kasmira and C. Kollari may be races, or even alternating generations of one species, it is quite certain that C. vardhana is totally distinct. 52. Zizera maha. Lycena maha, Kollar, in Wiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 422 (1848). Lycena chandala, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 504, pl, xxxi. fig. 5. @. Campbellpore, 17th April; ¢. Hassan Abdal, 9th May, 1886. These are the only two specimens of typical Z. maha that Major Yerbury has sent us hitherto. The species is easy to recognize, the male above being of a pale silvery lilac or azure tint, changing in certain positions to grey and silvery white ; the extreme outer margin black, the primaries with a dusky submarginal stripe; the female is steel-blue above, with the costal borders and the outer border of primaries broadly black ; the secondaries usually with a broad whitish outer border, on which are some black marginal spots; the pattern below corre- sponds nearly with that of Z. diluta, excepting that the secondaries are browner and the markings on these wings are smaller and less distinct. We have two dozen specimens in our collection, varying only in the tint of the upper surface in the males, which in some examples is silvery blue, in others silvery lilac, 53. Zizera squalida. 2. Lycena squalida, Butler, Trans. Ent. Soc, 1879, p. 4. 3. Campbellpore, 2lst June; Hassan Abdal, 18th July, 1886. from North-west India. 149 The male varies in colour from silver-grey with a lilac gloss to smoky grey with a faint bluish gloss ; the primaries have a blackish external border, considerably narrower than in Z. diluta and more sharply defined internally ; the secon- daries have the costal half brownish ; a marginal series of blackish spots ; the under surface scarcely differs from that of Z, maha, excepting that the discal series of black spots on the primaries forms a more or less pronounced angle below the second median branch. This form is intermediate in character between Z maha and Z. diluta excepting in the angulation of the discal series of spots on the under surface; it may possibly bea hybrid. We possess six examples. 54. Zizera diluta. Lycena diluta, Felder, Reise der Nov., Lep. ii. p. 280. n. 353, pl. xxxv. figs. 12,13. 3. Akhor, 22nd April; 2. Campbellpore, 4th, 5th, and 9th May; g. Hassan Abdal, 27th June, 18th July ; Thun- diani, 21st August; ¢ ?. 29th August; 9°. Nandar, 25th September, 1886. Var. Wings below greyer; black spots with narrower white margins. 3 ¢. Hassan Abdal, 9th May; g. Thundiani, 29th August, 1886. 55. Cupido ariana, Polyommatus ariana, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 504. n. 103, pl. xxxi. fig. 2. 3. Thundiani, 19th August; ¢ 2 (incoitdi), 29th August, 10th September; 2. 15th and 24th September, 1886. All the specimens with the exception of one taken on the 19th August are rather small for the species; the femalé appears to vary almost as much as in C. icarus of Kurope. Major Yerbury says that tiis species is “common at Murree in August and September, and fairly common at Thundiani in the same months.” Major Yerbury brought home with him specimens of Cupido nazira taken at Thundiani on the 29th August, the 4th and 11th September, 1886. 56. Chrysophanus timeus. Papilio timeus, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. pl. clxxxvi. E, F (1779). 9. Thundiani, 20th August; @. 24th August and 20th September, 1886. Ann & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol.i. 11 150 On Lepidoptera from North-west India. “Common at Murree and Thundiani in August and Sep- tember; two specimens taken at Hassan Abdal on the 9th May, 1886.”—J. W. Y. 57. LIlerda tamu. Polyommatus tamu, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 417, pl. v. figs. 7, 8 (1848). &. Thundiani, 24th August, 1886. “Common at Murree in August; two specimens taken at Thundiani.”— J. W. Y. 58. Ilerda sena. Polyommatus sena, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 415, pl. v. figs. 3, 4 (1848). g. Kala Pani, 30th August, 1886. “A single specimen taken at Khairabad on the Ist November, 1885 ; uncommon at Murree ; very common below Kala Pani and along the hills towards Abbottabad.”— JW ca, 59. Thecla syla. Thecla syla, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 414, pl. iv. figs. 7, 8 (1848). é. Thundiani, 21st August, 1886. “A single specimen taken at Murree, 26th August, 1885 ; a few on Thundiani during August and September, 1886.” — Ae Ge 60. Thecla odata. Dipsas odata, Hewitson, Ill. Diurn. Lep. p. 66. n. 6, pl. xxx. figs, 13, 14 (1865). Thundiani, 10th, 11th, and 18th August, 1886. “A number of worn specimens taken round Thundiani early in August 1886.” 61. Rapala nissa. Thecla nissa, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iy. 2, p. 412, pl. iv. figs. 3, 4 (1848). ?. Thundiani, 4th September, 1886. “Common at Murree in August and September 1885; a few only on Thundiani at the end of August and September 1886."—J. W. Y. 62. Deudoryx epijarbas. Diwpsas epijarbas, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. i. p..82. n. 80 (1857). 3 ?. Thundiani, 21st August; Hurripur, 14th October, 1886. Mr. F. Day on the Bib and Poor- Cod. 151 “Common on Murree; fairly common on Thundiani.”— Pal Ae. 63. Spindasis hypargyros. Spindasis hypargyros, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 369. n. 55, pl. xxxv. fig. 3 Khairabad, 18th April; Futch Khan’s bungalow, Kooteer, Chittar Pahar, 2000-3000 feet, 23rd April; Campbellpore, 2nd and 31st May, 2nd June, and 23rd July, 1886. “Common generally in the neighbourhood of Campbell- pore in July 1885 and April 1886; the specimens taken April 1886 were, as a rule, smaller than those of July 1885.” —J, W. Y. The largest specimen sent to us by Major Yerbury in 1886 and taken that year measures 39 millim. in expanse, the smallest (a very dark little female) only 25 millim.; those taken and forwarded in 1885 measured from 35-38 millim. : the really gigantic example sent in 1886 was taken in May, and there was exactly one month between its capture and that of the smallest one ; therefore no supposition as to the large and small specimens being dry- or wet-season forms or seasonal forms of any kind need be suggested. [To be continued. | XVII. —On the Bib (Gadus luseus) and Poor- Cod (G. minutus). By Francis Day, C.LE., F.L.S., &e. In June 1886 Professor M‘Intosh, in the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., subscribed to the view that the poor- or power-cod was the young state of the bib. As I have now fresh mate- rial to investigate, and as it does not confirm this view, I must ask for a small space in order to review what have been the published opinions of British ichthyologists on this point for the last two centuries, as well as to briefly describe some fresh specimens which I cannot help thinking are opposed to this novel classification. Willughby, in his ‘ Historia Piscium,’ 1686, p. 169, ad- verted to the bib, or blinds of Cornwall, Asedlus luscus. He likewise, at p. 171, enumerated as another species ‘“Asellus mollis minor seu asellus omnium minimus,’ and which latter he referred to “Anthi secunda species, Rondel. Gesn. 64. An Merlangus Belloni?” But there is no occasion to allude to all the ancient authors who have similarly held that the bib and poor-cod are distinct species, as the various references are given in Gmelin’s edition of Linneus, where the former EL* 152 Mr. F. Day on the Bib and Poor- Cod. fish was classed as Gadus luseus, p. 1163, and the latter as G. minutus, p. 1164. The Rev. Mr. Jago, of Cornwall, ob- served, in his ‘Catalogus quorundam piscium rariorum’ of Cornwall, that he had discovered a new form of British Gadoid in the poor-cod ; and in this appendix, published in Ray’s ‘Synopsis Piscium,’ 1713, p. 163, we find “ Asellus mollis minimus, Cornub. Poor vel Power dictus, fig. 6,” and Ray remarked on its being already described in Wil- lughby. If Jago’s figure is referred to, it will be seen that he correctly placed the vent in a perpendicular line beneath the last ray of the first dorsal fin, which, as I shall presently show, is a proof that he certainly diagnosed the species. Pennant, in his ‘ British Zoology,’ vol. ii. 1776, pp. 183 and 184, also separated the two, and figured them as distinct on plate xxx. He referred the bib to Asel/us luscus, Raii, ‘ Synop. Piscium,’ p. 54, or Gadus luscus, Linn. Syst. Nat. p. 437, and the poor-cod to Jago’s figure in Ray, or G. minutus, Linn. Syst. Nat. p. 438. Shaw likewise con- sidered the two forms distinct species; as did also Turton, ‘British Fauna,’ 1807, p. 90; Fleming, ‘ British Animals,’ 1828, p. 191; and Jenyns in his‘ British Vertebrate Animals,’ 1835, pp. 442,444. The last of the foregoing authors re- marked: “ first noticed as a British species by Jago, who obtained it on the Cornish coast, where it has since been ob- served by Mr. Couch.” He then continued that he (Mr. Jenyns) had described his fish from a Weymouth example of the unusual length of 8 inches. In the bib he found the “vent directly beneath the commencement of the first dorsal,” whereas in the poor-cod it was ‘in a line with the tenth ray of the first dorsal fin.” Yarrell (‘ British Fishes,’ ed. 1836) gave these two forms as two species (vol, ii. pp. 157, 161), and correctly showed the position of the vent. Hedid not appear to have any doubt as to their distinctness, and no alteration was made in the subsequent editions of his work, which point out that by the situation of the vent and fins the two species may be readily diagnosed. Thompson, in 1837, observed, at a meeting of the Zoological Society, that among the new species of fishes he had obtained in Ireland was Gadus minutus, Linn., the poor-cod, and that from three localities in Down and Antrim ; also that two specimens from the coast of Cork were in the collection of Mr. Ball (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1837, p. 57); and in Thompson’s ‘ Natural History of Ireland,’ iv. p. 181, the foregoing opinion was retained, and further details of the various specimens added. In White’s ‘ Catalogue of British Fish,’ 1851, pp. 88 and 89, they were kept distinct, and also in Ginther’s ‘ Catalogue of the Fishes in the British Museum,’ Mr. F. Day on the Bib and Poor- Cod. 153 vol. iv. 1862, p. 835; while in this latter work it was re- marked that “the ribs of this species [the bib] are propor- tionally longer and stronger than in the preceding [the poor- or power-cod].” Couch (‘Fishes of the British Islands,’ il. 1877, pp. 70 and 72, and on plates 138 and 139) did not place these fish under one head, but observed of the poor-cod : “‘ vent nearer the tail [than in the bib], opposite the termi- nation of the first dorsal. The first dorsal also begins further distant from the head ; the pectorals are shorter ;_ ventrals also shorter, not reaching halfway to the vent; tail slightly in- curved” (p. 73). Dr. M‘Intosh, when enumerating the ‘ Fishes of St. Andrews,’ 1875, p. 178, remarked: “ Gadus minutus, Linn., common; G. duscus, Linn., not uncommon.” I omit reference to the statements in my ‘ British and Irish Fishes,’ 1882, pp. 286, 288, plates 80 and 81, for obvious reasons, simply observing that the views I then held I see no cause to alter. The first author of any note in ichthyology who during the last two centuries has separated these forms was, I believe, Winther, in his ‘Marine Ichthyology of Denmark,’ 1879, p. 29, where he placed, under Gadus minutus, two subspecies or varieties: (a) minutus, (b) duscus. But in the Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1886, xvii. pp. 442, 443, Professor M‘Intosh remarked of the poor-cod, that my ‘elaborate descriptions in regard to eyes, teeth, fins, scales, lateral line, and colours are not always satisfactory, since they fail to show the re- lationship existing between the adult and young stages appa- rently of the same species.” Having quoted my observations on Winther’s opinion, he concluded that as I stated that I had “ not had an opportunity of investigating both sexes in these two species of fish,” that such “‘ indicates some un- certainty on the subject.” He continued thus :—“ my own experience of the species has now led me to conclude that what has been described as the poor- or power-cod (Gadus minutus) by several authors is only the young of the bib,” concluding that ‘the confusion in regard to this species has partly arisen from an examination of preserved spe- cimens.” Although my opinion had been here called in question, in my reply (i. c. p. 527) I could merely suggest that an account of the intermediate links between these two forms (which up to Winther’s time had invariably been held to be distinct species) should be given by Dr. M‘Intosh. _ Personally I possessed no new materials to work upon, and deemed it preferable to wait until such time as I had, for assertions are not proof. I took steps, however, to secure some fresh spect- mens, and applied to my old friend Mr. Dunn, of Mevagissey, 154 Mr. F. Day on the Bib and Poor-Cod. asking him to obtain for me some power-cod and bib of the same size, so as to enable me to compare one with the other. Cir- cumstances, however, have been unfavourable, and it was not until January 5th that I received from Cornwall three speci- mens, no. 1 being a bib, Gadus luscus, 7 inches long, and nos. 2 and 3 being power- or poor-cods, each 8 inches in length, the one being a male, the other a female, while in both the generative organs were very fully developed. his last fact was interesting as demonstrating that poor-cod may be of either sex, while the size of the two forms likewise proved that one 7 inches long may be a bib and others 8 inches long may be poor-cod, rendering it somewhat problematical that the larger form could be the young or immature form of the smaller specimen. This last, I may likewise add, was, except in size, a distinet counterpart in colour and proportion of large examples of the bib in my collection. As regards the formula of the fin-rays existing in these three fishes, it must not be overlooked that in the Anacanthini or spineless forms these are subject to considerable modifica- tion; but taking the numbers for what they are worth they are as follows :— 1. Bib, Gadus tao .... | D. 127) 20 | F9. A. 31 | 18 2&8. Poor-cod, G.minutus D. 12-14 | 28-25. A, 24-26 | 21-23 Eyes.—In the bib the eye was one third the length of the head, one diameter from the end of the snout ; while in the poor-cod the eye was two thirds the length of the head and two thirds of a diameter from the end of the snout, or larger than in the bib. Vent.—In the bib this was beneath the anterior end of the first dorsal fin, or a quarter of the entire length of the fish from the front end of the lower jaw, whereas it was beneath the hind end of the same fin in the poor-cod and one third of the same distance as it was one fourth in the bib. Fins.—In the bib the first anal commenced just behind the vent and more forward than in the poor-cod, while the two anal fins were connected together by a membrane in the bib, as if the whole had belonged to one consecutive fin; but in the poor-cod they were two distinct fins with a short interspace be- tween. The ventral fin was one fourth longer in the bib than in the poor-cod, while their colours widely differed. Respecting the number of the gill-rakers, on which some authors have laid considerable stress in the classification of species, I found in the outer branchial arch of these two forms as follows :— Fourteen in the middle or ceratobranchial bone of the bib, and eighteen in the same place in the poor-cod. On new Mcmmals from the Solomon Islands. 155 XVIII.—Diagnoses of six new Mammals from the Solomon Islands. By OLDFIELD THOMAS. THE following new Mammals were obtained by Mr. C. M. Woodford at Aola, Guadalcanar, during his second visit to the Solomon Islands in the course of the past year. PTERALOPEX, g. n. Allied to Pteropus, but remarkable for the extraordinary cuspidate characters of its teeth, and especially of the upper canines, whose main cusp is bifid and whose postero-internal basal ledge supports two more sharp conical cusps, the whole tooth being therefore quadricuspid. Lower incisors very dis- proportionate in size. Premolars and molars cuspidate, not longitudinally grooved. Orbits complete behind, their plane directed more upwards than in Pteropus. Wings arising from the centre of the back, and attached to between the bases of the first and second toes. Pteralopex atrata, sp. n. Size large, about equal to that of Pt. Keraudrenit. Fur thick and woolly. ars short, rounded, scarcely pro- jecting beyond the fur, thinly covered with hair. Interfemoral membrane narrow in the centre, more or less concealed by the fur. Colour wholly deep black everywhere, except that the wing-membranes are irregularly mottled with white on their under surface. Upper incisors very large, each with a prominent posterior ledge, and the outer ones with a secondary cusp behind. Upper canines very thick, multicuspid as above described, the posterior external cusp about two thirds the height of the anterior. First premolar minute, persistent ; other premolars and molars each with a prominent cingulum and two pointed central cusps. Lower inner incisors minute, outer ones disproportionally large, not less than about twenty times the bulk of the inner, and separated from one another by a distance barely one third of their transverse or one fourth of their longitudinal dia- meters. Canines small and low, scarcely as high as the second premolar. First premolar large, quite fillmg up the space between the canine and second premolar. ‘Third premolar and first molar each with four cusps, two high antero-external, one antero-internal, and one low postero-external. Posterior molars both above and below, first lower premolars, and both 156 Mr. O. Thomas on upper and lower outer incisors all very much of the same size In cross section. Dimensions of the type * (an adult male in spirit) :— Head and body 240 millim.; head 78; ear (above head) 15; tip of nostril to eye 26; forearm 143 (=5°6 in.); skull, basal length 63, greatest breadth 39; supraorbital foramen to tip of nasals 26°5. ; Two specimens obtained. Pteropus Woodfordi, sp. n. Closely allied to Pt. molossinus, 'Temm., but readily dis- tinguishable by its pale grey head, dull rufous nape, pale yellow collar, and generally greyish colour as compared to the wholly uniform dark reddish-brown colour of that species. Ears also less sharply pointed and hairier. Canines both above and below markedly slenderer than in Pt. molossinus, and anterior premolars smaller and placed further from the second premolars. Molars also narrower and lighter. Dimensions of the type (male) :— Head and body c. 150 millim.; ear 11:5; forearm 99 (=3°'9 in.) ; skull, basal length 36°8. Seven specimens obtained. ANTHOPS, g. 0. Allied to Hipposideros tT, especially to the Asellia group ot that genus, but distinguished from it by its rudimentary tail, which precisely resembles that of Ca/ops, consisting ot only some three or four slender transparent vertebre hidden in the base of the interfemoral membrane and not reaching one half the distance towards the back of the membrane. Nose-leaf very complicated, its upright portion emarginate above, the projections not pointed as in Asedlia, but rounded and hollow behind. Skull and teeth as in Hipposideros. Anthops ornatus, Sp. N. Posterior nose-leaf tridentate, the projections each fo:ming a little spherical cup, opening backwards ; front surface of the leaf divided into tour compartments by three very distinct * A single specimen in each case is selected from the series as the | “type,” in order to avoid any possibility of future confusion. Tt As the genus commonly known as “Phyllorhkina’’ should be called (see Blanford, P. Z. 8. 1887). ~ new Mammals from the Solomon Islands. 17 vertical ridges, each running up to the lower side of one ot the cups above. Two secondary leaflets outside the horse- shoe, the upper one unusually short and little extended, the lower one running back to join the base of the posterior erect leaf. Sella with a blunt projecting central point. Kars when laid forward reaching just to the end of the muzzle, their tips sharply pointed, with a marked concavity in the upper fourth of their outer margin. A small frontal gland, opening trans- veisely, present in the male. Wings from the ankles. Fur very long, soft, and silky. Colour a finely grizzled greyish buff, the bases of the hairs slaty grey, their terminal halves buff, their extreme tips brown. Dimensions of the type (female) :— Head and body 51 millim.; head 21; ear (above crown) 17; forearm 51; index-finger 40; metacarpus of third finger 37; tibia 22; interfemoral membrane, depth in centre 20. SLX specimens. Mus imperator, sp. n. Size very large. Fur rather woolly in texture, uniformly dark grizzled ashy grey above, whitish below. ars short and rounded ; laid forward they do not nearly reach to the eye. Mamme four, consisting of two inguinal pairs only. Soles of feet broad and naked, the pads large, smooth, and but little prominent. ‘Tail rather short in proportion to the size of the animal, naked, scaly, not markedly roughened. Dimensions (in spirit) :— Head and body. Tail. Hind foot. Ear. millim. millim. millim. willim. Mail Guan hotter der so tes 350 258 66 19 Female (type) .... 340 250 64 20 Skull (¢@): basal length 60 millim., greatest breadth 35 ; length of molar series 12°0; palatal foramen, length 7-0. ‘lwo specimens. Mus rex, sp. n. Closely allied to Mus ¢mperator, but distinguished by its much smaller (although still very considerable) size, and by its much longer and extraordinarily roughened rasp-like tail. Dimensions (in spirit) :— Head and body. ‘Tail. Hind foot. Ear. millim. millim. millim. millim. Male (type).......-. 290 296 5D 18 Hemp ales 671. 6 acres, oi 27 285 54 16 Skull (¢): basal length 54 millim., greatest breadth 33 ; length ot molar series 11:1 ; length of palatal foramen 6°8. 158 Mr. O. Thomas on new Species of Didelphys. Seven specimens. Mus salamonis, Rams., from Florida Island, is again a much smaller species, with a hind foot only 44 millim. in length. Mus pretor, sp. n. General characters, size, colour, spininess of fur, size of ears, &e., as in M. terre-regine, Alst., but distinguished by its proportionally shorter hind feet, shorter tail, and by having two pairs of pectoral mamme, its mammary formula being therefore 2—2=8 instead of 1—2=6. Dimensions (in spirit) :— Head and body, Tail. Hind foot. — Far. millim. millim. millim. millim. IMiaiL Oa i Bence caus stele t 188 134 35°5 15:5 Female (type) .... 168 118 33'5 15 Skull (2): basal length 37°5 millim., greatest breadth 22 ; length of upper molar series 6°6; palatal foramen, length 7°4. ‘Two specimens. XIX.—Diéagnoses of four new Species of Didelphys. By OLDFIELD THOMAS. Didelphys (Micoureus) lepida, sp. n Closely allied to D. murina, L., but distinguished by its much smaller size, and by the shortness of its ears, which, when laid forward, barely reach to the centre of its eye. Dimensions of the type (an adult female, skin) :— Head and body 105 millim.; tail (imperfect, more than) 105; ear, above head, 9:0; first three molars, combined lengths 4°7. Hab. Peruvian Amazons (Z. Bartlett). Didelphys (Peramys) scalops, sp. n. Size of D. brevicaudata, Erxl. Head, rump, and tail bright rufous; fore back, shoulders, and belly grizzled olive-grey. Skull long and narrow; teeth very small. Dimensions (male, skin) :— Head and body 183 millim. ; tail 71; ear 8-0; skull, length 33; combined lengths of first three upper molars 4°9. Hab. Brazil. Miscellaneous. 159 Didelphys (Peramys) Ihering?t, sp. n. Colours and proportions exactly as in D. americana, Mill. (=D. tristriata, auct.), but only about half the size of that species. Dimensions of a male in spirit :— Head and body 77 millim. ; tail 43; hind foot 14; ear 6°3 ; skull, basal length 22°5 ; first three molars, length 4°2. Hab. Rio Grande do Sul (Dr. H. von Ihering). Didelphys (Peramys) Henseli, sp. n. Size intermediate between that of the D. brevicaudata and the D. sorex and Ihering groups. Colour dark grizzled grey along the whole upper surface, deep rufous on the sides and belly. Ears small, reaching when laid forward only halfway towards the eye. Mamme about twenty-five in number, five central, and about ten pairs of lateral ones. Dimensions of the type (an adult female, in spirit) :— Head and body 106 millim. ; tail 62 (extreme tip imperfect) ; hind foot 15°5; skull, length 27; three anterior upper molars 4-4, Hab. Rio Grande do Sul (Dr. H. von Ihering). This is no doubt the intermediate species described but not named by Hensel *, and I have therefore, at the suggestion of Dr. von [hering, named it after that eminent mammalogist. MISCELLANEOUS. Note on Lophopus Lendenfeldi. To the Editors of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History. GrytLEMEN,—The facts narrated in the letter of Mr, Whitelegge at p. 62 of the January Number of your Journal have been also brought to my notice in detail in a letter from himself, and more generally in one signed by two gentlemen, Messrs. J. Douglas Ogilby and John Brazier, F.L.S., whom I understand to be members of the staff of the Australian Museum, Sydney; and I have before me a printed extract from the ‘ Ashton Reporter’ of March 20th, 1886, de- scribing in general terms a fine Polyzoan and a method of preserving it in such a way as to show the parts much as those of the specimen described by me as Lophopus Lendenfeldi in the ‘Journal of the Linnean Society’ (Zoology), xx. p. 62, pl. ii. It may be almost unnecessary for me to say that I was in total ignorance of these facts when I wrote my paper, but such is the case; and I regret very greatly the injustice which I have thus unconsciously done to Mr. Whitelegge, who has fully vindicated his title to the honours of * Abh. Ak. Berl. 1872, p, 123. 160 Miscellaneous. discovering and preserving the specimens on which the description of the species was based. ‘The details as to discovery and preserva- tion, as given in my paper, require modification in this sense; and I hope that future students will give Mr. Whitelegge the great credit due to him, not only for bringing this very fine species to the know- ledge of the scientific world, but for the great skill shown in the preparation of the specimens which came under my notice. I am, Gentlemen, Maryport, Cumberland, Yours faithfully, January 16th, 1888. Stuart O, Riptey. On Glyphastreea sexradiata, Lonsdale, sp. By P. Marrin Duncan, M.B. (Lond.), F.R.S., &e. In a communication to the Geological Society (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xliii. Feb. 1887, p. 24) I described Glyphastrwa Forbesi, Ed. & Haime, sp., and stated that its alliance with Columnaria sewradiata, Lonsd. (Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. i. 1845, p. 497), was very close, and I gave the form the name Gilyphastrea sewra- diata, Lonsd., sp. At the time a very careful search was made for the specimen described and figured by Lonsdale, but it could not be found, although all the other types of Lonsdale’s N.-American ter- tiary species which were given to me by Sir C. Lyell were still in my possession. After the publication of the paper a coral was found by the Curator of King’s College Museum ; it was one of a number of fossils given by me to the College about twelve years since. This coral had upon it in Lonsdale’s handwriting, with which I am very familiar, ‘ Columnastrea sewradiata.” On examining this coral, which is in the museum of the College in which I am Professor of Geology, I find that the distinctions between it and a specimen of Glyphastrwa Forbesi, Kd, & H., sp., are not specific, but are due to growth. This last-named species was later in time of description than Lonsdale’s, and therefore Glyphastrea sevradiata, Lonsdale, sp., is the correct name for Columnaria sevradiata, Lonsd., and G‘lyphas- trea Forbesi, Ed. & Haime, sp. I am glad to be able to do this justice to the late Mr. Lonsdale. Since I examined the coral, last March, it has been cut without my knowledge or sanction. King’s College, Jan. 16, 1888. On the first Changes in the Fecundated Ovum of Lepas. By Prof. M. Nusspaum. During the author’s residence on the coast of California he was able to obtain an abundance of material. All the ova in the same animal are at the same stage of development, but the animals are very abundant and the breeding-season lasts for several months, so that by continued preparation the different stages may be obtained in different animals. The author’s description commences with the stage at which the copulation of the male and female cells is effected, and the masses of ova enclosed in a thin homogeneous sac protrude from the orifices of the oviducts into the space within the shell on each side of the head. The ova are small and numerous, ovate, with a blunt and Miscelluncous. 161 an acute pole. The masses of ova are at first soft and compressible, but the two sacs separate from the oviducts, fall into the cavity of the shell, and gradually become converted into harder, flattened masses. The greater firmness is to be ascribed to the increased thickness of the vitelline envelopes of the individual ova, and to the hardening of the material which binds them together. This cement must become softened again when the embryos are ready to creep out. The fecundation of the ova takes place before the formation of the egg-sac. Living spermatosomata are occasionally found in the sac. Before the ova have reached the end of the oviducts which lead from the peduncle of the parent to the two sides of the head, the vitellus is of uniform structure and permeated throughout with lecythin-globules. On the separation of the directive bodies, which takes place after the penetration of the male element, the contents of the ovum are arranged so that at its rounded pole there is a dome of finely granulated vitellus, while towards the acute pole the lecythin-granules are collected together imbedded in a coarsely granular substratum. The separation of the directive bodies occurs at the obtuse pole and is accompanied in the ovum of Lepas by changes in the vitellus somewhat as described by the author in the ovum of Ascaris megalocephala. The two pronuclei are also in the neighbourhood of the obtuse pole, with their surfaces of contact and fusion perpendicular to the long axis of the ovum. The first division takes place, as in Ascaris nigrovenosa, perpen- dicularly to the fusion-surfaces of the pronuclei, and therefore in the long axis of the ovum. ‘The plane of division produces two unequal globules of segmentation; the lecythin is contained only in the larger one. Then occurs a turning of the segmentation-spheres and a displacement of the contents of the nutritive cell, which culmi- nates in bringing the surface of division into the equator of the ovum, perpendicular to its first direction. It is well known that in segmentation the superior animal-cell precedes the inferior vegeta- tive one and grows around it. As to the formation of the germ- layers the information is imperfect ; in fresh specimens an invagi- nation-gastrula appeared to be formed. ‘The head of the larva is always at the obtuse and the tail at the acute pole. The results of the investigation are summarized as follows :— The processes of maturation and fecundation of the ovum of Lepas arranged the vital parts in such a way that with the separation of the directive vesicles all the axes of the future embryo are already defined. The separation of the directive corpuscles and the first and second segmentations take place in the future long-axis of the animal, and the position of the directive vesicles indicates the future position of the cephalic portion of the embryo in course of formation. If the relative positions of the axes continued in the way first occurring, it might be imagined that the contents of the ovum exclusively possessed the whole power of orientation. But as the first plane of division passes from a longitudinal to an equatorial plane, the envelope and its form must also possess directive 162 Miscellaneous. powers, which may be most judiciously referred to the principle of least resistance, more especially as the smaller animal-cell which is in advance in division is placed in the wide obtuse pole, and thus is enabled to divide again in the long direction of the ovum. The first division, taking place in the longitudinal direction, does not, as further observations show, divide the ovum into the mate- rials for the right and left halves of the body, although subsequently the sagittal plane of the embryo again coincides with the long axis of the ovum. This, however, may also be referred to the least resistance asa guiding principle, seeing that both in the embryo and the egg-capsule the longitudinal exceed the transverse axes in extent. The agreement in the position of the directive vesicles, the first divisional plane of the segmenting ovum, and the future long axis of the embryo would consequently have to be referred to a common cause, which interposed as such in each case, but without the first orientation in space being conditional for any of the following ones. If it be considered further that the egg-capsule is furnished by the ovum itself, so as the laws laid down by men become a measure and rule of conduct for men, the egg-capsule, although itself without any formative power, becomes in its rigid form the essential regu- lator of the position of the developing embryo of Lepas in the egg. —Sitzungsberichte der kin. preuss. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Beriin, December 8, 1887, pp. 1052-1055. On the Infection of a Frog-tadpole by Saprolegnia ferax. By Prof. J. B. Scunerzier. Tn a glass vessel containing 2 litres of water, in which the oxygen was continually renewed by aquatic plants, the author had two frog-tadpoles which had not undergone their transformation since last year (1886). However, the branchiz had disappeared, and the tadpoles came to the surface of the water to respire air. These larvee were nevertheless very lively, and their dejections proved that nutrition was effected in anormal fashion. As the volume of water and the quantity of food have a marked influence on the develop- ment of the larve of frogs, the author removed one of these tadpoles and placed it in a second vessel with aquatic plants. Both vessels were of ordinary white glass. The two larve remained very lively without undergoing any metamorphosis, until, towards the end of last June, a fly (Sarcophaga carnaria) was placed in the first vessel. After death its body became covered with white filaments of Saprolegnia ferax. The tadpole, which had continued very lively up to this time, now soon became more sluggish in its movements; its body became quickly covered with filaments of Saprolegnia, and within two days after this infec- tion it was dead. Microscopic examination of the Saprolegnia ferax, which covered the body of the fly, showed that the protoplasm of its filaments was transformed into thousands of zoospores, which, by means of their two vibratile cilia, rapidly diffused themselves through the water. As these zoospores swim about and thus spread themselves through Miscellaneous. 163 the water, a single dead fly may become a focus of infection for a great number of aquatic animals (fishes, newts, &c.). The whole surface of the tadpole above mentioned was covered with Sapro- legnia, so that death must have been produced by the suppression of the action of the skin. The second larva, placed in a separate vessel before the introduction of the fly, remained quite intact.—Séance de la Soc. Vaudoise des Sct. Nat. July 6,1887; Bibl. Univ. November 15, 1887, p. 492. On the Significance of Sexual Reproduction. By Dr. B. Harscuex. Dr. Hatschek recently lectured upon this subject before the meeting of German surgeons in Prague. In the first place he indicated that the most important and pro- bably original of vital phenomena was assimilation. By the process of assimilation new living particles (that is to say particles which in their turn possess the faculty of assimilation) are produced. Assimilation is, as Hatschek affirms, the sole known mode of produc- tion of fresh living substance. We see in the Amoebe and other unicellular organisms that the parent-creature divides into two daughter-organisms. In the more complex multicellular organisms reproductive bodies in the form of germs and buds are produced ; these are developed, and grow into new individuals of the same kind, In the latter instance, however, the formation of such germs is reduced to a process of division of the same kind as occurs in the unicellular organisms, only that in those cases where we have to do with production of ova, spermatozoa, and buds the portions divided off are very unequal in size. This difference, however, is due to no principial distinction. Besides division, however, the contrary phenomenon occurs in unicellular organisms, namely the fusion of two originally separate individuals into a single one. This is the so-called “ conjugation,’ which is very widely diffused among the Monoplastida. In the multicellular organisms it is the portions characterized as reproduc- tive bodies that become fused together, therefore the individualities in their simplest state. The conjugation of the unicellular organisms represents the process of fecundation, but not the copulation of the multicellular forms. The intermixture of the individualities is most generally diffused throughout the organic world; and although among multicellular animals we frequently meet with asexual modes of reproduction (such as gemmation, division with regeneration, and parthenogene- sis), we find this always only along with sexual reproduction, ¢. e. alternating therewith. When we find any process generally occurring in organisms the question of its significance involuntarily forces itself upon us. We ask directly, What does this arrangement do for the organism, what purpose has it for it? After citing and criticizing the views of Biitschli, Hensen, van Beneden, and Weismann, Hatschek expresses his own theoretical opinion, namely that in sewual reproduction we must recognize a remedy against the action of injurious variability. 164 Miscellaneous. He supports this theory as follows:—In the first place he starts from the truth, ascertained by the experience of breeders, that a certain degree of difference between the parent individualities is most favourable to the result of a crossing. Such differences which are caused in the organism by the external conditions of life would evidently be of no service in asexual reproduction. A disease which made its appearance in an individual which propagated solely by the method of gemmation would be inherited from generation to generation and endanger the existence of the entire species. But if a mingling of the diseased with perfectly healthy protoplasm (such as must necessarily occur in sexual reproduction) be brought about, we have not merely the possibility, but even the highest probability, of a rectification such as can be obtained in no other way. It is, in Hatschek’s opinion, in furnishing the opportunity for such rectification that we must find the chief use of the existence of sexually differentiated individuals among animals and plants.— Prager mediz. Wochenschrift, No. 46, 1887; Biologisches Central- blatt, No. 21, January 1, 1888, pp. 654-666. Notice of two new Branchiopod Crustacea from the Trans-Caspian Region. By Dr. Atrrep WALTER. The species described are as follows :— 1. Apus Heeckelii, n. sp. A, Jamina caudali coniformi, acuminata, incarinata neque spinulosa, duplo Jongiore quam lata. Sinu postico scuti angulato armatoque dentibus 30. Ramo longissimo primi pedis angulos scuti exce- dente. Segmentis posterioribus 16-17 scuto non obtectis, post- remis 6 apodibus. Colore scuti et corporis in vivo albido flaves- cente, pedum rosaceo, Hab. In a desert spring near Karadschabatyr, north of the Lower Atrek, in the Russian Trans-Caspian. A female was taken early in May, together with species of Estheria, Branchipus, and some Cladocera and Ostracoda. The species belongs to Grube’s second group of Apws, in which there is a caudal lamina separating the long caudal appendages (with A. pro- ductus, A. glacialis, &e.). It differs from all known allied species in the unkeeled and spineless caudal lamina. 2. Artemia asiatica, n. sp. A. processibus caudalibus digitiformibus, setas 8-10 gerentibus, antennis primis gracilibus filiformibus, apice setis 3 armatis. An- tennis secundis crassis, corniformibus, apice acuminatis, duobus tuberibus non dense setosis ad radicem eminentibus. Hab. In a salt-spring between Bend-i-nadyr and the well of Agamet, in the mountain-desert east of Murgab, near the Afghan boundary. Female, taken in April 1887. Colour of the living animal tile- red.—Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat. de Moscou, nouv. sér., tome i. (1887), pp. 924-927, THE ANNALS AND MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY, [SIXTH SERIES. } No. 3. MARCH 1888, XX.—On a Collection of Reptiles from China. By Dr. A. Ginruer, F.R.S. [Plate XII.] Mr. A. E. Prarr, who is engaged in exploring for Mr. J. H. Leech the entomological fauna of the interior of China, has availed himself of the opportunity thus afforded him of col- lecting the reptiles and fishes of the country near Kiu Kiang, on the Yantsze river. The reptiles were collected in the mountains north of Kiu Kiang. Like all Chinese collec- tions formed at a distance from the coast-line, at some well ascertained locality, the present is a valuable contribution to our knowledge of this fanna. The general features of the reptilian fauna of China are fairly well known; but compa- ratively few reliable data have been collected which may serve for a more detailed inquiry into the range of the species, and lead to a complete knowledge of the manner in which the tropical fauna gradually merges into that of temperate Asia. Mr. Pratt, besides, was particularly fortunate in discovering a most interesting new form of Crotaline snake and in redis- covering the genus Phyllophis, of which one specimen only was previously known. 1. Emys Reevest?, Gray. The ornamental colours of the soft parts are distributed as follows :—They consist of yellow bands and spots, edged with Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. 12 166 Dr. A. Giinther on Reptiles from China. black; the most conspicuous is a band running from the upper part of the eye along the upper margin of the neck ; sometimes it is interrupted in some part of its course, and generally a continuation of it is visible in front of the eye. A short curved band between the eye and the tympanum, another running from the lower part of the eye to below the tympa- num; an oblong spot at the posterior angle of the mandible. Tympanum and posttympanic region with curved streaks and spots. Sides and lower part of the neck with parallel straight bands, posteriorly broken up into series of spots. In very young examples these ornamentations are less numerous. 2. Trionyx sinensis, Wiegm. Three young specimens. 3. Tachydromus septentrionalis, Gthr. Numerous. 4. Tachydromus Woltert, Fisch. One specimen. Notes on the Species of 'Tachydromus. The lizards of this genus (with the exception of 7’. smarag- dinus) resemble one another in general appearance so much as to induce some herpetologists to consider certain characters on which I had based the distinction of the species to be of very doubtful specific value. I think the species ean be readily and with certainty distinguished ; they are based on characters which in my experience are subject to only excep- tional variation, and which, slight as they are, must appear significant enough when they are found to be constant in specimens from the same locality and combined with one or more similarly constant characters. The late Dr. Stoliczka was the first to refuse specific value to the number of mental scutes and inguinal pores. In his notes on a Zachydromus from Sikkim (Journ. As. Soc. Beng. xli. 1872, p. 87), which he identified with the archipelagic T. sexlineatus and of which he had twenty-five specimens, he says that he has found four specimens with four chin- shields, the others having three, and one specimen with two inguinal pores, the others having three, four, or five. Such an amount of variation I have not found in any species, although I examined equally large numbers of individuals of several species; and in not a single species have I met Dr. A. Giinther on Reptiles from China. 167 with a variation of the number of the chin-shields *. In all the numerous specimens of 7’. septentrionalis and T. smarag- dinus the number of inguinal pores is invariable. More especially with regard to the true 7’. sealineatus, of which I have examined some forty examples t, the number of chin- shields is invariably three and that of inguinal pores very rarely exceeds two; in three specimens (two from Borneo) I have observed one pore only. What follows from these observations is :— Ist. That the species examined by Stoliczka differs from the other species of the genus in having a greater number of inguinal pores and, therefore, in being liable to more frequent variation in this respect. 2nd. That that species must be distinet from TZ. sealinea- tus and had better be distinguished by another name—7Z’ stkkimensis. Specimens of 7’, sealineatus from Khassya, in the British Museum, have on the whole a somewhat shorter and less tapering snout, also shorter toes than the typical form, and approach in these respects 7’. mertdionalis. This latter species has been placed by Mr. Boulenger (‘ Lizards,’ i. p. 4) as a synonym of T. sealineatus, but besides being a less slender species, the four specimens have one inguinal pore only, like TZ. septentrionalis, in which the constancy of this character is a remarkable and incontro- vertible fact. Of the five species united by Mr. Boulenger (J. c. p. 5) under the name of 7’. tachydromovdes, T. septentrionalis is the one the distinctness of which from the Japanese form or forms can be least impugned. We have now no less than twenty-seven specimens before us, a most instructive series as to the value of the characters by which this species has been defined. Only two of the specimens, from Shanghai, differ from the others in having a series of small scales intercalated between the outer pair of large scaled series. According to Stoliczka’s estimate of the specific characters in Tachydromus these two specimens should be relegated to a distinct species ; and if this peculiarity should prove to be constant in the form inhabiting that district, I myself should be inclined to separate it from 7. septentrionalis. Schlegel figures in the ‘Fauna Japonica’ his 7. tachydro- * One individual of 7. Woltert has three on one and four on the other side, which, of course, proves nothing, as in every lizard almost any two contiguous head-shields may be found abnormally confluent. + Half of this number belong to the Museum of Genoa, haying been kindly forwarded to me by the Marquis J. Doria. 12= 168 Dr. A. Giinther on Reptiles from China. motdes with three inguinal pores and strongly keeled ventral scutes. I have seen only one specimen from Japan with three pores, but six others possess only two, and their ventral scutes are remarkably smooth, only those on the side of the abdo- men being slightly keeled. Duméril and Bibron also do not seem to have observed more than two pores in this or any other species of the genus. Whether or not 7. amurensis, Ptrs., is distinct from 7. tachydromoides must be left uncertain until more materials are collected. I have not seen this form. But I have much less doubt as to the distinctness of T. Haughtonianus from T. tachydromoides, on account of the considerable difference in the number of transverse series of ventral scutes. Finally, three specimens of 7. Woltert of Fischer show a remarkable agreement in having a single inguinal pore com- bined with eight dorsal series, which are composed of scales of nearly equal size. One specimen is the type from the Korea, a second forms part of the present collection from Kiu Kiang, and the origin of the third is unknown. ‘The colora- tion is also identical, the white lateral band being singularly bright and well defined. Thus I distinguish from the materials at present at my disposal and from the descriptions of authors eight species, which may be shortly characterized as follows :— I. Three pairs of chin-shields. A. Dorsal seales in four series. 1. Inguinal pores three to five; ventral scutes in twelve series. ' T. sikkimensis, sp. n. Sikkim. 2. Inguinal pores two (exceptionally one); ventral scutes in ten series ............ I. sexlineatus, Daud. Borneo, Java, Birma, Khassya. 8. Inguinal pore one; ventral scutes in twelve series. T. meridionalis, Gthr. China. B. Dorsal scales in eight or nine series, of which the three outer ones on each side are the largest ; one inguinal pore. T. smaragdinus, Blgy. Loochoo Is- lands. C. Dorsal scales in six series, of which the two middle ones contain very small scales, and are represented sometimes by one series only *; one inguinal pore. 7. septentrionalis,Gthr. Kiu Kiang, Nankin, Ningpo. * In two specimens from Shanghai a series of small scales is interca- lated between the outer pair of large scales, Dr. A. Giinther on Reptiles from China. 169 If. Four pairs of chin-shields. A. Two or three inguinal pores on each side. 1. Three inguinal pores; dorsal scales in eight series, of which the two middle are smaller than the rest. T. amurensis, Ptrs. Amoorland. 2. Two (three) inguinal pores; dorsal scales in six series, those of the two middle ones smaller than the others; twenty- two or twenty-three in a longitudinal series between the BIRT Gaepe eas, cus te ey ok aie T. tachydromoides, Schleg., = T. ja- ponicus, D. & B. Japan. 3. Two inguinal pores ; dorsal scales in six series; twenty-seven in a longitudinal series between the axils, TL. Haughtonianus, Jerd. Assam. B. One inguinal pore. Dorsal scales in eight series, subequal in size. T. Woltert, Fisch. Corea, Kiu Kiang. 5. Lygosoma Reevestt, Gray. A specimen in the collection has twenty-eight series of scales round the body, and therefore comes nearest to the seink which I have described as Humeces modestus. How- ever, Mr. Boulenger has already stated that the number of series of scales varies in these lizards from twenty-eight to thirty-two *. Like My. Boulenger, I am unable to separate these Chinese scinks from the North-American Z. laterale. 6. Lygosoma elegans, Blgr. One specimen. 7. Gecko japonicus, D. & B. Two specimens. 8. Calamaria quadrimaculata, D. & B. Four adult specimens. Their abdomen is scarlet; all possess a black, median, subcaudal band, which occupies neatly the whole width of the posterior subcaudal scutes, being much narrower anteriorly. ‘Tail very obtuse. The British Museum possesses also a young specimen from Hongkong. 9. Simotes chinensis, sp n. Scales in seventeen rows. Hight upper labials, the fourth * Thirty-four series of scales, as stated in the ‘Reptiles of British India, p. 88, for the type of Z. Reevest?, is an error for thirty-two. 170 Dr. A. Giinther on Reptiles from China. and fifth entering the orbit ; loreal square; one pre- and two postoculars; anterior chin-shields in contact with four lower labials. Ventral shields 190, distinctly keeled on the sides ; subcaudals 63, anal entire. The ground-colour is a light brownish grey ; trunk crossed by thirteen, tail by four nar- row, equidistant, black cross bars; these are somewhat broader on the back than on the sides, and indistinctly edged with white. A black band from eye to eye and continued over the fifth and sixth labials. The black arrow-shaped spot on the neck is well defined. Abdomen with numerous square black spots, each occupying one half or the whole of a ventral scute. Subcaudals uniform white. One young specimen measures 84 inches, the tail being 2 inches long. 10. Coluber rufodorsatus, Cant. Common. 11. Elaphis dione, Pall. One specimen. 12. Elaphis sauromates, Pall. Nine specimens. 13. Zaocys dhumnades, Cant. Five specimens. 14. Ptyas korros, Reinw. One specimen. 15. Phyllophis carinata. Phyllophis carinata, Giinth. Rept. Brit. Ind. p. 295, pl. xxi. fig. B, The discovery of a second specimen of this singular type settles the question as to its habitat. Both specimens agree in every respect; but in the new specimen a fine brown line begins to be visible in the second half of the body be- tween the third and fourth outer series of scales, disappearing near the root of the tail. A pair of similar lines run along the back of the tail. A series of black spots on each side of the abdomen is formed by very small specks, one on each side of each abdominal scute. 16. Cyclophis major, Gthr. Seven specimens, Dr. A. Giinther on Reptiles from China, 171 17. Tropidonotus annularis, Hallow. Common. 18. Tropidonotus tigrinus, Boie. Very common. | 19. Ophites septentrionalis, Gthr. One specimen. 20. Lycodon rufozonatus, Cant. Common. 21. Bungarus semifasciatus, Kuhl. One specimen. 22. Callophis annularis, Gthr. One specimen. 23. Halys Blomhoffit, Boie. Common. 24. Halys acutus, sp.n. (Pl. XII.) ‘This new species may be at once recognized by the upper part of the extremity of the snout being produced into a short, flexible, pointed lobe which projects from between the ante- rior frontal and the rostral shield. The anterior frontals are small, longer than broad; the posterior very large, inter- mediate in size between the anterior frontals and the occipi- tals. Eye surrounded by a ring of small orbitals, of which those in front are rather elongate; that below the eye is like- wise long and crescent-shaped, separated by a small postocular from the superciliary shield. Seven upper labials, of which the second forms the anterior wall of the antorbital pit, the third and fourth being the largest. A series of three large temporal shields occupies the lower part of the temple, the space between this series and the occipital being covered by ordinary scales. Scales strongly keeled, the keels forming a high sharp ridge on the posterior part of the body. ach scale bears, besides the keel, on its extremity a pair of very small nodules ; scales in twenty-one rows. Ventral shields 160; anal entire ; subcaudals 60, of which the six or twenty anterior may be single. Extremity of the tail compressed, covered with com- paratively large vertical scutes, and terminating ina long and compressed spine. 172 Mr. H. J. Carter on The colour of the upper parts is brown, each side of the body being ornamented with a series of large dark-coloured triangles, the point of each triangle meeting that of the other side in the median line of the back. Lower parts whitish, with a series of large rounded black spots on each side and smaller ones of irregular shape in the middle. The upper part of the head is uniform black; a sharp line, which runs from the eye along the middle of the temporal scutes to the angle of the mouth, dividing the black coloration of the upper parts from the white of the lower. This species is very remarkable not only on account of the rostral lobe, but also for the modification of the scutellation of its compressed tail. Although this modification cannot in any way be taken as an initial step in the development of the rattle of Crotalus, the rattle being a modification of the last dermal scute only into which the vertebral column is not prolonged, yet the tail of this species may exercise in a much smaller degree the same function as in the rattlesnake, and may be an instrument by which vibrations and sound are preduced. It is well known also that many innocuous snakes are able to vibrate the extremity of their tail. To judge from its size and from the development of its poisonous appa- ratus this snake must be extremely dangerous. Three specimens are in the collection, of which the largest is 46 inches long, the tail measuring 6} inches. XXI.—On two new Genera alited to Loftusia, from the Kara- koram Fass and the Cambridge Greensand respectively. sy H. J. Carter, F.R.S. &e. (Plate XIII] In the month of December, 1887, Mr. W. Theobald, M.R.A.S., late Deputy Superintendent, Geological Survey of India, submitted for my examination six of the fossils commonly ealled ‘ Karakoram stones,” which were brought from the “‘Karakoram Pass,” in the Karakoram range of mountains, North-east Kashmir, where they were collected by the late Dr. F. Stoliczka. Five of these are undoubtedly Parkerie ; but the other, of which, unfortunately, there is only half, is totally different, and so very like Loftusta in composition, althongh not in form and structure, that (as will be seen here- after) 1 have allied it to the latter and proposed for it the two new Genera allied to Loftusia. 173 term “ Stoliezkiella Theobaldi,” thus coupling two names well known in the Geological Survey of India. To the five specimens of Parkeria I will more particularly refer hereafter; meanwhile let us proceed to the description of Stoliczkiella Theobaldi, gen. et sp.n. (Pl. XIII. figs. 1-4.) (Half the specimen.) General form when entire (according to Mr. Theobald, who had it cut through the short axis into equal halves) a com- pressed spheroid ; hence the outline of the half about to be described represents a hyperbola 1:4 in. high, with a nearly elliptical base, whose long axis is 23% in. and the short one 135; so that with these dimensions and Mr. Theobald’s state- ment, viz. that the other half was the same in size, the entire shape of the fossil may be easily assumed (Pl. XIII. fig. 1). Surface of this half remarkable for the presence ofa star-like radiation in relief (fig. 1, a), of which the centre is on one side of the summit of the hyperbola, and thus eccentric, so that its axis would pass obliquely through the base; but whether this “ eceentric”’ position is natural or caused by the situ- ation of the sectional line or other circumstances, such as rock-contortion &c., the half fossil does not enable me to determine; again, the centre of the “star-like” radiation is oval in its circumference, with the long axis directed obliquely across the half fossil on one side of the summit, and this is all that can now be stated of its position with relation to the rest of the fossil when entire. This stelli- form group consists of a great number of narrow lanceolate segments, in relief, which, radiating from a central point, vary in length and size under 7} in. long, while they are shorter and more or less overlap each other about the centre, as they le upon the convexity of the fossil, indica- ting that they have been successively developed (figs. 1 and 3). Beyond the ends of the “segments” of this stelliform portion come a great number of lozenge-shaped_ projections, more or less in juxtaposition, which seem to represent the external ends of internal ‘‘ segments,” and in their tessellated arrangement, circumscribed by obliquely intercrossing linear grooves, which separate them, simulate the surface of a fir- cone (fig. 1, 0). ‘These projections are only partially scattered over the surface, as they are interrupted by the presence of a large quantity of foreign material (fig. 1, ¢¢), which in many places occupies so much ot the fossil as to frequently insulate 174 Mr. H. J. Carter on the lozenge-shaped projections and thus destroy their con- tinuity (fig. 1, d). In composition the segments consist of clouded, striated, granular calespar of a grey colour ; but there is a small fragment of polygonal cell-tissue near the centre (of which the divisions are 1-900th in. in diameter), which not only leads to the inference that the granulated condition of the calespar composing the segments generally might. have origin- ated in this way, but points out that this can only be decided by a specimen where the structure generally is better pre- served than in the present instance. On the other hand, the brown foreign material which intervenes between the projec- tions and is composed of foraminiferal detritus also presents, where weathered, a granular character on the surface. So that, in fact, the form of the calcareous development may be said to be struggling to make its appearance through the fora- miniferal detritus. Turning to the dase of the cone or half-specimen (fig. 2), we find that it presents an indistinct radial structure of the “ seg- ments,” the axisof which is alsoeccentric and rather towards one end of the ellipse (fig. 2,a), on the surface of which the obliquely cut ends of the segments in juxtaposition here and there, of a lozenge-shape (fig. 2, 6), indicate that the general structure of the fossil is foretold by that on the surface ; while the whole is more or less cut up and thus obscured by the presence of the foraminiferal detritus, which not only separates the seg- ments longitudinally in the form of straggling, unequal, thread-like accumulations, but traverses them in all direc- tions in more or less delicate ones, swelling out here and there into larger masses as on the surface (fig. 2, ccc). Thanks to the fine polish which the lapidary has given this basal plain, one can see by strong light, when well con- densed and reflected, under microscopic power the minute ele- ments of which it is composed, and these consist of the above- mentioned clouded grey calespar and the brown foraminiferal detritus ; the former pervaded by the faint remnants of what appears to have been a reticulated membrano-tubular structure, and the latter (as seen under the microscope) consisting of a yellowish substance of a tangled thready nature, infinitely divided dendritically and reticulatingly, like veined marble or frothy, filiferous protoplasm (fig. 4), densely charged with more or less broken-down tests of minute Foraminifera and a great number of opaque scarlet spherules (fig. 4, 6), following the grooves between the “segments” and those circum- scribing the lozenge-shaped projections on the surface, con- trasting strongly in colour with the whitish-grey clouded cale- spar. ‘This appears to be identical with Brady’s ‘ accessory two new Genera allied to Loftusia. 175 structures” in Loftusia persica, which he has aptly com- pared to “a piece of fine sponge” (Phil. Trans. 1870, p. 745) —the largest foraminiferal test seen being discoid and about 1-164th in. in diameter (fig. 2d) and the scarlet spherules about 1-1500th, but very variable in this respect, from circum- stances which will appear hereafter. As might be expected, the foraminiferal detritus presents a great number of minute and microscopic forms which appear to be chiefly discoid, among which are some like Déscorbina and Planorbulina, wherein the great thickness of the marginal cord and ribs or intercameral septa is out of all proportion to the size of the cavities of the test; but they are one and all more or less broken down in a manner that evidences assimi- lative digestion ; so that it becomes impossible for any one but an expert to say what their original forms were, and thus point out the families or genera to which they respectively belong; while fragments of the marginal cord and inter- cameral septa, often crossed by transverse strie like the marginal cord and of tubular appearance, are plentifully scat- tered through the whole substance, which fragments might be mistaken for the remains of structure proper to the fossilized animal, were they not occasionally connected (that is a portion of the striated cord with a bit of the intercameral septum attached to it), so as to reveal their true nature. But these fragments and the number of foraminiferal tests mixed up with the striated granules of calespar and the tangled thread-like ‘‘ yellow substance ”’ produce a confusion of material in which it becomes difficult to distinguish the indistinctly marked “ fragments ”’ of the proper animal. Still of all these parts the most interesting are the opaque scarlet spherules (fig. 4,5), which are not only so numerously scattered throughout the mass as in some places to give it a reddish hue, but appear in many instances ¢v the chambers of the foraminiferal tests themselves (fig. 5), thus evidencing the source from which they were originally derived, as I shall more satisfactorily show in the “ Observations”’ that will be appended to this description; while in many places they may be seen in linear or reticular arrangement indicative of having been in a tubular structure or investment of the yellow substance, although nothing but the faintest tinge of this remains, so that it might have been no more than a simple line of protoplasm (fig. 4, a). Loc. Karakoram Pass, Karakoram range of mountains. “The so-called ‘ Karakoram Stones,’ 2. e. corals, occur in dark shales below the limestone, which are capped by a yel- lowish limestone, well bedded, but of unascertained age :” 176 Mr. H. J. Carter on such is the only remark that accompanied them, which is extracted from the late Dr. F. Stoliczka’s diary, made on the “17th jJune, 1874,” barely two days before his death, for which he was then sickening (‘ Scientific Results of the Second Yarkand Mission,’ published by order of the Govern- ment of India, Calcutta, 1879). Would that he had lived to have written more! Obs. With only half the fossil it may at first appear pre- sumptuous to endeavour to establish a new genus, but with the above data it will appear to those who are acquainted with the structure and composition of Loftusta persica to be otherwise; at the same time, if this be objected to, then we must regard the description as “ provisional,” for under no other circumstances can the facts connected with this appa- rently unique specimen be recorded. It may be learnt from the above statements that the fossil is composed to a great extent of foraminiferal detritus or sea- bottom, and thus it may be assumed that the Foraminifera were taken in by the animal for nutritive purposes; while the whole is totally different both m general form and internal structure from any species of Foraminifera that has been made known. Comparing its composition with that of Loftusta persica, it will be found that the two are almost identical; thus, setting aside the misleading resemblance to Alveolina &c. in outward form and the ‘lamino-spiral” development in Loftusta persica, we have absolutely nothing left to identify it with Alveolina or any other evident form of Foraminifera; while the difference in size of the largest recorded specimen, viz. 3 in. long by 14 in. broad, so far exceeds that of any known specimen of the Foraminifera, that it alone is almost sufficient to negative such a supposition. Hence there can be no objection on this score to allying the Karakoram fossil to that of Persia, viz. Loftusia persica, on which account it becomes necessary to create a new family for Loftusia persica and Stolrczkiella Theobaldi that may be termed “* Loftusiidee.”” It is not my object here to go at length into the minute structure of Loftusta persica, for that has been described and illustrated by Mr. H. B. Brady, in the ‘ Philosophical Trans- actions’ for 1869 (vol. clix. p. 739), in a way which does not require repetition ; but there are one or two points in con- nexion with S. Theobaldi which are of great interest as bearing not only upon the identity of composition in Loftusia persica and Stoliczkiella Theobaldi, but on the propagative elements of the Foraminifera generally ; I allude more particularly to two new Genera allied to Loftusia. 177 the presence of the “ opaque scarlet spherules,” which are as abundant in ZL. persica as in S. Theobald, and to be seen in both in the chambers of foraminiferal tests (from which they all originally come) as well as dispersed through the substance of the body generally (figs. 5, a, and 4, 6). I could not specify the kind of test in which they appear in S. 77 heobaldi, for the fragments are too much broken down for recognition ; but in the microscopic slice of Loftusta persica, about 2 in. long by 1 in. in diameter, which Mr. H. B. Brady, F.R.S. &c., kindly gave me several years ago, the instances are both clear and numerous, among which I have*marked one for observation of a discoid form in which four or five of the chambers respectively present an opaque scarlet spherule (fig. 5), and another, a Zextularva, in which ten of the cham- bers on one side and upwards of the same number on the other each present an opaque scarlet spherule; so that there can be no doubt whatever that in both S. Theobaldi and L. persica the opaque scarlet spherules come from the chambers of foraminiferal tests, as above stated, and thus are to be regarded as foreign material in both respectively. And here the difference in size of these scarlet spherules, to which I have already alluded, may be explained, viz. by the spherule when large often presenting the appearance of being com- posed of a great number of much smaller ones of the same kind in a spherical capsule; so that the scarlet mass, both in the chambers and out of them, may not only when breaking up present an irregular form, but the opaque scarlet body may vary very much in diameter. That these scarlet bodies are reproductive particles may be learnt from what Max Schultze described and illustrated in recent species in 1854 and 1857, all of which was summarized and illustrated by Dr. Carpenter in 1862 (“ Introduction to the Study of the Foraminifera,” Ray Soc. Publ. p. 37 &c. and pl. xiv.), while all was confirmed by myself, not only in recent but in fossil forms, in 1861 (‘ Annals,’ vol. viii. pp. 318, 325, and 451, pl. xvu. figs. 12 and 13, 14 and 15, and 1, 0, respec- tively). The beautifully infiltrated specimens by which the latter was confirmed I have still by me, for at the time they were obtained, now thirty-six years ago, I ground down their surfaces, covered them with balsam, and attached them to glass slips, through which their minute structure, from its brilliant colours and clear definition, can even now be seen not only as well as ever, from its imperishable nature, but more satisfactorily than in the recent specimen, the shell- structure remaining pure opaque white, the tubular structure 178 Mr. H. J. Carter on between the chambers being filled with bright ochraceous yellow matter, and the opaque scarlet spherules in the cham- bers of the central plane—especially brilliant in Orbztotdes dispansa, but less so in Nummulites Ramondi, from not being so highly coloured (that is, rather brownish), and being imbed- ded in the clear calespar filling one of the central plane of chambers, where they are also a little translucent and separated —look like the “roe of a herring;” so that, but for these specimens, I should never have realized the nature of these bodies either in Stoliczhiella Theobaldi or Loftusia persica. I have already alluded to the fragments of marginal cord and intercameral septa scattered throughout the body-substance of both these specimens, in which, from the absence of stria on the calespar in the microscopic slice of Loftusta persica, they are much more evident than in the Karakoram specimen, where, on the other hand, all the grains of this mineral are striated (that is, present the lines of cleavage), and thus by intercrossing more or less obscure their outlines. At this period I received from my kind friend Dr. J. Millar, F.L.S. &e., several specimens of Parkeria that had been obtained from the Cambridge Greensand, both massive and in their microscopic sections, among which was one (noticed by Dr. Millar as different from the rest) which proved on examination to be a species of Loftusta, but so unlike Loftusia persica and Stoliczkiella Theobaldi that it must form the type of a third genus of the family Loftusiide, for which I would propose the name of ‘Millarella,” and for the speci- men that of Millarella cantabrigiensis, after the friend who gave it to me and the locality from which it was obtained *. Millarella cantabrigtensis, gen. etsp.n. (Pl. XIII. figs. 6-8.) General form subspherical, with a small, irregular cup-like, shallow excavation about 4-8ths of an inch in diameter at one end (? accidental)+. Consistence hard and earth-like, not crys- talline. Surface very rough and irregular, unevenly granu- liferous throughout. Granulations of three sizes, viz. small, minute, and microscopic, the former of a brown colour charged * T was writing this paper, viz. about the 8th January, 1888, and on the 19th, after eleven days’ illness of bronchitis, Dr. Millar died. Then lost Natural History one of her ablest advocates and I one of my best and dearest friends! + This now appears to have been the place where the organism was originally attached to some submarine object (see concluding part of footnote, p. 181). two new Genera allied to Loftusia. 179 with foraminiferal detritus, the minute dark green particles consisting of glauconite, and the microscopic ones of fine white silico-calcareous sand, in which the others are imbedded. From the margin of the cup-like excavation there is an indistinct linear radiating arrangement of the larger granu- lated projections, which extends for a short distance outwards, where it becomes lost among the irregular granulations of the surface, which is amorphous, that is, without any pattern. Internally the composition is the same, only the detail ren- dered more evident by the polished surfaces of the pieces and the mounted microscopical section, where the ‘ brown- coloured”’ material is seen to be literally crammed with fora- miniferal detritus, consisting of minute foraminiferal tests of various forms and sizes, chiefly Globigerina and Orbulina (? Globigerina-ooze) more or less broken down (fig. 8), in some of whose chambers may be seen glauconite (fig. 8, dd) and in others the opaque scarlet spherules above mentioned (fig. 8), the instances of the latter being so numerous and the dis- persed spherules (fig. 8, g) so abundant in some places as to impart a red tint to the surrounding material; also various forms of sponge-spicules (fig. 8,c) and a large quantity of (comparatively large) glauconite grains (fig. 8, e), which, from what has been just stated, appear to originate in the chambers of the foraminiferal tests, although from subsequent segregation they often present no particular form. I also notice in many places little masses of material like the frothy yellow substance described in Stoliczkiella Theobaldi, only of a white colour, looking like the broken-down remains of germinal tests about to be assimilated or discharged. As regards structure, all that can be learnt from the sec- tions is that, on the surface of the transverse one close to the ‘‘cup-like excavation,” the material is so condensed in the centre as to occupy a circular space about 3-12ths in. in diameter, which is continued upwards through the axis of the fossil, extending outwards in a less condensed state, and then followed by a great number of little pits or vacuities (interstices of a reticulated structure, figs. 7band8 a), which, although very irregular both in size and position, shadow forth a tendency to circumscribe circular divisions of more condensed mate- rial, each about 1-16th in. in diameter (the pits and the con- densed material corresponding with the large granulated projections on the surface of the fossil and their intervals). A little higher up (that is, in the centre of the fossil) the mounted microscopic section presents the same characters without any appearance of ‘‘axial condensation;”’ that is, the “¢ circular divisions’ are continued to the centre, about which 180 Mr. H. J. Carter on they are much more defined and uniform (fig. 6, a), but lose this again towards the circumference, where the linear dispo- sition of the “ pits” (fig. 6, 6) tends to indicate that they are transverse sections of a columnar structure which on all sides bends outwards towards the circumference. ‘This radia- tion is more particularly shown by the surface of the section through the line of union between the seventh and eighth parts of the fossil in this direction, of which the eighth part or crown is unfortunately absent, while the other parts when all put together give the “ subspherical”’ form mentioned. When themounted microscopic slice from the middleis viewed through a }-inch focus the circular spaces or divisions are seen to be united by intercommunicating extensions (fig. 7, bb) of the more condensed brown material, which, being without the foraminiferal detritus, and thus better seen, becomes resolved, under a power of five hundred diameters, into minute brown granules. I should also have mentioned, however, that in the midst of the foraminiferal detritus there are the remains of a fungoid matted structure, only extremely fine and minute, com- posed of white, opaque, apparently solid, branched, interunited and tortuous filaments, about 1-3000th in. in diameter, which thus also ought to have been inserted among the elements represented in the illustration, fig. 8. Size of fossil, when all the parts are put together, about 1} in. in diameter, and, as before stated, subspherical in shape, or like that of a Parkeria®. * T have also three other specimens from the Cambridge Greensand, of the same nature as Millarella, in which this fungoid filamentous struc- ture is more or less evident, viz.:—1l, about } in. in diameter, globular, with uneven earthy surface, composed of white chalky substance charged with the usual foraminiferous detritus and permeated by a meandering, defined, tortuous structure of a yellowish tint, entirely made up of the same kind of filament as that noticed in Millarella, forming altogether in amount about half as much as the white chalky substance; 2, another specimen about the same size and similarly composed, but in which the meandering development is not evident and the filamentous structure not so plain, while the surface is regularly tuberculated with a brown material, which appears to be nothing more than a condensed or hardened state of the foraminiferal detritus of the interior, so that difference in fossiliza- tion may have to be taken into account in these instances; and 3, a specimen which forms the nucleus or support upon which a Parkerian structure has been built. This consists of a slightly fusiform, conical, solid cylinder, in composition like the last specimen mentioned, about 14 in. long and 9-24ths in. in its greatest diameter, conical at one end and obtuse at the other, which appears to have been broken off from an original attachment. Be this as it may, however, this cylindrical form has been overgrown by a Parkerian development on all parts except the extremities, viz. the conical and the obtuse ends, to the extent of half an inch, so that until the spheroidal mass thus produced was cut through the whole looked like a globular Parkeria. Hence it is interesting to find two new Genera allied to Loftusia. 181 Loc, Cambridge Greensand. Obs. Although in general form this fossil might be easily mistaken for a Parkeria, the total absence of all distinct tubu- liferous structure both externally and internally, together with the quantity of foraminiferal detritus in its composition, is quite sufficient to point out the difference. I have alluded to the presence of glauconite in the chambers of some of the foraminiferal tests, and inferred that all the particles of this mineral originated in this way, although, when increasing in size, assuming forms which are totally unlike a foraminiferal test ; but that they are so may be learnt from an examination of the green particles generally of the ‘‘ Greensand,’’—to which it is curious to add that this is going on at the present time in the Globigeriniferous sand of the bed of the Atlantic (see “‘ Deep-sea Sponges dredged on board H.M.S. ‘ Porcupine,’ ” ‘ Annals,’ 1876, vol. xviil. p. 474, under “ Black Grains ”’); while it is also remarkable that glauconite is altogether absent in my specimens of Loftusia persica and only seen in very small quantity in Stoliczkiella Theobaldi. What the nature of the animal of the Loftusiide may have been it is difficult to conjecture further than that, in all three genera, it must have had the power of enclosing foreign material like the Amaba, and therefore its substance must have been rhizopodous, hence the absence of all wadl/ indica- ting tubulation. Again, the broken-down forms of the tests mighthave been both for nutriment and skeletal purposes. ‘The rhizopodous character of both Sponges and Foraminifera afford examples of this, ex gr. my genus Holopsamma (‘ Annals,’ 1885, vol. xv. p. 211) and the arenaceous foraminiferal tests, in both of which the plasmic sarcode or protoplasm builds up foreign material into the specific form which the apparently identical simple substance is destined to produce. But here all identification of the Loftusiide with the Sponges and typical Foraminiiera seems to cease, although there is a great resem- blance between Brady’s ‘ Syringammina fragillissima”’ (‘ Challenger’ Report on Foraminifera, vol. ix., text, p. 242) and Millarella cantabrigiensis, especially in illustration “ a,”’ but not in the tubular structure ‘‘c”’ (woodcuts), so that we must look still further for a nearer analogy. Undoubtedly the same sarcodic structure in Loftusta per- sica which took in foreign material presents in the fossil a that the Parkeria not only grew upon the Millarella, but that the latter presents signs in its obtuse end of having originally been attached to some submarine object, which would seem to be not uncommon, for there are three more instances of it in my cabinet. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol.i. 13 182 . Mr. H. J. Carter on membrano-tubular-labyrinthic structure (see Brady’s illustra- tion, 7. c. pl. Ixxix. figs. 1-3), remnants of which can, I think, be faintly seen in the more Eonmeed substance of Siokezbdalla Theobald’, but not in Miltarella cantubrigiensis, where the brown substance alone represents the form without any wall. But larger fragments of foraminiferous tests in the two former and longer sponge-spicules than the diameter of the sarcodic divisions in the latter exist as in sponge- -tissue after it has become hardened; so that one might infer that when they were taken in this tissue was in a plastic amoeboid state. And therefore all that I can conjecture of the nature of the animal substance of the Loftusiide is that it was a solid plasma, like that of the &thalium, which, during its active state, is capable of assuming every form, massive and reticulate, that can be conceived, at the same time that it can and does take in any particles of foreign material that suit its purpose ; while, like the other Myxomycetes which present apparently thie Game simple protoplasmic substance during their active lite, each protoplasm is destined to end in the : specific form which it was intended to develop. PARKERIA, Carp., 1869. With reference to Parkeria I would only add, after the excellent paper written by Hips H. A. Nicholson on this fossil (( Annals,’ Jan. 1888, p. 1 &c.), that as there appears to be more than one British species and Prof. Martin Duncan in his Memoir makes of those from the Karakoram Pass which he examined several species and two genera (‘ Scien- tific Results of the Second Yarkand Mision,’ Calcutta, 1879, . 10), it seems to me, as with Loftusia persica of Brady, 1879, ‘desirable that it should have a family name, for which I would propose a Parkeriidee,” which, being but a patronymic of Carpenters “Parkeria,” established for that species and genus in 1869, when he published his beautifully illustrated description ot this fossil in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions’ (vol. clix. p. 721), should take precedence of Duncan’s “ Syringospheeride ” of 1879 (that is ten years after), esta- blished tor the * Karakoram Stones,” which we now know to be Parkerie, not only from what Prof. Nicholson has stated from ocular demonstration (‘ Annals,’ @.¢. p. 11), but from what I have learned from an examination of the five speci- mens of these ‘ Stones’ mentioned at the commencement of this paper, some of which are identical with Prof. Duncan’s representations, I cannot agree with Prof. Nicholson in his statement that two new Genera allied to Loftusia. 183 the “tubuli” do not present any “ transverse internal parti- tions,’ as I have a polished section of Purkerta which Dr. Millar gave me, on which, here and there, these appear to me to be distinctly evident, and in a section through the centre of one of the Parkerte from the Karakoram Pass I also dis- tinctly saw one in a portion of the tubuliferous structure which had been raised above the polished surface by etching with dilute nitric acid, while at the same time I could see nothing in this section particularly different from that of Parkeria, Carp , except that the lapidification is much more compact and crystalline and that there is an appearance of a darker, tree-like portion branching from the centre to the cir- cumference, which seems to arise from the presence of the bundles of longer-tubed structure having been bent into this form, also seen, but in a straighter one, in the same kind of polished section of the Cambridge Parkeria. It is also worth noticing that Loftusia and Parkeria are found together both in the “ Greensand ”’ of Cambridge and at the Karakoram Pass, in Asia. Provisional Characters of the Families Parkeriidee and Lofttusiidee. Parkeriide. Minute or basal structure consisting of tubuli intercom- municating freely with each other in juxtaposition, pierced by larger tubes (the zooidal tubes of Nicholson, /. ¢.), which radiate from the centre to the circumiference. Specimens generally nucleated by, or growing upon, a foreign body. Loftusiide. Minute or basal structure consisting of a guasi-membrano- labyrinthic, hollow, reticulated fabric charged with foramini- ieral detritus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIII. Fig.1. Stoliczkiella Theobaidi, nat. size. Half the specimen. Lateral view, Showing :—a, stelliform group of segments on the surface ; b, external ends of internal segimentation; ec, foraminiferal detritus; d, insulated ends of internal segmentation; e, portion of fossil broken out. Fig. 2. The same. Base, nat. size. aa, lines of segmentation; 3, lozenge-shaped ends of truncated segments; cec, foraminiferal detritus represented by the dark shade ; d, discoid foraminiferal test. 13* 184 Mr. G. E. Mason on a new Earth- Snake Fig. 3. The same. Outline of the group of segments on the surface, nat. size. Drawn to measurement as if flat. Fig. 4. The same. Portion of the yellow froth-like substance, greatly magnified. a, thread-like extension of the same branched and more or less charged with the opaque scarlet spherules in line; b, scarlet spherules dispersed. Diagrammatic. Fig.5. Discoid foraminiferal test, much magnified, showing scarlet spherules in the chambers. a, spherule. From a microscopic mounted longitudinal section of Loftusia persica. Nat. size of test 1-164th inch in diameter. Diagrammatic. Fig. 6. Millarella cantabrigiensis. Microscopic slice from the centre of the specimen, nat. size, indicating the transverse diameter of the fossil. a, structure in the centre, composed of more or less circular divisions interunited circumferentially by extensions of the same material: 5, pits or vacuities indicating the intervals between the “extensions” where the “circular divisions” are not well-defined. Fig. 7. The same. Portion of the centre, much magnified, to show the mode of union of the circular divisions by the intervening “ ex- tensions (reticulated structure).” a, circular division ; 6, inter- vening extensions. Diagrammatic. Fig. 8. The same. Circular division, still more magnified, to show the character of the foraminiferal detritus with which it is charged. a, “intervening extensions (reticulated structure) ;” 66, fora- miniferal tests; c, sponge-spicules; d, discoid test, whose chambers are filled with glauconite; e, amorphous portion of glauconite ; f, test in whose chambers respectively there is a scarlet spherule; g, dispersed spherules. XXII.—Description of a new Earth-Snake of the Genus Silybura from the Bombay Presidency, with Remarks on other little-known Uropeltide. By Grorae E. Mason. Stlybura Phipsonii, sp. n. Head smaller than in S. nilgherriensis; snout rather pointed, rostral shield nearly twice as long as the vertical and one third the length of the head, convex above, produced back but not separating the nasals; frontals somewhat smaller than nasals, broad below, very narrow upwards and only just meeting in front of the vertical; eye rather large, lying in the front of the ocular shield and occu- pying a third of its size; vertical diamond-shaped, longer than broad ; caudal disk flat, not well defined, twice as long as broad ; the terminal scute large, broad, and rough, mode- rately bicuspid, the caudal scales prominently 2—4-keeled ; no chin-shields between the first pair of lower labials and the ventrals ; scales in 17 rows round the middle of the body and trom the Bombay Presidency. 185 neck; ventrals twice as large as the scales of the adjoining series, from 146 to 148; subcaudals 11 pairs. Length 9-11 inches, girth 14 inch. Black above, iridescent, with small, irregular, much scattered, yellowish-white spots; upper and lower labials yellow, a very narrow bright yellow line com- mencing at the angle of the mouth and continued for 1} inch along the tiunk, gradually diminishing to mere spots, which mingle with those scattered over the body; sometimes the presence of the line may be detected along the entire length of the body by an occasional group of confluent spots ; belly uniform black, or with a few indistinct yellowish-white spots, a very perfect bright yellow band along each side of the tail and crossing the vent. Hab. Bombay ghats. For the series of specimens upon which the above descrip- tion is founded I am indebted to my friend Mr. H. M. Phip- son, Honorary Secretary of the Bombay Natural History Society. ‘There are in the British Museum two snakes with 155 ventrals collected by Dr. Leith in the Bombay Presi- dency (the exact locality is not mentioned) which probably belong to the above species, but unfortunately they are in such indifferent condition that I cannot determine this point with certainty. I was inclined to endorse the opinion ex- pressed by Col. Beddome (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) xvii. p- 17) that the Bombay form was identical with S. nilgherri- ensis, though a very characteristic variety, but after much consideration and the comparison of the specimens at my disposal with an extensive series of that form and its varieties I have come to the conclusion that, according to the received notions of a species, this must be considered distinct and not merely a variety. Independently of the much smaller head, the rostral is convex above and pointed, and chin-shields are wanting between the lower labials and the ventrals. The caudal disk is also longer and proportionally narrower, while the scales contain a greater number of keels. Silybura nilgherriensis, var. picta. Stlybura nilgherriensis, var. picta, Beddome, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) xvii, p. 16. This variety is founded on a single specimen collected at Peermaad, North ‘Travancore, between 3000 and 4000 feet elevation. In collections I have recently received from the same locality this form is represented by numerous adult and young examples which tend to show that the coloration is very variable, many of the specimens differing greatly in this 186 Mr. G. E. Mason on a new Earth-Snake. respect from the type. In one instance it is orange-yellow above each scale, with a fine black margin; a few entirely black scales are scattered over the anterior and posterior portions of the trunk ; other specimens present markings such as were described originally by Beddome, except that the black scales are in series of from two to four and form irregular spots distributed over the back ; and again in another example the groups of spots flow into one another, thus showing a ten- dency to form cross bars. The coloration of the young 1s somewhat remarkable; a yellowish hue is predominant, the scales having a very mane black margin, each one of the cen- tral dorsal series black, forming a conspicuous line which extends from the head to the caudal disk ; the line is occasion- ally interrupted by a scale wanting the black mark ; an almost undistinguishable dark central spot on the five rows of scales on each side of the dorsal series. The colour of the belly differs little from the type in all my specimens, aiternate jet- black and irregular, broad, orange-coloured blotches or cross bars always being more or less present. The ventrals vary from 146 to 156. Rhinophis sanguineus. Rhinophis sanguineus, Beddome, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1868, p. 227,and Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) xvii. p. 8; Giinther, Rept. Brit. In lia, p. 186, Rhinophis mucrolepis, Beddome, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1868, p. 227, eum icon, (young ). I have specimens in my collection from the Wullingy forests near Palghat which do not coincide with the diagnosis given by Beddome and Ginther ; the ventrals vary from 166 to 183 only and the caudal scales are somewhat prominently keeled on the upper surface of the tail. It is a matter of uncertainty whether they should be regarded as conspecific, and I have refrained trom doing so until I can characterize them more fully. Melanophidium punctatum. ee eam punctatum, Beddome, Madr. Journ. Med. Science, Dec. In addition to the remarkable changes of the horny terminal scute of the tail noticed by Beddome (/. ¢.) and by Ginther in the ‘ Proceedings of the Zoological Society,’ 1875, p. 230, T have observed it furnished with three well-marked parallel ridges above, each terminating in a spine, side by side, the central one being of far greater length and the ridge more acute. ‘The specimens, which were collected at Peermaad, North Travancore, 4000 feet elevation, are of unusually large size, adults being 234 inches long, w ith a girth of 24 inches, Mr. G. A. Boulenger on new Brazilian Batrachians. 187 XXIII.—Deseriptions vu new Brazilian Batrachians. By G. A. BoULENGER. Leptodactylus prognathus. Tongue oval, nicked behind. Vomerine teeth in straight series behind the choanee. Snout depressed, acuminate, very prominent, slightly longer than the diameter of the orbit ; no canthus rostralis; nostril nearer the tip of the snout than the eye; interorbital space a little narrower than the upper eye- lid; tympanum two thirds the diameter of the eye. Fingers moderate, first much longer than second ; toes moderate, not fringed; subarticular tubercles well developed; two small metatarsal tubercles, inner oval, outer smaller and round. When the hind limb is stretched forwards along the body, the tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the anterior border of the orbit. Back with a few irregular, smooth, flat warts; a dorso-lateral glandular fold; a ventral discoidal fold. Greyish olive above, with blackish spots; a blackish cross band be- tween the eyes; a blackish band from the end of the snout to the eye; a whitish band, between the latter and the blackish margin of the upper lip, extends from below the nostril to the arm ; tympanum chestnut-brown, with a linear white border ; glandular lateral fold whitish ; limbs with blackish cross bands; lower surface white. Male with an external vocal sac on each side of the throat. From snout to vent 33 millim. Very closely allied to LZ. typhonius, Daud., which differs, however, in the numerous longitudinal dorsal folds. A single half-grown male specimen from Rio Grande do Sul, through Dr. v. Ihering. The species recently named LZ. glandulosus by Cope is identical with that previously described by Beettger as L. diptysx. Eupemphix nana. Snout very feebly prominent; interorbital space broader than the upper eyelid; tympanum scarcely visible. Fingers moderate, first not extending beyond second; toes moderate, quite free, not fringed, tips obtuse; two very small, oval, blunt metatarsal tubercles; no tarsal tubercle, no tarsal fold. When the hind limb is stretched forwards along the body the tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the tympanum or the eye. Skin smooth; no parotoids ; a flat, oval, lumbar gland, as in Paludicola Bibronit. Greyish above, with symmetrical 188 Mr. G. A. Boulenger on new Brazilian Batrachians. dark markings, viz. a Y-shaped one between the eyes and a &-shaped one on the back, and cross bands on the limbs; a deep black pink-edged ocellus on the lumbar gland; a black temporal band, and a series of black spots on the outer edge of the limbs; lower parts dirty white, throat closely marbled with brown; belly of female uniform, of male also marbled like the throat. Male with an internal subgular vocal sac and brown rugosities on the inner side of the inner finger. From snout to vent 18 millim. Two specimens (¢ ?) from Lages, Santa Catharina, col- lected by Hr. Michaélis. The genus Eupemphix, Stdr. (=Engystomops, Espada), must, on account of the absence of teeth, be referred to the family Bufonide, although it is in every other respect iden- tical with Faludicola, to which it stands in the same relation as Pseudophryne to Crinia; this shows that frog-families founded upon the presence or absence of teeth are artificial associations. I am acquainted with four species of Hupem- phizx, which may be distinguished as follows :— A. No tarsal tubercle ; a lumbar gland ; skin smooth. a. Metatarsal tubercles large, compressed, sharp- = edged: hic Meera a tao: seeing esate E. Nattereri, Stdr. b. Metatarsal tubercles small, blunt .......... E. nana, Bley. B, A conical tubercle on the middle of the inner edge of the tarsus; no lumbar gland; upper parts warty. a. Tarso-metatarsal articulation not reaching the end of the snout; tympanum hidden.. JL. pustulosa, Cope. b, Tarso-metatarsal articulation reaching be- yond the end of the snout ; tympanum more MEMIOSO“CISTINCUS Oe ats aca: viensate sce ere te E. stentor, Wispada. Hyla bivittata. Tongue subcircular, notched and free behind. Vomerine teeth in two slightly oblique transverse series between the choane, which are of moderate size. Head moderate, as long as broad ; snout rounded, as long as the diameter of the orbit ; canthus rostralis obtuse, loreal region not very oblique ; nostril nearer the end of the snout than the eye; interorbital space broader than the upper eyelid; tympanum moderately distinct, two fifths the diameter of the eye. Fingers webbed at the base; no projecting rudiment of pollex; toes two- thirds webbed ; disks a little smaller than the tympanum ; no tarsal fold. The tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the ante- rior border of the eye or the end of the snout. Skin smooth ; belly and lower surface of thighs with large granules. Mr. G. A. Boulenger on new Brazilian Batrachians. 189 Greyish above, with two parallel darker bands along the back, more distinct in the young than in the adult, widening anteriorly and sometimes uniting on the interorbital region ; upper surfaces more or less abundantly dotted with black ; a dark line on each side from the end of the snout to the shoulder, passing through the nostril and the eye and above the tympanum ; thighs and lower surfaces colourless. Male with a large external gular vocal sac. From snout to vent 23 millim. Several specimens from Lages, Santa Catharina, collected by Hr. Michaélis. In the number of the ‘ American Naturalist’ for January 1888 (p. 80) the frog recently described by me as Hyla Copir is identified with H. arenicolor, Cope. If this identification is correct, [can only say that Jam not to blame. #. arenicolor, Cope, is a mere name, proposed to replace that of affnis, Baird, preoccupied ; on referring to the latter author’s descrip- tion, I find his H. afinis ditters from my H. Copii in the following important points :— H. affinis —“ Tympanum two thirds the size of the eye. Web of hand extending only to the third joint of the second finger.” [The figure represents the fingers distinctly webbed at the base.] ‘“‘ No vermiculation on anterior and posterior faces of hind legs.” (Bazrd.) H., Copii—Tympanum hardly one third the size of the eye. Fingers without web. Hinder side of thighs mottled or vermiculated with brown. As the type specimen of /Z. affinis=arenicolor is preserved in the United States National Museum, it is to be hoped that further information may be forthcoming to settle the question. Siphonops Hardyt. Teeth small, subequal. Snout rounded, moderately promi- nent, about as long as the distance between the eyes; latter distinct, tentacle im front of and close to the eye, neither above nor below. 104 circular folds, all complete. Uniform blackish. Total length 145 millim.; greatest diameter of body 4 millim. Well distinguished from S. annulatus by the more slender body, the position of the tentacle, and the uniform coloration, the annuli not being lighter. Porto Real, province of Rio Janeiro. A single specimen was obtained by M. I. Hardy du Dréneuf. 190 Mr. C.J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera XXIV.— Descriptions of anew Genus and of some new Species of Longicorn Coleoptera of the Family Lamiide obtained by Mr. C. M. Woodford in the Solomon Islands. By Cuares J. GAHAN, M.A., Assistant in the Zoological Department of the British Museum. LEURONOTUS, n. g. Head strongly concave between the antennal tubercles, the latter prominent; front moderately narrow, equilateral. Eyes large, lower lobes reaching almost to the base of the man- dibles. Antenne about half as long again as the body ; scape cylindric, and having at its apex a narrow cicatrice, which is completely limited by a distinct carina; third joint much longer than the scape, the fourth and following (the last excepted) decreasing in length. Prothorax with an anterior and posterior transverse groove ; disk uneven, and each side armed with a sharp spine. Elytra square at the shoulders, very much elongated, with the sides parallel, flat on the disk, gradually sloping towards the sides, and then becoming vertical at the margins ; sloping also behind towards the apex, which is broadly truncate, with the exterior angles slightly produced, the sutural angles scarcely so. Legs long and of equal length; femora sublinear. Prosternum simple; mesosternum with a small conical tubercle in front. The completely margined cicatrice of the scape of its an- tenne and its other characters show that this genus belongs to the Monohammus-group. From the other genera of the group it is readily distinguished by its elongated form and the flattened appearance of its elytra above. Potemnemus and Periaptodes, which have a greater affinity with the Jono- kammus- than with the Batocera-group, in which Lacordaire placed them, also have the elytra flattened ; but, with other distinguishing characters, these genera are of broader form and have their elytra pointed at the shoulders. Leuronotus spatulatus, n. sp. L. elongatus, parallelus, niger, dense pallide cinereo-pubescens ; elytris maculis nonnullis calvis, nitidis, eeneo tinctis; antennis fusco annulatis. Long. 32-40 mm., lat. 10-12 mm. Hab. Solomon Islands. from the Solomon Islands. 191 Black, covered (except a longitudinal glabrous spot on the middle of the prothorax and a few glabrous spots on each elytron) with a pale ashy pubescence, which is of a darker shade and glossy on the legs and underside of the body. Epistoma and palpi piceous; labrum and mandibles black. Face with a few minute scattered punctures and with a median impressed line extending from the clypeus to the occiput. Anterior margin of the pronotum somewhat angularly pro- duced ; lateral tubercles of the thorax directed outwards and upwards, the two dorsal tubercles obtuse and but little raised ; between the latter is a median, glossy black, spatulate spot. The punctures on the thorax are not uniformly distributed— a few on the anterior border on each side of the middle line, a few behind each of the dorsal tubercles, and a few on the posterior part of each lateral tubercle. Elytra minutely punctured, punctures scarcely visible through the pubescence, except at the base and sides. With two or three rows of widely separated asperate punctures on each elytron ; two of these rows are along the faint ridges which bound off the median sloping area from the flattened area of the disk on the one side and from the vertical mar- ginal area on the other. There are three or four irregular glossy black spots on the disk of each, and a few small glossy granules on each near the base. Antenne with the apical third of the third joint and the apical half of each succeeding joint of a dark brown colour ; the first and second joints and the remaining parts of the ether joints pale ashy. Orsidis ampliatus, n. sp. Niger, squamosa pubescentia tectus fusca et grisea; prothorace supra fusco, dorso minute bituberculato ; scutello nigro, lateribus albis ; elytris lateribus subparallelis, apicibus truncatis ; antennis unicoloribus, scapo vix cicatricoso. Long. 28 mm., lat. 10 mm. Hab. Fauro Island, Solomon Islands. Black, covered with a scaly pubescence, which is sandy grey and fuscous on the head, thorax, and basal two thirds of the elytra and sandy grey on the apical third. Head im- punctate; eyes large, lower lobes reaching almost to the base of the mandibles. Antenne fuscous grey, unicolorous, scape smooth, cylindrical, and with only the faintest trace of a cica- trice. Thorax fuscous brown above, with three small ochre- ous spots, two of which are placed on the two small tubercles of the disk, without punctures. a 192. Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera Scutellum black in the middle, white at the sides. Elytra minutely and thickly punctured, with the sides subparallel, the basal two thirds with a mixed pubescence of brown and sandy grey, the apical third sandy grey ; apices somewhat obliquely truncate, with the outer angles slightly produced. HETEROCLYTOMORPHA, Blanch. (nec Lacord.). Heteroclytomorpha punctata, n. sp. Picea, tenuiter pubescens, capite valde punctato; antennis concolor- ibus; prothorace fortiter punctato, lateribus trituberculato ; elytris crebre punctatis, maculis nonuullis pallide ochraceis, apici- bus truncatis nec spinosis. Long. 28 mm., lat. 9 mm. Hab. Fauro Island, Solomon Islands. Pitchy, with a faint tawny pubescence, which is denser on the head and the sides of the thorax. Head strongly punc- tured, scarcely concave between the antennal tubercles. An- tenne nearly half as long again as the body. Prothorax somewhat rugose at the sides and closely and very strongly punctured, in the middle smooth and shining, transversely folded beneath ; with three small tubercles on each side, one median, one near the anterior angle, the third (smaller and more dorsally placed) between these two. (In a second specimen the anterior tubercles are less well developed.) Scutellum transverse. Elytra thickly and very strongly punctured ; with some small pale ochreous spots, of which two, more regular than the rest, are placed obliquely on each elytron a little in front of the middle, the others behind the middle; apices truncate, with the outer angles very slightly and obtusely produced. Anterior femora rugose in front and armed each with a small tooth at about three fourths of its length. The two specimens which serve as types are evidently males. Note.—A second species from the Solomon Islands agrees so well with Blanchard’s figure and description that I have little hesitation in regarding it as the guadrinotata of that author. In this species, as in the one just described, the claws of the tarsi are decidedly divergent, in each the pro- sternal process is almost contiguous with the mesosternum, and the latter is in each hollowed out in front; the lower margin of this hollow is in guadrinotata triangularly concave from the Solomon Islands. 193 in front, in punctata square or almost convex in front. It will appear from these remarks that Lacordaire’s description of the genus (Gen. Col. ix. 2, p. 475), in which he mentions “leurs crochets des tarses divariqués” and their “ saillie mésosternale lamelliforme, recourbée en arriére, déclive et obtusement tuberculeuse en avant, non contigué & la saillie prosternale,”’ is quite inapplicable, and was probably taken from his own species only. For this species (s¢mplea, Lacord., op. cit.) I propose to substitute the generic name Sormida, with characters as given by Lacordaire for the genus Heteroclytomorpha. Trigonoptera Woodfordi, n. sp. Nigra, subnitida, maculis ovalibus vel oblongis pallide griseis ornata ; prothorace lateribus vitta pallide grisea, disco quatuor maculis ; elytris ad basin sat dense punctatis, maculis numerosis pallide griseis, apicibus truncatis, angulo externo mucronato; antennis nigris. Long. 15 mm., lat. 6 mm. Hab. Fauro Island, Solomon Islands. Black, subnitid, with oval and linear spots of a pale grey colour. Head with the carine of the vertex distinct enough, and with a pale grey interrupted line in the channel between them. Clypeus, labrum, base of mandibles, cheeks, and round the eyes also pale grey. Prothorax punctured above, with a pale grey vitta on each side and four spots of the same colour on the disk; the two posterior spots are at the base, are short, and lie close together. Scutellum nearly semicir- cular, slightly grey behind. Elytra thickly enough punc- tured on the basal half, and each with about twelve very distinct pale grey spots, arranged as follows :—four at the base somewhat indistinctly united to each other; two, of which one appears nearly double, beneath the shoulder ; three oval spots at the middle, and, with the corresponding three of the other elytron, forming an irregular hexagon; then follow an elongated spot, and, at the apex, two linear spots, one near the suture and one near the margin, which unite poste- riorly. The outer angles of the apices mucronate. The legs, underside of the body, except in the middle, and basal joints of the antenne covered with a slight greyish pile. By the colour and disposition of its spots, and by the deep blackness of the parts between, this species may be distin- guished from the other species of the genus. 194 Mr. O. E. Janson on some Species of XXV.—On some Species of Cetoniide from the Loo Choo Islands. By Ouiver i. Janson, F.E.S. In the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. for March 1887 Mr. George Lewis has given a revision and list of the Cetoniide of Japan ; but at that time very little was known of the insects of the Loo Choo Islands, and no species is recorded by Mr. Lewis from this locality. Recently my friend Mr. H. Pryer visited these islands and made a small collection, and judging by the Coleoptera received from him it would appear that the insect-fauna is very closely related to that of Japan. Three species of Cetoniide have been sent to me by Mr. Pryer; of these the two species of Cetonia are apparently undescribed, they bear a marked resemblance one to the other in colour and general aspect, but are not closely allied. 1. Glycyphana forticula, Jans. Glycyphana forticula, Janson, Cist. Ent. ii. p. 608 (1881). I described this species from a single specimen received from Japan without indication of the precise locality ; but it probably came from the island of Kiuskiu. Mr. Pryer has sent a second specimen from the Loo Choo Islands which differs from the type in its rather smaller size and in the absence of the small white discal spots on the thorax and elytra and the four spots on the pygidium. 2. Cetonia Lewist, n. sp. Viridis, nitida, tibiis tarsisque eneis vel cupreis; elytris postice sparsim albo-maculatis ; clypeo elongato, lateribus elevatis, apice anguste reflexo, sinuato; thorace margine postico ante scutellum fortiter emarginato; scutello lato, apice rotundato; processu mesosterni producto valde dilatato. Long. 26-30 mm. Var. elytris immaculatis. Shining green, slightly golden, tibia and tarsi brassy or coppery, elytra im some specimens with sparse white spots behind. Head rather coarsely punctured, slightly longitu- dinally convex, the clypeus elevated at the sides, the apex narrowly reflexed and slightly emarginate. ‘Thorax very finely and sparsely punctured on the disk, the sides more coarsely punctured, slightly impressed on each side behind, Cetoniidx from the Loo Choo Islands. 195 the base produced and deeply emarginate before the scutellum, the lateral angles rounded. Scuteilum finely punctured at the base, broad and rounded at the apex. LHlytra very sparsely punctured on the disk before the middle, behind the middle and the sides with irregular rows of semicircular punctures, which become closer and more confused towards the apex. Pygidium coarsely and sparsely punctured, strongly convex towards the apex, a small deep fovea near the lateral angles. Beneath coarsely strigose at the sides, the abdomen coarsely punctured at the sides and apex ; mesosternal process large, strongly dilated, and rounded in front. Legs coarsely punctured and strigose ; femora and tibiw fringed with pale golden-brown hairs, outer apical spur of the posterior tibiz distinctly bisinuate. ‘The temale is larger than the male, more strongly punctured, with the pygidium less convex and broadly impressed on each side; the legs are stouter and the spurs of the posterior tibiz are broader and scarcely sinuate. Loo Choo Islands (4. Pryer). This fine species differs from C. Confuctusana, Thoms., in having a more elongate clypeus, with the lateral margins strongly elevated and the apex more narrowly reflexed, the thorax more deeply emarginate at the base, the scutellum broader at the apex, the pygidium with a fovea at the sides, the punctuation of the upperside more sparse, the meso- sternal process much more produced and dilated, and the spurs of the posterior tibia: distinctly bisinuate, 3. Cetonia Pryert, nu. sp. Viridi-enea, nitida, tibiis tarsisque eeneis vel cupreis ; clypeo lateri- bus valde elevatis, apice reflexo, emurginato; thorace angusto, margine postico ante scutellum leviter emarginato ; scutello apice obtuso ; processu mesosterni dilatato, antice rotundato. Long. 23-26 mm. Shining brassy green, tibie and tarsi brassy or coppery ; some specimens with minute white spots near the outer mar- gin and suture of the elytra, on the pygidium, and at the sides of the abdomen. Head coarsely punctured; clypeus convex in the centre, the sides thickened and strongly raised, the apex broadly reflexed and emarginate. Thorax much narrower than the elytra at the base, a little produced behind, and slightly emarginate before the scutellum, coarsely punc- tured at the sides, more finely punctured on the disk, the median line impunctate except at the apex, a slight impres- sion oneach side at the base. Scutellum narrowed and obtuse at the apex, a few punctures at the base. Llytra coarsely 196 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera punctured on the disk before the middle, behind the middle and at the sides with irregular semicircular punctures, which become confluent towards the apex; a rather strong, smooth, discal costa from the middle to the apical callosity ; slightly impressed at the apex of the scutellum and within the humeral prominence. Pygidium short and broad, slightly convex, with coarse confluent punctures and sparse pubescence; a large fovea on each side near the apex. Beneath very coarsely punctured at the sides; mesosternal process dilated and rounded in front. Legs punctured and sparsely pubes- cent. Loo Choo Islands (4. Pryer). Compared with C. Lewist this species has the thorax nar- rower at the base and less deeply emarginate before the scu- tellum, the scutellum much more narrowed at the apex, the pygidium less convex, and the mesosternal process much smaller; it appears to beallied to the Huropean C. angustata, Germ. All the specimens taken by Mr. Pryer are males, and there are also examples from the same locality in the collec- tions of Mr. G. Lewis and the British Museum. XXVI.—An Account of three Series of Lepidoptera collected in North-west India by Major Yerbury. By ArtTHuR G. Buren, }.L.8., 8-Z.5., &e- {Continued from p. 151. ] Papilionide. PIERIN#. 64. Colias Fieldit. Teas Ménétriés, Cat. Mus, Petrop. Lep. i. p. 79, pl. i. fig. 5 6. Thundiani, 15th August, 1886. This is considerably larger and deeper-coloured than C. edusina; the latter is, however, perhaps nothing more than the prevalent western type of the same species. 65. Colias edusina. Colias edusina, Felder, Wien. ent. Mon. iv. p. 100. n. 55 (1860). 3. Murree, 2nd August, 1885; ¢ ¢. Thundiani, 13th, 15th, 17th, and 25th August, 1886. from North-west India. 197 “© Common at Campbellpore and Murree; very common on Thundiani.”—2J. W. Y. 66. Colias sareptensis. Colas hyale, var. sareptensis, Staudinger, Cat. Lep. eur. Faun. p. 6. n, 48 (1871). go. Campbellpore, 3rd and 20th April; ?. 2nd June; Hassan Abdal, 9th May; ¢. Abbottabad, 1st October, 1886. 67. Colias erate. Colias erate, var. 2, pallida, Staudinger, Cat. Lep. eur. Faun. p. 3. n, 54 (1871). S ?. Hassan Abdal, 9th April; ¢. Campbellpore, 20th April; g¢ 2. Thundiani, 15th and 17th August; 9. Nandar, 25th September, 1886. Typical C. erate was not sent with the present series, its place being evidently almost entirely occupied by the hybrid form C. pallida. Major Yerbury says :—‘ All these pale forms of clouded yellows are common at Campbellpore, Hassan Abdal, and Murree, but uncommon on Thundiani.”’ 68. Terias fimbriata. Terias fimbriata, Wallace, Trans. Ent. Soe. ser. 3, vol. iv. p. 323, n. 16 (1867). 6. Abbottabad,. 13th October, 1886. 69. Tervas irregularis. Terias irregularis, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1882, p. 253. d. Campbellpore, 24th October, 1886. 70. Terias anemone, var. Terias anemone, Felder, Wien. ent. Monatschr, vi. p. 23. n. 7 (1862), 3 ?. Hassan Abdal, 9th May; 3g. Khairabad, 23rd May and 6th June; Abbottabad, Ist October, 1886. Slightly smaller than Japanese examples and usually rather aler; but amongst specimens recently received from Major Lebacs there is a male (taken at Khairabad on the 28th October, 1886) which is quite as large as those from Japan ; the early examples (¢. e, those taken in May and June) are all more or less worn and faded, with the exception of a single male from Major Yerbury’s private collection obtained at Hassan Abdal on the 27th June. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. 14 198 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera 71. Tertias suava. Terias suava, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 670. n. 28 (1836). &. Campbellpore, 8th May; Abbottabad, 1st October, 1886. Amongst specimens of Yerdas recently presented to the Museum is a small male of T’. st/hetana, Wallace, taken by Major Yerbury at Noor Poor Shahan, near Rawul Pindi, on the 10th April, 1887. 72. Tertas purreea. Terias purreea, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1882, p. 252. g. Akhor, 22nd April; Hassan Abdal, 9th May; ¢ ?. Khairabad, 23rd May; ¢@. 6th June; Campbellpore, 30th May and 21st October; ¢?. Thundiani, 12th September ; Hurripur, 14th October, 1886. The female obtained at Campbellpore in October was taken in coita with a typical male 1’. hecabe, another proof of the readiness with which distinct species of the Colias group of genera will pair together. Both sexes of 7. purreea can be distinguished easily from the corresponding sexes of 7. hecabe, and until some reliable lepidopterist can settle down to care- fully rear each species of Terdas from eggs which he has seen deposited upon plants strictly confined in such a way as to prevent all intrusion of other species, I shall continue to believe in the possible constancy of the various forms. As regards Mr. Pryer’s experiments in Japan, he has himself proved their untrustworthiness by recording his belief that he has reared 7’. deta (an Indian species) from eggs laid by 7’. betheseba, and, still further, that one of the pupe from the same batch of eggs produced the almost generically distinct T. hecabe, which individual of the batch he says he 1s ‘led to believe is a hybrid.” What Mr. Pryer means by expressing his faith in anything so utterly impossible I leave him to explain ; meanwhile I candidly confess my inability to rely upon his experiments. 73. Terias fraterna. ¢. Terias fraterna, Moore, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool. 1886, p. 46, pl. iv. fig. 6. @. Hassan Abdal, 14th October, 1885. It seems probable that this insect, which is intermediate between 7. purreea and 1’, hecabe, is a hybrid between the two species. 74. Terias hecabe. Papilio hecabe, Linnzeus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 249 (1764). 3. Hassan Abdal, 22nd July; g 9. Thundiani, 12th and Srom North-west India. 199 16th September; ¢. Nandar, 25th September ; Campbell- pore, 21st October, 1886. 75. Terias hecabeotdes. Tertas hecabeoides, Ménétriés, Cat. Mus. Petrop. Lep. i. p. 85, pl. ii. fig. 2 (1855). 6. Nandar, 25th September, 1886. 76. Tertas leta. Terias leta, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 674. n. 86 (1836). 9. Nandar, 25th September, 1886. 77. Gonepteryx rhamni. Papilio rhamni, Linneus, Faun. Suec. p. 272. n. 1042 (1761). 9. Campbellpore, 20th March; g. Khairabad, 11th April, 1886. From specimens since received from Major Yerbury it is evident that two males were obtained at Campbellpore on the 3rd March and three at Khairabad on the 11th April. It may readily be distinguished from the more abundant Indian form G. nipalensis by its much more uniform (yellower) colour below ; in G. nepalensis the costal border and apex of pri- maries and the whole of secondaries on the under surface are considerably whiter than in G. rhamn7; the margin of the wings is also more scalloped. 78. Gonepteryx nipalensis. Gonepteryx nipalensis, Doubleday, Gen. Diurn. Lep. p. 71. n. 9 (1847), 3. Akhor, 22nd April; Futch Khan’s bungalow, Kooteer, Chittar Pahar, 23rd April; Hassan Abdal, 9th May; 9@. Thundiani, 11th August, 1886. Of the two preceding species Major Yerbury says:— “Common round Campbellpore in the spring; also in the Chach plain on the banks of the Indus, at Murree, and Thundiani.” 79. Gonepteryx zaneka. Gonepteryx zaneka, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 493. n. 35, pl. xxxi. fig. 18. o 2. Thundiani, 13th August; g. 17th, 20th, and 21st August, 1886. “Common on Thundiani in August and September 1886.” —J, W. Y. 14* 200 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera The female of this species seems to be comparatively rare ; of a dozen examples recently brought home by Major Yer- bury in papers the whole are males. 80. Teracolus protractus. Teracolus protractus, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1876, p. 187. n. 37. @. Campbellpore, 29th June; ¢ 2. 12th July, 1886. Two males and one of the females have the third black spot of primaries expanded so as to reach the inner margin ; the under surface of the males is yellow, but that of the females varies from clear yellow to pinkish yellow, approaching flesh-pink. “Common at Campbellpore, beginning of July 1886.”— IW. There can be little doubt but that the form of this species occurring at Campbellpore will prove to be fairly constant in the slight differential characters which distinguish it from the type; it is, however, extremely doubtful whether it can be separated, inasmuch as we have a female from Kutch with the typical small black spots and deep flesh-pink secondaries on the under surface, males from the same locality being yellow below. 81. Teracolus puellaris. Teracolus puellaris, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1876, p. 156, n. 33. 9. Chittar Pahar, Lumbahdun, November 1885; ¢ 9. Campbellpore, 29th June, 17th July, 1886. In Major Yerbury’s private collection I found one or two females of Teracolus ochreipennis taken at Campbellpore on the 29th June. Major Yerbury says it was fairly common for two days, 29th and 30th, and then disappeared. 82. Teracolus purus. Teracolus purus, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1876, p. 160. n. 113, pl. vii. figs, 14, 15 (1876). g. Campbellpore, 13th, 17th, and 25th July ; 9. Hassan Abdal, 18th July, 1886. It will be seen that this species was obtained at the same time in 1886 as in 1885. Major Yerbury, in his notes, expresses a belief that 7. bimbura, farrinus, purus, and a fourth form unidentified by Mr. De Nicéville are all varieties of T. etrida. He says :— All these forms of Teracolus are common round Campbellpore. There are two broods, spring and autumn. I obtained specimens also at Hassan Abdal, Khairabad, and near Barracoo on the Murree and Pindee from North-west India. 201 road.” The dates of capture seem to me to point to an oppo- site conclusion, since 7. bimbura and T. farrinus, the two forms least alike, were collected in October and November only by Major Yerbury. I have already shown that 7. far- rinus cannot, however, be the autumnal form of 7. purus, as Col. Swinhoe obtained specimens at Kurrachee in July, whereas he caught 7’. purus in May and June. On the other hand, the range of 7. bimbura (which might otherwise be supposed to be the late brood of 7. purus) appears not to be the same as that of the latter species. 83. lxias pygmea. Ivias pygmea, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1882, p. 254, pl. xii. fig. 1. ?. Campbellpore, 21st October, 1886. “Fairly common round Campbellpore and Khairabad in October and November; very common at Kala Dilli in the Chittar Pahar in November.”—J/. W. Y. I have examined twenty-two examples recently brought home by Major Yerbury in addition to five previously re- ceived; the males vary only in size, the females only in occasionally having the oblique band on the apical area tinted with orange; practically, therefore, the common Jaas of Campbellpore and the neighbourhood, in spite of its near rela- tionship to 7. mou/meinensis of Burmah and many other fixed local types, perfectly holds its own as a constant form and therefore a species. Once begin to associate these local types and the whole genus runs together, as may be seen by arranging them as follows :—1. J. Reinwardtii, of Lombock ; 2. J., sp. ?, of Bali; 3. L. venilia, of Java; 4. L. insignis, of Formosa; 5. J. balice, of Java; 6. L. venatrix, of Moulmein ; 7. I. kausala, of Depalpur &c.; 8. L., sp.?, Himalayas ; 9. I., sp. ?, Bhotan ; 10. L., sp. ?, Elephant Island, W. Bombay ; 11. L. moulmeinensis, of Burmah ; 12. I. pygmea, of Camp- bellpore and Kangra Valley; 13. LZ. pyrene, of the N.K. Himalayas to China; 14. J., sp. ?, of Darjiling ; 15. J. sesia, of Mussowrah, Bengal; 16. /., sp.?, of Silhet to Bhotan ; 17. J., sp.?, of Darjiling to Bhotan; 18. ZL. dharmsale, of Dharmsala; 19. ., sp. ?, of N.W. Provinces and “ Afghan- istan ” (probably incorrect locality) ; 20. L. frequens, of Bar- rackpore &c. 3 21. J. cingalensis, of Ceylon; 22. L. Wattit, of Bengal; 23. LZ. undatus, of Borneo; 24. I. evippe, of Eastern India, from Darjiling to China; 25. J. latifasciatus, of Moulmein ; 26. J. anewibia, of China*; 27. 1., sp. ?, of * This species is, however, unknown to me, and may be only one of the three following, badly tigured by Cramer. 202 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera Salanga; 28. L. pallida, of Upper Tenasserim; 29. J. citrina, of Upper Tenasserim ; 30. J. andamana, of the Andamans ; 31. J., sp.?, of the Thoungyeen Valley, Tenasserim; 32. J. marianne, of the N.W. Himalayas, Bombay, Ceylon, &e. ; 33. I. meridionalis, of Poona and Bombay; 34. I. agniverna, of Poona and Bombay ; 35. I. depalpura, of Depalpur, Kc. Probably no collections but our own and Mr. Moore’s are sufficiently rich in the various closely-allied types of Latas to show the perfect gradation which exists in the above series, and, consequently, to many lepidopterists the differences upon which some of them are separated must appear to be trivial in the extreme ; nevertheless, I am convinced, after examining the numerous collections which have come to hand during the last twenty-three years, that most of the above are strictly constant to locality, and that only such species as have a wide geographical range (as J. evdppe) show any tendency to vart- ability (7. e. individual inconstancy), and even then that there is never any difficulty in deciding to which Jadas the aberrant specimen belongs. Tn a case like the foregoing, and it is not a solitary one by any means amongst the Lepidoptera, only two courses are open to the systematist: hé must either say that the genus consists of one species exhibiting local modifications, the degrees of which are trivial, but the sum of which, comparing the first and last, is prodigious, or he must separate all the forms as species, no matter whether their modification has been due to isolation on islands, by mountain ranges, by rivers, or limitation of food-plant. 84. Catopsilia jugurthina. Colias jugurthina, Godart, Ene. Méth. ix. p. 96. n. 21 (1819). 6. Hassan Abdal, 27th June ; Chuttar, between Tret and Barracoo, Murree road, 9th October; 9. Hurripur, 14th October, 1886. This is one of the forms of the C. crocale group, of which at present we know too little to be certain whether it is con- stant or otherwise ; it is certainly the commonest of the Indian forms, and its range is enormous, extending along the base of the Himalayas and down the east of India to the Malayan Islands, certainly as far as Waigiou, with scarcely any altera- tion of pattern. The locality of C. crocale is said to be ‘‘ Kast Indies ;” in the Museum collection we have it (I speak of the typical form) from Ceylon and Malacca only. In my opinion it is highly probable that the latter is an aberrant development of the same species, tending to resemble the from North-west India. 203 Celebesian C. flava; for both C. jugurthina and C. crocale, together with a third yellower form, occur in Ceylon. When I wrote my monograph of the genus there was no difficulty ; all the forms of the C. crocale type were associated as one variable species, and C. caédlla stood next as a well- marked second species. Since then intermediate forms, appa- rently constant, have turned up between C. crocale and C. catilla, whilst collections have come to hand containing only one or two of the supposed “ varieties ’’ in considerable num- bers, showing that in certain localities these types are either constant or prevalent; thus assurance has turned to uncer- tainty, and it has become necessary to specify the form received when giving an account of a collection—another evi- dence of the truism “ the more we know the less we know.” 85. Catopsilia gnoma. Papilio gnoma, Fabricius, Syst. Ent., App. p. 808 (1775). ?. Campbellpore, 1st August, 1886. ‘‘ A few at Campbellpore, 22nd and 24th July, 1886.”— JW. Y. 86. Catopsilia minna. Papilio minna, Herbst, Naturs. Schmett. v. pl. Ixxxix. figs, 1, 2 (1792), 3 ?. Campbellpore, 12th July; g. 14th and 16th July, 1886. C. pyranthe, with which this was identified, was formerly associated with it; that insect is, however, a narrower bor- dered species, with slighter markings also on the female primaries: both forms appear to be constant. 87. Belenots auriginea. Belenois auriginea, Butler, Proe. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 374, n. 74. ?. Campbellpore, 16th May, 1886. “Common round Campbellpore in the spring.”—J. W. Y. According to De Nicéville this is the spring brood of B. lordaca (identified by him as B. mesentina) ; that this is incorrect is evident from the fact that Col. Swinhoe took the supposed autumn brood at Quetta in March and May, and that its African representative, which I regard as the same species, was taken in Somali-land in January and at Haithal- kim in April; we also have one male taken by Major Yerbury at Campbellpore in June. It is an interesting fact that the bulk of the supposed seasonal forms are incapable of being tested by dates, that “dry- and wet-season forms”? so called are always coming to hand with the same date ot capture on 204 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera their envelopes ; but what is most singular is that the publi- cation of facts to this effect does not hinder the repetition of these errors in the writings of those who first promulgated them. Turning to Major Yerbury’s private collection, the first specimen I took up was a dark male (B. auriginea) which should have been taken in the spring ; but on looking at the label I found it marked “ Rawul Pindee, 21st November.” I next turned up a pale female (B. lordaca), and found it labelled “ Campbellpore, 21st May, 85.” This remarkable evidence led me to examine seven other specimens recently brought home by Major Yerbury, with the following result :— Supposed Spring Brood. Supposed Autumn Brood. do. Rawul Pindee, 25th November. . Thundiani, 5th May. hs » Oth December. do. Campbellpore, 31st October. ¢o & Q. Rawul Pindee, 25th No- vember. 88. Synchloe daplidice. Papilio daplidice, Linneeus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 760. n. 77 (1767). ?. Hassan Abdal, 9th May, 1886. “Common in the neighbourhood of Campbellpore in May and June, and at Hassan Abdal in May.”—J. W. Y. Amongst the Lepidoptera brought home this year are ten examples of Pontia soracta taken by Major Yerbury at Thun- diani on the 3rd, 4th, and 5th of May and at Kala Pani on the 6th. 89. Ganoris ajaca. Pieris ajaca, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 490. n. 21, pl. xxxi. fig. 16. $ ¢. Thundiani, 11th, 13th, and i4th August, 1886. ‘Common at Murree and Thundiani in August.”—dJ. Wi We 90. Ganorts gliciria. Papilio gliciria, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. pl. clxxi. figs. E, F (1779). ¢. Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, 4th April; 9 9. Hassan Abdal, 9th May; 9. Thundiani, 14th August, 1886. 91. Ganoris nipalensis. Pieris brassice, var, nipalensis, Gray, Lep. Ins. Nepal, pl. vi. figs. 1 and 3 (1846). @. Thundiani, 20th September, 1886. Jrom North-west India. 205 92. Huchloe lucilla. eee lucilla, Butler, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 376. n. 80, pl. xxxv. g. 4. Campbellpore, 18th and 27th March, Ist, 7th, 13th, and 14th April; Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, 4th April ; Akhor, 22nd April, 1886. Now that I have a long series of this species before me (that is to say thirteen in the present consignment, fourteen recently brought home, and nine in Major Yerbury’s private collection), [am better able to point out the constant differ- ences between it and the Algerian Z. charlonia. It is inva- riably smaller, with comparatively shorter costal margin to primaries ; the colour of the males is aslightly deeper yellow, frequently gamboge-yellow—the females being pale brimstone, only slightly yellower than some males of H. penta of Turkes- tan; the black spot at the end of the cell is larger and never replaced by a black lunule on the under surface; the outer border of primaries is never triangular, as in £. charlonia, but always forms a distinct angle internally on the lower radial vein; on the under surface the white-spotted rose-coloured margin to the primaries is far brighter and clearer, and the apical area of primaries and whole surface of secondaries are frequently, though not invariably in the female, paler and less black-speckled, or even yellow, faintly speckled with olive. Papririonine. 93. Papilio erithonius. Papilio erithonius, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. eexxxii. figs. A, B (1872). Campbellpore, 20th April, 1886. “Common at Campbellpore in October and November, 1885.”—J. W. Y. 94. Papilio asiaticus. Papilio machaon, vay. asiatica, Ménétriés, Cat. Mus. Petrop. Lep. i. p.70 (1855), Futch Khan’s bungalow, Kooteer, 26th April; Thundiani, 12th August, 1886. 95. Papilio arcturus. Papilio arcturus, Westwood, Ann, Nat. Hist. ix. p. 37 (1842). Thundiani, 17th August, 1886. “ Common at Murree and Thundiani in August 1885 and 1886."—J. W. Y. 206 Mr. A. G. Butler on Lepidoptera Nevertheless Major Yerbury has only brought home one perfect and three or four mutilated examples ; probably he was too generous to entomologists in India to leave many of so attractive a butterfly to add to our series*. In England P. arcturus is generally accounted rather a rare species. 96. Papilio polyctor. Papilio polyctor, Boisduyal, Sp. Gén. Lép. 1. p. 205. n. 18 (1886). Kala Pani, Ist September, 1886. “ Taken at Murree and Thundiani. In my opinion P. are- turus frequents the upper part of the hill, P. polyctor the lower slopes; one of these species, probably the latter, very common on the stream near the Dhobis ghat, Abbottabad.”—J. W. Y. In Major Yerbury’s boxes I found one example of Papilio cloanthus taken at Murree on the 30th August, 1885; P. philoxenus, taken at Murree on the 5th August. Among the unset things I found P. dissimilis, from Noor Poor Shahan, Rawul Pindee, on the 10th April; P. govindra, taken on Thundiani, 4th May; and P. pammon, at Hurripur, on the 14th October, 1886. Hesperiidae. 97. Hesperia ladon. Papilio ladon, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. celxxxiv. G (1782). Thundiani, 23rd September, 1885. Only one example was obtained; it was identified as “ Badamia exclamationis,’ a nearly allied but apparently distinct butterfly, which will probably be stated to be a seasonal form of it. 98. Hesperia alexis. Papilio alexis, Fabricius, Syst. Ent. p. 588. n. 887 (1775). 3. Tret, 9th October, 1885. 99. Parnara mangala. Hesperia mangala, Moore, Proce. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 792. Murree, 10th September, 1885; Thundiani, 17th and 20th August and 20th and 30th September, 1886. This species has been identified for Major Yerbury as Par- nara bada, from which it may easily be distinguished by its superior size, darker coloration, larger hyaline spots, particu- * See, however, the note to P. polyctor, which leaves it doubtful which is the common species. Jrom North-west India. 207 larly the lowest spot on the primaries, and the more regular arrangement of the spots on the secondaries. I have already pointed out most of these differences, but the name dada seems to be still employed for P. mangala in India. 100. Chapra mathias. Hesperia mathias, Fabricius, Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 483 (1798). 2. Road between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 9th August ; Kala Pani, 20th August; Dhum tower, near Abbottabad, 30th September; ¢. Hurripur, 14th October, 1886, One of the females enumerated above was labelled as Par- nara bada, the other two as “Parnara karsana;”’ the male was also identified with the latter in spite of the very distinct oblique brand on the primaries, the dark olive coloration, and more numerous hyaline spots. 101. Gegenes nostrodamus. Hesperia nostrodamus, Fabricius, Ent. Syst. ili. 1, p. 3828. n, 246 (1798). ¢- Kala Pani, 30th August; Hurripur, 14th October, 1886. 102. Gegenes karsana. Hesperia karsana, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1874, p. 576, pl. Ixvii. fig. 6. ¢. Futch Khan’s bungalow, Kooteer, Chittar Pahar, about 2000 feet, 23rd April, 1886. 103. Pyrgus marrubii. Hesperia malvarum, var. marrubti, Herrich-Schaffer, Schmett. Eur. i. Hesp. figs. 14, 15 (1845). Thundiani, 15th and 25th August, 1886. Identified wrongly as P. dravira, and said by Major Yer- bury to have been “ fairly common on Thundiani, beginning of August 1886.” 104. Pyrgus zebra, sp. n. Nearest to P. sataspes of South Africa; above black-brown ; a spot in the cell, a smaller spot obliquely below it; a sub- triangular spot across the end of the cell, two smaller spots obliquely below it, and a dot outside, forming a triangle with the discocellular and second spot; three small spots placed transversely between the subcostal branches halfway between the cell and apex ; acurved series of five or six crescentic dots near to outer margin, a marginal series of dots at base of fringe, and a series of larger spots on the fringe white : secon- 208 On Lepidoptera from North-west India. daries with a subtrigonate spot at the end of the cell, a smaller oblong spot between the latter and the abdominal margin on the first median interspace, four or five dots near outer mar- gin, a marginal series of spots, and the fringe white; palpi, edges of collar, and tegule greyish. Costal border of pri- maries below white; five black marginal dashes from the middle, the Jast dash being short and apical ; a whitish patch at base of cell, a second at about centre of interno-median area, and a third at apex; the ordinary white spots larger than above; the fringe whitish, barred with blackish : secon- daries greyish brown; the base, an abbreviated, narrow, slightly zigzag, subbasal band, a broad, nearly regular band from costa to anal angle, and a narrow, slightly interrupted stripe from apex to anal fourth of outer margin white; apical three fourths of outer border grey ; abdominal border white ; fringe dull white, traversed by a greyish stripe: palpi, excepting the tips, basal half of antennz: below, pectus, and legs white ; venter white, the sides blackish, with white edges to the segments. Expanse of wings 26 millim. @. Campbellpore, 13th April; ¢. Futch Khan’s bunga- low, Kooteer, Chittar Pahar, 2000 to 8000 feet, 23rd April, 1886. The under surface of this very distinct species is quite unlike any other Indian Pyrgus, the secondaries being alternately regularly banded with brown and white; several of the speci- mens were labelled as “P. evanidus,” but they are utterly distinct from that species, the hind wings of which on the under surface are olive-greenish, spotted and blotched with white. Four examples were sent to us in 1886, and in the unset series brought home by MajorYerbury I found eight more (all taken on the 23rd April). In the notes on the various species I find P. zebra again recorded as “P. evanidus, com- mon at Campbellpore, May and June; very common on the Chittar Pahar, end of April, 1886.” 105. Taractrocera sagara. Pamphila sagara, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1865, p. 792. Hassan Abdal, 22nd July, 1886. ‘Fairly common at Hassan Abdal, 18th July, 1886; a single specimen taken below Kala Pam, en route to Abbotta- bad, on the 80th August, 1886.”—J. W. Y. 106. Antigonus Taylort. ‘This name has been given by Mr. De Nicéville to a butter- fly received by him from the Neilgherries ; it is allied to A. On new Butterflies from the Solomon Islands. 209 vasava and A. potiphera, is of the size, shape, and has the front-wing hyaline spots of the latter, but the secondaries are without hyaline spots, and the ground-colour is of a pale cupreous or sericeous clay-colour ; the spots of the primaries are black-edged and partly connected by three or four dusky, lunulated, macular stripes, which, however, are better defined on the secondaries; the body is rather dusky in colouring ; below the wings are paler, the basal area of primaries and abdominal border of secondaries being whitish and the stripes on the latter wings represented by well-defined blackish spots or dashes. Expanse of wings 35 millim. Futch Khan’s bungalow, Kooteer, Chittar Pahar, probably 3000 feet, 24th April, 1886. Labelled “ Hesperta, sp., new.” As specimens from the Neilgherries stand in Mr. Moore’s collection labelled ‘A. Taylori, De N.,” I presume that the species has been described ; but after looking through the ‘Zoological Records’ for the last five or six years and the ‘ Journal of the Asiatic Society ’ for 1886 I have failed to find it ; perhaps it has been referred to another genus, and therefore I have overlooked it, or possibly it is a MS. name. Three more or less worn examples were sent home by Major Yerbury, and in the series brought home were two others from the same locality and two taken at Noor Poor Shahan, near Rawul Pindee, on the 10th April. 107. Plesioneura leucocera. Hesperia leucocera, Kollar, in Hiigel’s Kaschmir, iv. 2, p. 454, pl. xviii. fies, 3, 4 (1848). Kala Pani, 29th August, 1886. An account of the moths of these collections will be given in a subsequent paper. XXVII.—New Species of Butterflies collected by Mr. C. M. Woodford in the Solomon Islands. By F¥. D. GopMAN and O. SALVIN. Since the descriptions published in the last number of the ‘Annals’ (anted, pp. 90-101) were prepared Mr. Woodford has returned to England, bringing with him another large collection of butterflies chiefly collected on the island of 210 Messrs. F. D. Godman and O. Salvin on new Guadalcanar. Many of those previously obtained are con- tained in this collection; but we find the following species require names. Danais garamantis, sp. n. ¢. Alis anticis elongatis, margine externo leviter concavo, posti- carum margine externo fere angulato, dimidio angulo anali proximo fere recto. Alis fuliginoso-nigris; anticis plaga magna discali venis quinque-partita (una parte in cellula inclusa), plaga altera tripartita subapicali, maculis tribus costalibus et sex sub- marginalibus semihyalinis; posticis plaga mediana venis bene sexpartita et maculis quinque submarginalibus semihyalinis : sub- tus fere ut supra, posticis macula basali, altera ad medium cost et serie duplici submarginali albis. Exp. 3°5 poll. Angl. @ mari similis, anticis magis abbreviatis et posticarum margine externo magis rotundato vix angulato. Hab. Aola, Guadalcanar Island (C. M. Woodford). A distinct species apparently allied to D. Schenki, a com- mon insect throughout the Solomon Islands. Like D. Schenki the secondaries are without a sexual brand; but in D. gara- mantis the hyaline spots are of less extent and have no yellow tint whatever. Mr. Woodford’s collection contains a few specimens of both sexes, all taken on Guadalcanar, Acrea pollonia, sp. n. A. moluccane affinis, sed alis anticis fere unicoloribus medialiter haud semihyalinis ; posticis plaga pallide sulphurea fascia fusca bipar- tita, parte costali quoque venis quadripartita: subtus maculis anticarum submarginalibus vix obyiis, margine externo posticarum multo angustiore facile distinguenda. Exp, 3°75, Hab. Aola, Guadalcanar Island (C. M. Woodford). A modified but distinct form of A. moluccana of Ceram and Amboina. Charaxes epigenes, sp. n. ¢. Alis nigro-brunneis ; anticis maculis quinque parvis ultra cellu- lam et septem submarginalibus flavidis notatis ; posticis unicolo- ribus, lunulis septem submarginalibus ceruleis exceptis: subtus alis rufo-brunneis, parte apicali et margine externo — pallidiore fuscis, maculis paginee superioris albis et iis ultra cellulam intror- sum nigro marginatis, linea nigra ad cellule finem lineolis duabus trans cellulam albis exteriore extrorsum interiore introrsum nigro marginatis ; posticis lineis duabus albis transvittatis, una per Butterflies from the Solomon Islands. 211 cellulam nigro extrorsum limbata, altera ultra eam introrsum nigro marginata, maculis sex saturate rufis discalibus introrsum lunulis lilacinis cinctis et omnino nigro circumdatis, maculis submar- ginalibus albido introrsum limbatis notatis, yena mediana et ramo suo primo elongatis. Exp. 3°35. mari similis quoad maculas alarum pagine superioris, sed fascia communi lata a ramo mediano secundo anticarum usque ad mar- ginem posticarum internum ducta lactescenti-alba, in his sordide cyaneo vix tincta: subtus alis multo pallidioribus, maculis omni- bus majoribus et magis distinctis. Hab. Aola, Guadalcanar Island (C. Mf. Woodford). Mr. Woodford’s collection contains a male and several females of this distinct species, which has no near ally that we know of. Mynes hercyna, sp. n. M. Woodfordi forsan proxima, sed anticis ad basin multo magis nigricantibus differt, cellula, macula triangulari ultra eam et tribus ovalibus inter ramos medianos tantum lactescenti-albis, area infra cellulam usque ad marginem internum omnino nigri- cante, maculis indistinctis subapicalibus ejusdem coloris. alis omnino nigricantibus, maculis omnibus maris minoribus et valde indistinctis. Hab. Aola, Guadalcanar Island (C. M. Woodford). Several specimens, all agreeing with one another and differing in the points mentioned from M. Woodfordi of Alu Island in Bougainville Straits. Libythea orientalis, sp. n. L. batchiane quoad formam alarum posticarum, angulo anali haud producto; anticis fere unicoloribus lilacino-ceruleis, costa et mar- gine externo anguste et venis angustissime fuscis distinguenda. Hab. Aola, Guadaleanar Island (C. M. Woodford). A species of the L. Geoffroyt section of the genus, and doubtless closely allied to L. batchiana, L. antipoda, &c. The rounded anal angle of the secondaries distinguishes it from the latter insect. Papilio isander, sp. n. Alis nigris ; anticis fascia arcuata ab apice ad marginem internum extensa cyanea, parte distali maculosa, parte proxima integra, macula costali ad apicem ejusdem coloris aliisque lunulatis sub- marginalibus ; posticis fascia anticarum producta fere ad mar- 212 Messrs. F. D. Godman and O. Salvin on new ginem internum, parte costali albida, lunulis submarginalibus sex cyaneis notatis: subtus fere ut supra, sed alis pallidioribus fasciis et maculis glaucescentibus; posticis linea abbreviata ad basin aliisque discalibus utrinque nigro late marginatis coccineis. Exp. 3°8. © mari similis, sed paulo major. Hab. Aola, Guadaleanar Island (C. Mf. Woodford). An ally of P. sarpedon as to the colour of its wing-markings, but instead of having a single blue band on the primaries broken into spots in a regular curve towards the apex, the spot below the subcostal nervure is slightly out of line, and above it is another spot close to the costa; moreover there is a series of lunate spots parallel to the outer margin, as in P. eurypylus. P. sarpedon, in various modified forms, occurs over a large area, including India, Borneo &c., the Moluccas, and New Guinea, and under the name of P. choredon occurs in Australia and New Ireland. It is therefore of considerable interest to find so distinct a form in the Solomon Islands. Papilio Mendana, sp. n. Alis anticis productis, fere falcatis, margine externo leviter concayo ; posticis caudatis, vena mediana producta et lobum ferente: nigerri- mis, fascia mediana longitudinali macularum decem composita cyanea, ea marginem internum attingente maxima, macula altera costali ad apicem aliisque sex submarginalibus ejusdem coloris; posticis maculis tribus elongatis quoque cyaneis, una fere totam cellulam occupante, maculis parvis tribus supra eam albi- dis margine interno quoque albo: subtus brunneo-nigris ; anticis maculis ut supra notatis, costa ad basin coccinea; posticis nigro nebulosis, macula infra venam costalem, altera ad angulum analem coccineis. Exp. 4:3. mari similis, sed major et maculis ad posticarum basin omnino albis distinguenda. Hab. Aola, Guadalcanar Island (C. M. Woodford). A very interesting species, of which Mr. Woodford only secured a very few specimens. Its alliances are, so far as the coloration of the wings is concerned, with P. sarpedon, but in the shape of the secondaries it agrees better with P. codrus andits allies. It forms in fact a connecting-link between these two groups. It seems right that’ so fine a species should bear the name of Mendana, the discoverer of the Solomon Islands, the details of whose adventurous journey have been recently published by Mr. Guppy in his ‘ Solomon Islands and their Natives.’ Butterflies from the Solomon Islands. 213 Papilio solon, sp. n. P. codro affinis, sed colore alarum paginse superioris Magis saturato serieco-viridi, maculis anticarum Jete cyaneo-viridibus ; posticis ad basin albidis, p yarte distali nigro-viridi latiore et margine suo interiore magis dined: subtus multo obscurioribus, anticis fasciis indistinctis transversis apud costam notatis, Exp. 6:0. © mari similis, sed major, colore sericeo alarum absente. Hab. Aola, Guadaleanar Island (C. M. Woodford). In the dark colouring of the underside this species resembles P. pisidice from Maleita Island, recently described by us (antec, p. 100) ; but the colouring of the band of spots on the primaries 1s 80 different that we have no doubt as to its dis- tinctness. Mr. Woodford’s collection contains a number of specimens all agreeing with one another and differing from the type of P. pisidice. In the latter these spots are golden and not bluish green, as in P. solon. We have little doubt that the specimen from Alu Island referred to in our former description will have to be referred to another species of this group, as it differs considerably from both P. pisidice and P. solon; but with only a female example before us we prefer to await the arrival of more specimens before describing it. Papilio hecateus, sp. n. ¢. Alis nigris; anticis fascia discali maculis octo composita a costa margine externo subparallela ad angulum analem extensa lactes- centi-alba, maculis duabus vena medianw utrinque _ positis minimis et a margine magis distantibus; posticis parte costali cum fascia discali conjuncta usque ad marginem internum extensa lactescenti-alba, margine hujus fascize ex ter no aliquot profunde den- tato, ciliis inter venas albis : subtus nigris ; anticis maculis quatuor transversis ad apicem albidis ; posticis fascia indistincta discali atomis cxruleis composita, maculis submarginalibus rotundis rubro-aurantiis, ea ad angulum apicalem minima deinde ad angu- lum analem increscentibus. Exp. 6:1. 9. Alis fusco-nigricantibus ; anticis plaga cellulari maculisque sep- tem discalibus sordide flavidis, tribus intra ramos medianos maxi- mis ea supra venam medianam minima; posticis plaga magna me- diana albida venis septem-partita, parte maxima dimidium cellule distalem occupante, maculis septem submarginalibus ochraceis, ciliis inter venas quoque ochraceis: subtus ut supra, maculis om- nibus majoribus, posticis atomis variis cxeruleis infra plagam medi- anam. Exp. 6-1. Hab. Aola, Guadaleanar Island (C. M@. Woodford). Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. 15 214 Rev. T. Hincks on the Many specimens. This species is evidently allied to P. Bridgit, Math. (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1886, p. 349, pl. xxxiv. fig. 2), from Treasury Island and the islands of Bougainville Straits, whence we have many specimens. The male differs in having the band of submarginal spots on the primaries more broken, and there are four subapical spots on the underside hardly seen in the allied form. The female differs obviously by having the discal series of spots much more irregular, whereas in the female of P. Bridgii they are-regular inter- venal streaks. On the secondaries the submarginal row of spots are rounder, less lunate, and further from the margin. We have a damaged female of this or an allied species from Florida Island; but without male examples we hesitate to decide as to its position. Papilio laarch us, Sp. N. 5 @. Alis fuliginoso-nigris; anticis fascia obliqua ultra cellulam flavida venis quadripartita; posticis fascia lata transversa cellule finem transducta lactescenti-albida, margine suo interno fere recto externo profunde serrato: subtus anticis ut supra ; posticis lunu- lis rufo-aurantiis submarginalibus notatis, atomis paucis ceruleis inter ramos medianos. Exp. 6:0. do adhuc ignotus. Hab. Rubiana Island (C. M. Woodford). Though we have only a single damaged female specimen before us we can recognize its distinctness from that sex of P. Woodfordi of the islands of Bougainville Straits. The marks on the primaries are restricted to an oblique short band beyond the cell, and there are no submarginal spots or any near the anal angle. The band across the secondaries is much wider. XXVIII.—The Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence: a Study of Arctic Forms. - By the Rev. THomas Hincks, B.A., F.R.S. [Plates XIV. & XV.] THE material on which’ the present Report is founded has been entrusted to me by Sir J. W. Dawson, F.R.S., of McGill College, Montreal, Mr. J. F. Whiteaves, of the Canadian Geological Survey, and the authorities of the Mon- Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence. 215 treal Museum, who have placed in my hands for examination their collection of the Hydroida and Polyzoa of the St. Law- rence. Circumstances have hitherto prevented me from making much progress with the work, and I have to apolo- gize for a delay which I did not anticipate and much regret. As it would only lead to further delay to defer publication until the whole of the material has been examined, I propose to commence at once with studies of new forms as they occur, and such as from any cause seem to require further illus- tration, reserving the complete systematic list of species and general conclusions for the close of the Report. Subclass CHEILOSTOMATA. Family Bicellariide. CORYNOPORELLA, n. gen. Generic character. Stems slender, consisting of cells dis- posed in single series and faving one way, dichotomously *° branched ; zocecia more or less clavate, each cell originating from the dorsal surface of the one beneath it, immediately below the summit, elongate, the inferior portion (from a little below the aperture) much attenuated, tubular; aperture at the top of the cell, occupying a small proportion of its length. Avicularia articulated, attached to the side of the aperture. Corynoporella tenuis, n. sp. (Pl. XV. figs. 1.) Zoarium minute, transparent ; stems slender, bifurcating at intervals. Zoecia subclavate, much elongated, slightly ex- panded towards the upper extremity which is rounded, the inferior portion very slender; aperture extending down rather less than a third of the length of the cell, occupying its entire width above, and tapering off to a rounded point below, margin thin and destitute of spines, upper wall wholly membranous ; orifice arched above, straight below ; on the margin at one side less than halfway down the cell a rather large articulated avicularium, the dorsal surface sloping abruptly upwards from the peduncle (which is short) and very protuberant, the top flattish, terminating in a long beak-like extremity, not abruptly bent; surface smooth, the whole structure (viewed laterally) somewhat wedge-shaped. Fibrils given off from the dorsal surface of the cell, a little below the summit towards one side. Oacium (?). Hab. Forming small tufts attached to other Polyzoa. 15* 216 Rev. T. Hincks on the The cells of this species bear a strong general resemblance to those of the genus Brettia, but the articulated avicularium is a link connecting it with Bugula. Its place, I think, is in the Bicellarian series. At the same time it possesses cha- racters which probably entitle it to generic rank. ‘Too much importance must not be attached to the uniserial habit; but the small aperture, so unlike that of the true Bugule, and the tubular prolongation of the cell below are structural features of considerable moment. In the form and position of the avicularia this species agrees with Bugula. The genus Bugu- lella, instituted by Verrill for a species which he obtained on the coast of North America, seems, so far as we can judge in the absence of a figure and specimens, to be founded on a different type. Family Cellulariida. CELLULARIA, Pallas. Cellularia Peachit, Busk. (Pl. XV. fig. 6.) I have figured this well-known species from a St.-Lawrence specimen to show the cusp on the median cell at the bifurca- tion of the branches, which it shares with the Australian C. cuspidata of Busk. It is true that it is frequently absent (in both species I believe), but there is no doubt that it occurs in the North-European as well as the Australian species, and is not hy any means a distinctive character * Family Cribrilinide, Hincks. MEMBRANIPORELLA, Smitt (part.). Membraniporella crasstcosta, n. sp. (Pl. XIV. figs. 5.) Zoecia ovate, disposed (rather irregularly) in lines ; front wall composed of a few (about six or seven) broad, flat, and rather massive ribs, usually more or less separated by con- siderable interspaces ; no distinct sternum ; orifice (secondary) suborbicular, enclosed by two stout rib-like processes which unite in front; oral spines wanting. Avicularia none. Occium (?). Hab. Spreads in reddish-brown patches over various kinds of Polyzoa (Escharoides Sarswt &e.). The species to which the present form makes the nearest ® See Busk’s ‘Challenger’ Report, part 1, p. 17, Mr, Busk suggests the propriety of recurring to his original name, Cellularia monotrypa, in place of C. cusprdata, if the presence of the cuspidate point should prove to be also a character of C. Peachi. Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence. 217 approach is Flustra Aragot of Audouin; but apart from other differences the latter is at once distinguishable by the peculiar structure of the oral extremity of the cell and the remark- able lobed appendage on each side of the orifice. It is difficult to meet with a perfectly formed cell of M. crasstcosta. Amongst the St.-Lawrence dredgings it is far from uncommon, and I have had the opportunity of examining a good many specimens; but scarcely a cell has occurred in which the full complement of ribs was present. In a large proportion of cases only the oral ring and the first pair of the rib-like pro- cesses are developed, so that the colony presents a most un- finished appearance. ‘The ribs are flat and massive and expanded at the base; their points meet in the centre and unite without much regularity, and there is consequently no straight median line of junction, as in the British AZ. nitida. In the early stages of development the cell is destitute of all covering but the membranous front wall, and is furnished with a plain thickened margin, on which no trace of the rib- like spines is yet visible. ‘The first to appear are the two oral appendages, which originate on each side just below the top, and as they increase in length bend round towards the front and meet in the centre, forming the oral margin, on each side of which there commonly rises a mucronate projec- tion. The first pair of ribs are developed immediately below the margin, to which they are generally closely united throughout a large portion of their length. A second pair originate lower down on each side, and pass diagonally towards the centre, where they unite with the others; and usually one or two ribs more pass upward from the lower margin towards the same point. This is the general plan, but there are many irregularities, ‘The ribs are for the most part separated by rather large lacunee, so that in this case the protective covering is an open framework and not a solid wall. The reddish-brown colour of the crust seems to be a constant character in fresh specimens. Other species of this genus are JZ. nitida and M. melolontha (Brit.), M. distans (Austr.), WM. sceletos (Madeira), Mf. Agas- sizvt (Florida), Mf. Aragot (? Medit. or Red Sea). Family Membraniporide. Memepranipora, De Blainville. Membranipora cymbiformis, Hincks. (Pl. XV. figs. 4) Membranipora spinifera, Smitt, Krit. Forteckn. ofver Skandin. Hafs- Bryoz. pt. 3, pl. xx. fig. 32. This form was first noticed by Smitt, but he referred it to 218 Rey. T. Hincks on the M. spinifera, from which it differs in many important parti- culars. Omitting the differences in the number and character of the spines and the disposition of the zocecia (though these are sufficiently distinctive) the structure of the cell itself is quite dissimilar in the two forms. In the present species the zocecium is short, massive, enclosed by comparatively high walls, and furnished with a solid calcareous floor (Pl. XV. fig. 4a). The lower portion of the aperture is covered in by a calcareous lamina*. In these points it presents a contrast to that of MZ. spinifera. Another striking feature of M. cym- biformis is the tall pedicellate avicularium. ‘There are com- monly two of these appendages on a cell placed one on each side. At the top of the cell there are usually three tall spines. This form was described as long ago as 1877 7, but no figure accompanied the description. It seemed desirable to supply one, as Smitt’s figure, though strictly accurate as far as it goes, is on too small a scale and does not show some of the important characters. M. cymbiformis seems to be abundant in the northern seas. In the St. Lawrence it occurs in small patches incrusting Hydroids and Polyzoa. Range. Northern and Arctic seas (18-60 fath.). [Kara Sea, on Sertularia and Algee (Levinsen); Jan Mayen, on Alcyonidium and Pycnogonide (Lorenz).| Family Escharide (part.), Smitt. ESCHAROIDES, Smitt (= Hscharopsis, Verrill t). Escharotdes § Sarsti, Smitt. (Pl. XIV. figs. 1.) Cellepora cervicornis, var., Sars, Reise Lofoten og Finmark. p. 28 (sep.). Eschara rosacea, Sars, Beskr. N. Polyzoa, 1862, p. 3 (sep.). Eschara Sarsti, Busk, Linn. Soe. Journ., Zool. xv. Escharopsis lobata (Lamx.), Verrill, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. This interesting form has been investigated by M. Sars * This character was correctly given by Prof. Smitt, but escaped my notice, and was not included in my description. + “‘Polyzoa from Greenland and Labrador,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. for January 1877. The species credited in this paper (through a mistake) to Iceland were really obtained in Davis Straits. t Bull. Nat. Mus. U.S. no. 15, p. 149 (1879). There seems to be hardly sufficient reason for superseding the name adopted by Smitt for this group from Milne-Edwards, anéwhich has found its way into general use. It has been employed by Busk in his ‘ Challenger’ Report. § Smitt, in one of his later papers (“‘ Bryoz. of Novaja Semlja,” 1878), has referred this species to his genus Dvscopora, a group which is com- Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence. 219 and Smitt, and it might almost seem superfluous to discuss it further. But Sars’s account is unaccompanied by figures, and is so far unsatisfactory. Smitt has supplied this defi- ciency, and would have left little to be desired if his figures had been drawn on a larger scale. The difficulties of the Swedish language may probably prove a more serious obstacle to the student, and it may not therefore be useless to give a brief account of the development of the zocecium. It would be a waste of time to consider whether Lam- ouroux’s Eschara lobata (‘ Exposition Méthodique’) was founded on the present form. It may have been; but neither his description nor his figure affords the means of settling the question with certainty. It is only an adequate diagno- sis or figure that gives to any name a claim to adoption, and it must be accounted an injury to science to burden its records with merely speculative identifications. Prof. Verrill refers Lepralia producta of Packard to this species; but unless he had the opportunity of examining an authenticated specimen he would find it difticult, I think, to prove his point. Packard’s description, even when supple- mented by his figure, is quite inadequate. The changes which the zocecium passes through in this species are very striking, and show in a very forcible way the necessity of a caretul study of the Polyzoan colony through all the phases of its growth. The young marginal cell presents a smooth or slightly wrinkled surface, perforated round the edge. The orifice is suborbicular, perfectly simple, and not ele- vated above the cell-wall (Pl. XIV. fg. 1a). In this stage the cells are convex and the sutures well defined. The first change consists in a slight sinuation of the lower margin of the orifice, which is accompanied by an elevation of the peristome. In the second row (from the margin of the colony) a rather deep and somewhat irregularly shaped sinus has been developed, bounded by two denticular processes (Pl. XIV. fig. 1 6), within which an avicularium has origin- ated, the mandibular portion of which is placed obliquely along one side of the sinus, whilst the avicularian chamber (a pouch-like inflation of the surface) lies between it and the posed, as it seems to me, of somewhat heterogeneous elements. Veriill has dismembered it and retains the name Discopora for forms “ having both median and lateral aviculareey with the former (or both) often raised on a prominence in front of the zocecial aperture” (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus.). These changes cannot be discussed here, but [ see no reason for merging the genus Escharoides in any other group. 220 Rev. T. Hincks on the boundary of the cell. The pointed mandible of the avicula- rium is directed upwards. At the same time the elevation of the peristome has been proceeding, and a secondary orifice has been formed which differs widely from its predecessor. The subsequent changes, which produce a marked effect on the appearance of the species, are in great measure due to the progress of calcification. The new features which have been added are to a Jarge extent obliterated by the rapid accretion of calcareous matter. The cells lose their convexity, the sutures all but disappear, the punctures become indistinct, the orifice on which the avicularium was developed is no longer on the surface, but deeply sunk beneath it, and at last the avicularium becomes undistinguishable. The adult orifice is rounded above and produced in front into a rather long pointed sinus (Pl. XIV. fig. 1). In the more advanced stages of growth a dull, minutely granulose, flattish crust covers the zocecia. ‘The structural elements to which most interest attaches are probably the sinus on the secondary orifice and the associated avicularium. Their development proceeds part passu, and the shape of the sinus is more or less determined by the avicularium. In this case the sinus seems to be simply a provision for the reception of the avicularium, and, indeed, it is probable that it is in large measure due to the growth of the avicularium along the edge of the secondary orifice. It has therefore a distine- tive significance and is not comparable with the (apparently) similar structure amongst the Myriozoide. ‘The development of Escharoides rosacea, Busk, runs parallel to that of the present species *, and its structural features are almost iden- tical. I think we may recognize in Escharotdes the characters of a natural group. . Sars appears to be abundant in the St. Lawrence and generally in the northern and arctic seas. It forms large coral-like growths composed of many massive branching seg- ments springing from a common base, foliated, contorted, expanding upwards, and terminating above in numerous smaller segments. Range. Antarctic seas (Sir J. Hooker); Tromsé, 20-60 fath. (Sars) ; Spitzbergen, Greenland, Nova Zembla (Smite) ; Jan Mayen (Lorenz); Kara Sea, 49-65 fath. (Levinsen). * ‘British Marine Polyzoa,’ i. pp. 387, 388, Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence. 221 PoRELLA, Gray. Porella Skenet, Ellis & Sol., form plana, n. var. (Pl. XIV. figs. 6.) Zoarium erect, bilaminate, compressed, forming broad flattish expansions, slightly divided into segments at the top, which lie very much in the same plane, edged by a smooth border composed of aborted cells; surface smooth. Zowcia large, arranged with much regularity in quincunx, elongate, of about equal width throughout, subcylindrical, convex, distinct, slightly tumid below the orifice (not suberect above), surface shining, minutely granulated ; orifice (primary) semi- circular ; adult orifice subquadrangular, peristome elevated, so as to conceal the primary opening, destitute of spines, lower margin slightly curved outwards, in the centre of it a rounded aviculartum, facing inward and just visible above the margin ; on each side a stout erect process, somewhat enlarged above and rounded at the top, where it curves slightly mward, bearing immediately below the top, looking into the opening of the cell, a small rounded avicularium, Occtum ample, rounded above, closely united to the neighbouring cells, often subimmersed, surface granular, closed in front by a smooth white porcellaneous plate, which stretches down into the cavity of the cell. Circular avicularia often thickly scattered over the zoarium. It is with some hesitation that I refer this form to P. Skenet. ‘There are many striking differences between the two. In the first place there is a remarkable dissimilarity in habit. In the present form the zoarium is much larger * and more massive than in the normal P. Skene, the segments are broader, much in the same plane, and much less nume- rous than in the other, and not so regularly truncate at the extremity. Specimens present a flattish, smooth, expanded surface, glossy and of a whitish colour; they rise from a small circular disk composed of aborted cells, narrow and stem-like for a short distance above it and then widening out (Pl. XIV. fig. 6c). PB. Skenet, so far as I have seen, originates in an irregularly spreading crust, largely composed of normal cells, and its surface bristles with tall mucronate processes. The latter are totally wanting in the variety, and with them the most characteristic feature of the normal form disappears. The central avicularium is placed within the margin of the peristome and is barely visible. In P. Skenez, n., the whole * Every element of structure is on a larger scale in the present form than in the normal P. Skenet. 222 Rey. T. Hincks on the of the cell-wall immediately below the orifice is elevated, and the central portion rises into the very prominent mucro ; in the present form the front surface is almost uniform throughout. The lateral aviculiferous processes, which form so remarkable a feature of the variety, are placed one on each side of the orifice at the very top of the cell. They curve inward a little above, and the avicularium is situated just below the top on the inner face. In the var. bicornis (Le- pralia bicornis, Busk) there is a cylindrical process on each side of the orifice, bearing an avicularium on the apex; but this would hardly be a correct description of the analogous processes on the present form. In the var. trzdens (Busk) two processes are developed in a line with the central mucro ; in both these cases, however, the general characters are those of the normal P. Skenez. On the whole, I think, this form must be regarded as a very remarkable variety of that species. Amongst the par- tially developed cells on the crustaceous base of the latter the mucro is undeveloped, and occasionally a pair of lateral processes may be met with which closely resemble those of the form plana. ‘The owcium, which has some peculiarities, seems to be alike in both. At the same time the amount of divergence from the ordinary type of the species and the change in external aspect which accompanies it are certainly exceptional, In my ‘ History of British Polyzoa’ P. Skenet is ranked in the genus Palmicellaria, Alder; but I am now convinced that its true affinity is with Porella, Loc. Gulf of St. Lawrence, Trinity Bay, 96 fath. Porella elegantula, D’Orbigny. (Pl. XV. figs. 5.) Eschara elegantula, D’Orb. Pal. Frang. Terr. Crét. v. p. 102; Packard, Southern Labrador Animals, Canad. Nat. & Geol. viii. (1863) ; Smitt, Kritisk Forteckn., difvers. K. Vetensk.-Akad. Férhandl. 1867, p. 24; Dawson, J. W. , Postpliocene Geol. Canada, 1872, Canad. Nat. TiS. Vi : Busk, North Polar Polyzoa, Journ. Linn. Soc, xv. 1880; id. Chall. Rep. pt. i. p. 141. Eschara saccata, Busk, Pol. Norway and Finmark, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, xvii. p. 3; Sars, M., Norsk. Pol. 1863 ( (sep.). Eschara glabr: a, Hincks, Pol. Barents Sea, Ann. & Maw Nat. Hist. October 1880. Porella elegantula, Levinsen, Bryoz. f. Kara-Havet. Dijmphna-Togtets zool.-botan. Udbytte, 1886, Lepratia elegantula, Lorenz, Pol. v. Jan Mayen, 1886. I am inclined to agree with Levinsen in referring this interesting species to the genus Porel/a. In essential struc- ture it resembles the latter, but the resemblance is somewhat Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence. 223 masked by the great extension of the avicularian chamber, which ultimately covers a large proportion of the front of the zocecium. Before its appearance the latter is very mode- rately convex, the peristome not elevated, the surface smooth, the orifice arched above and slightly curved below. In most of the marginal cells the avicularium 1s already outlined. At the top it is of equal width with the orifice; from this point it tapers off for a short distance, and then continues subtubular to the base (Pl. XV. fig. 5a). When it is fully developed and enlarged by the progress of calcification the zocecium appears cylindrical. In later stages, when there has been a large accretion of calcareous matter, the divisions between the cells become inconspicuous, the surface is nearly level and uniformly granular, and the avicularium, so prominent at first, is deeply sunk in the shaft-like cavity of the orifice. In the lower portion of the zoarium and for a considerable dis- tance above the base the cells are almost wholly obliterated, and the surface is smooth and glossy. Concurrently with the growth of the avicularium the peri- stome rises and the secondary orifice is formed. If the “ pouch-like”’ avicularium is not a generic distinction (and the course of its development agrees very closely with that of the corresponding structure in Porella) there is nothing to separate this form from the last-named genus. The variety (rostrata) in which the anterior portion of the avicularium is free and rises into a prominent rostrum over- hanging the orifice (Pl. XV. fig. 5) occurs in the St. Law- rence. ‘The species seems to be common in this region, and, so far as we know, is confined to, the northern and arctic seas. It forms light and very elegant coral-like growths, which originate in a small spreading base, on stones &e., much branched, the main branches somewhat antler-shaped, springing from a little above the point of attachment, divided and subdivided into numerous branchlets, which terminate above in more or less expanded subtruncate segments. Range. Newfoundland, Labrador, Finmark, Greenland, Spitzbergen, Barents Sea, Kara Sea, off Hare Island, Baftin’s Bay, Nova Zembla. Canadian Postpliocene (Sir J. W. Dawson). Porella proboscidea, n. sp. (Pl. XIV. figs. 4.) P =Eschara verrucosa, Smitt, form 2, Kritisk Forteckn. 1868, p. 142, pl. xxvi. fig. 135. : Eschara cervicornis, forma verrucosa, Bryozoa from Nova Zembla, (ifversigt af Kongl. Vetensk.-Ak. Forhandl. 1878, no. 83; Recensio animal. Bryozoorum que ad peninsulam Kola inyenit F. Trybom, ibid, 1878, no. 7. 224 Rev. T. Hincks on the Zoecta ovate, quincuncial, decidedly convex, depressed below, and rising rather abruptly towards the oral region ; surface white and shining, smooth (in young cells) or slightly roughened, in some states areolated, delicate coste passing upward from the margin to the base of the avicularian umbo ; primary orifice semicircular; immediately below it, placed centrally, an erect process, expanded below, narrowing slightly upward and bending in towards the orifice (which it sometimes overhangs slightly), bearing on its summit a cir- cular avicularium, immediately behind which rises a short mucro; peristome in the adult cell elevated, especially in front, embracing the avicularium. Owctwm prominent, rounded above, broader than high, flattened in front, surface minutely pitted over (in the young state smooth, glassy, emarginate), commonly a small elongate fissure on the front. Var. With a smaller avicularian process on each side of the central one and close to it, or sometimes only on one side (Pl. XIV. fig. 4). Hab. On shells and Hydroida, in small patches. The Eschara verrucosa of Smitt is certainly not identical with the Lepralia verrucosa of Johnston, Busk, &c., to which he at first referred it. The latter is a much larger species, with an orifice of a totally different structure. He subse- quently ranked it as a form of Hschara cervicornis (= Porella compressa, Sowerby). I am by no means sure that I am right in identifying it with the present species. Prof. Smitt has given us a very brief description of it, and unfortunately his figure is too small to be of much service. At the same time I think it more than probable that the two are identical. The present form is clearly a Porel/a. It differs indeed from most of the species of this genus in the costate condition of the front wall of the zocecium (though we meet with it in P. struma, Nor- man); but in all essential points its structure allies it to this group. One of its most distinctive characters (as a species) is the elevated avicularian rostrum, which may remind us of the similar structure in Umbonula verrucosa. The delicate tex- ture, the silvery whiteness, the elevated front wall with the radiating ribs (not always present) are also characteristic features. Loc. St. Lawrence, Orphan Bank and off Cap Rozier, 38 fath. If I am right in identifymmg P. proboscidea with Smitt’s species, it has also occurred in Spitzbergen, Nova Zembla, and the Peninsula of Kola. Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence. 225 MucroneE.A, Hincks. Mucronella prelucida, Hincks. (Pl. XV. fig. 3.) This species was described and figured in my “ Report on the Polyzoa of the Queen Charlotte Islands” *. It is figured again in the present paper because the St.-Lawrence speci- men differs in some respects from the North Pacific, and notably in the absence of the peculiar projections, placed one on each side of the cell at the base of the raised peristome. These have much the appearance of avicularia, but are not really such. The diminutive zocecium in the present figure is probably one of those which lie about the primary cell ; but all the cells are smaller in the St.-Lawrence than in the Pacific specimen. In the Queen-Charlotte Report I ventured to conjecture that the new forms described in it would pro- bably not be to any great extent arctic. There can be little doubt, however, that Mucronella preelucida at least has followed the usual course of migration from the extreme north along both the Atlantic and Pacific coasts of America. SMITTIA, Hincks. Smittia Landsborovit, Johnston, form porifera, Smitt. (PL. XIV. fig. 2.) The only form referable to the above species which has yet occurred to me amongst the St.-Lawrence dredgings would rank under Smitt’s Escharella porifera. This must, I think, be accounted a “form” of S. Landsborovit; the differences between them are hardly of sufficient moment to warrant their separation. ‘hey may be briefly summed up. In S. porifera the zocecia are ovate or (frequently) rhombic, very thickly punctured over the entire surface, and of a dull white colour; the peristome is less elevated than in the nor- mal S. Landsborovit, the avicularium is larger and rather more elongate, and stands out very prominently below the inferior margin, so as to have a rostriform appearance. ‘The central denticle is sometimes wanting, and when present 1s less conspicuous than in the ordinary form, owing to the larger size and greater prominence of the avicularium; it is some- times small and pointed. ‘The orifice is subcircular, whilst in the latter it is more correctly described as “ rotundato- * Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xiii. pl. iv. Reprinted for the Geol. & Nat. Hist, Survey of Canada, 1884, p. 26 (sep.), pl. iv. fig. 1. 226 Rev. T. Hincks on the quadrangularis.” In some forms of S. Landsborovii the peri- stome is much more elevated in the ovicelligerous cells than it is in the present, and forms a deep channelled sinus, at the extremity of which the avicularium is placed. In this con- dition the secondary orifice is subtriangular. - There seems to be a large amount of variability in the characters of the peristome as well as in the size and shape of the zocecium itself *. The present form has the leading fea- tures of the specific type, with a moderate amount of variation in detail, and there hardly seems to be sufficient reason for separating it from 8. Landsborovtt (Pl. XIV. fig. 3). Range. Spitzbergen, Hammerfest, Jan Mayen, Peninsula of Kola, Nova Zembla, South Devon f. Subclass HOLOBRANCHIA, Lankester. Family Pedicellinide, Hincks. BarENtTsIA, Hincks. Barentsia major t, n. sp. (PI. XY. figs. 2.) Zoarium consisting of a rather stout, creeping, and branched stolon, jointed at intervals, along which the pedicels sup- porting the polypides are distributed ; pedicels of great length, extremely slender below, expanding considerably towards the summit, delicately ringed, of a very light horn-colour, rising from a stout cylindrical base, conical above and of a whitish colour, not annulated; polypides large, white, expanding from the base upward, slightly gibbous on one side, tentacles numerous, the fleshy peduncle or stalk connecting them with the pedicel comparatively long, enlarged immediately below the base of the polypide. This species is allied to B. gracilis, Sars, but is of very much larger size. The pedicels for a great proportion of their length are very slender, tubular, rigid, but towards the upper extremity they widen out considerably and appear to be com- * See Hist. Brit. Mar. Pol. plate xlviii. figs. 6-9. + The South-Devon specimen agrees very closely with Smitt’s figures of his Escharella porifera (op. cit. plate xxiv. figs. 30, 31). { Busk has substituted, in his ‘ Challenger’ Report (part 2, p. 40), the MS. name Ascopodaria for Barentsia. As I am unable to recognize the propriety or legality of this change, I haye retained the latter, which was the first published designation of this remarkable pedicelline group. I hope to find an opportunity of discussing the grounds of this change on some future occasion. : Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence. 227 posed of a membranaceous material. The muscular cylinder is tall and stout, decidedly conical above, and of a whitish colour. The length of the fleshy stalk immediately supporting the polypide and by which it is attached to the pedicel is a distinctive character. It is dilated below the body of the polypide, which is large and pretty regular in shape. The pedicels are developed in great numbers on the stolon ; at the point where each originates opposite branches are given off. Loc. St. Lawrence. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. PuaTe XIV. Fig. 1, Escharoides Sarsit, Smitt. Adult zocecia from the older portion of acolony. la. Zocecia in the earlier stages of development. 1b. Zocecia, showing the development of the oral avicularium. 1c. Early stages in the growth of the avicularium. Fig. 2. Smittia Landsborovii, Johnston (sp.), form porifera, Smitt. Fig. 3. Smittia Landsborovit, Johnston, normal. Fig. 4. Porella proboscidea, nu. sp. {This figure and also 5 and 5a are less highly magnified than the rest of the Plate.] 4a. A single zocecium., Fig. 5. Membraniporella crassicosta, n. sp. 5a. Immature zocecia. Fvg.6. Porella Skeneit, Ellis & Sol., form plana, n. var. 6a. Ocecium. 66. Marginal zocecium, showing the primary orifice and early stage of the avicularian chamber. 6c, Zoarium, nat. size. PLATE XV. Fig. 1. Corynoporella tenuis, n. gen. and sp. A zocecium, drawn to the usual scale. 1a. Portion of the zoarium, less highly, magnified, showing the dorsal surface, the mode in which the cells are connected, and the position of the fibrils. Fig. 2. Barentsia major, nu. sp. A single pedicel and polypide. 2a. Ditto, showing the mobility secured to the polypide by the fleshy stalk by which it is attached to the pedicel. 26. A pedi- cel on which a new polypide is in course of development. Fig. 3. Mucronella prelucida, Hincks. Fig. 4. Membranipora cymbiformis, Hincks. 4a, Marginal zocecium. Fig. 5, Porella elegantula, D’Orbigny, var. rostrata. 5a, Young zocecium, showing an early stage in the development of the avicularium. 5b. The avicularian mandible. Fig. 6, Cellularia Peachii, Busk, showing the cusp on the median cell at a bifurcation, 228 Bibliographical Notices. BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. South-African Butterflies: a Monograph of the Extra-tropical Species. By Rotanp Trruen, F.R.S., F.LS., F.Z.8., F.ES., &e. Royal 8vo. ‘Triibner and Co. It is with great pleasure that we welcome the appearance of the first two volumes of this work, the need for which will be evident from the fact that not only has the earlier work by the same author (entitled ‘Rhopalocera Africze Australis’) been long out of print, but our knowledge of African butterflies has been very greatly increased during the twenty-one years which have elapsed sinco the publication of that monograph. Mr. Trimen points out that the total of known South-African forms is at the present time about 380, whereas in 1866 (allowing for erroneous admissions to the list) only 197 natives of South Africa were recorded. The present werk commences with a most instructive Introduc- tory Chapter, invaluable to students commencing the study of the Rhopalocera; the whole of the families, genera, and species are also described at considerable length and with the care and precision for which Mr. Trimen is remarkable ; the notes which accompany the descriptions are useful and of interest, whilst at the same time they are free from all those sneering little cuts which too frequently mar the writings of lepidopterists. Volume I., containing the family Nympnarin4&, is illustrated by six chromo-lithographic and one plain plate, the latter being devoted to the structural features of butterflies and the others to figures of the larve and perfect insects ; this volume is also accompanied by a useful map of South Africa. Vol. IL., containing the Erycrnipm and Lycxyip4, is illustrated by three coloured plates; and although chromo-lithography is hardly so well suited to the representation of the smaller species as hand- colouring, the figures are on the whole decidedly good. Vol. III. remains to be issued, and will contain the Paprrtronipz and Hxesrerip#, which Mr. Trimen estimates at about 142 species. It will probably be a bulky volume, and if, as may be anticipated, it is as perfect as its predecessors, the work will be one of the most complete monographs of butterflies hitherto offered to the public. Bergens Museum Aarsbereining for 1886. 8vo. Bergen: John Grieg, 1887. Tur Annual Report of the progress of the Museum at Bergen for 1886, which made its appearance towards the close of last year, forms a volume of considerably larger size than usual. It contains in all 288 pages and 24 plates, twelve of the latter of quarto size. Of course the ordinary reports upon the additions to the Museum and its Library and the affairs of the establishment generally occupy but a small portion of the space, most of which is devoted to the publication of several memoirs of great value and interest. Bibliographical Notices. 229 Foremost among these is an elaborate treatise by Mr. Fridtjof Nansen, the Curator of the Museum, on “ The Structure and Com- bination of the Histological Elements of the Nervous System,” a memoir of over 180 pages, written entirely in English and illus- trated with eleven quarto plates. About a year and a half ago we published in the ‘ Annals’ (vol. xvill. p. 209) a translation of a preliminary communication by the same author upon the histologi- cal structure of the central nervous system in the Ascidia and in Myxine glutinosa, His present memoir gives an account of his investigations upon the histology of the nervous system, with some remarkable generalizations and a valuable summary of the litera- ture of the subject. It would lead us too far to attempt to give even a sketch of the results arrived at, which, indeed, would not be very intelligible without figures. A second paper of importance to British zoologists is Mr. James A. Grieg’s “‘ Contribution to the Knowledge of the Norwegian Alcyo- naria,” containing descriptions of several new species of the group, illustrated with nine octavo plates. In this paper, which is written in Norwegian, with an English summary, the author describes species of the known genera Sympodium, Stenogorgia, Paramuricea, and Protoptilum, and proposes the establishment of two new genera, namely Danielssenia (sp. D. irramosa), an unbranched form with a horny axis, allied to Gorgonia, and Stichoptilum (sp. S. arcticum), a Pennatulid of the family Protoptilide, in which there is a strongly marked bilateral symmetry in the arrangement of the polypes. The general characters and structure of the species are admirably illus- trated in the plates, which furnish, among other things, a very com- plete exposition of the characters of the calcareous spicules. The other natural-history papers in the volume are in German from the pen of Dr. J. Brunchorst, and relate to cases of vegetable pathology. The first is on a very general disease of the potato, produced by a parasitic fungus nearly allied to Plasmodiophora, for which the author proposes the name of Spongospora solani. This fungus is believed to be the cause of the diseases of the potato known as “Schorf” in Germany and “scab” in England. Ina second paper Dr. Brunchorst treats of the disease of cabbage-plants produced by the attacks of Plasmodiophora brassicw, as a remedy or preventive of which he recommends the use of sulphuret of carbon. His third paper relates to the production of nodular swellings on the roots of certain plants and trees by the action of some forms of parasitic fungi, especially those of the genus Frankia. The papers above cited are of so excellent a quality and of so much importance that, although we could do little more than indi- cate their existence, we have thought it desirable to call the atten- tion of our readers to their existence, seeing that an ‘* Annual Re- port” is not the place where such productions are generally looked for; and we must congratulate the authorities of the Museum at Bergen upon their having brought out such a valuable set of contri- butions to the literature of Natural History. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. 16 230 Geological Society. PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES. GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY. January 25, 1888.—Prof. J. W. Judd, F.RB.S., President, in the Chair. The following communications were read :— 1. “On Ailurus anglicus, a new Carnivore from the Red Crag.” By Prof. W. Boyd Dawkins, M.A., F.R.S., F.G.S. The specimen described is a small fragment of the right lower jaw with the last true molar tooth in position, and belongs to the Crag collection of the Yorkshire Philosophical Society. It differs in a marked degree from all fossil European Carnivores, and presents no important points of difference when compared with a series of jaws of recent Atlurus. The Author gave a description of the fossil and comparison of it with Ailurus fulgens, and also a table giving the comparative measurements of the teeth and jaws of the fossil and of recent Ailuri. The species from the Crag was a more powerful animal than any recent Ailuri in the British Museum. The paper concluded with a notice of the range of Ailurus in space and time. 2. «On two New Lepidotoid Ganoids from the early Mesozoic Deposits of Orange Free State, South Africa.” By A. Smith Wood- ward, Esq., F.G.S. Of the two species of fishes described in the present paper, one was founded on specimens of four individuals brought to England by Dr. H. Exton in 1883, together with the types of Z'ritylodon and Rhytidosteus, the other on two examples recently received from the same source. Both were from the Stormberg Beds of the Upper Karoo series. After giving full details of the structure of both forms, and de- scribing the head and opercular fold, appendicular skeleton and scales in each, the Author showed that one species must be referred to the genus Semionotus, and was most nearly allied tothe American types referred by Sir P. Egerton to Ischypterus. For this species the name of Semionotus capensis was proposed. The other species agreed in its characters with the Dapediide, and was especially allied to the genus Tetragonolepis ; but the nearest ally of all was a fish from the Hawkesbury Beds of Australia, Clithro- lepis granulatus. The name of Clithrolepis Extont was proposed for the new South-African species. Miscellaneous. 231 MISCELLANEOUS. Bot-larve in the Terrapin. Pror. Lerpy remarked that the habits of a naturalist often led him to observe things in our daily life which usually escape the notice of others. In our food he had frequent occasion to detect parasites which he preferred to reject, but which are unconsciously swallowed by others. While he liked a herring, he never ate one without first removing the conspicuously coiled worms on the surface of the roes; and he had repeatedly extracted from a piece of black bass or a shad a thread-worm which others would not distinguish from a vessel or anerve. While he did not object to the little parasitic crab of the oyster, he made it a point to remove the equally frequent leech from the clam. It was in a piece of ham he was eating that he first noticed the trichina, which was no doubt one of the causes that led Moses to declare the pig to be unclean ; and in the hundred tape-worms he had examined from our fellow-citizens during the past twenty-five years he had ascertained that they had all been derived from rare beef. He continued, in a visit to Charleston, S.C., before the late war, at an evening entertainment, among other viands were nicely browned slices of the drum-fish, Pogonius chromis. A friend informed him that some portions were more gelatinous and delicate than others, and helped him to what was supposed to be one of such. On cutting into it he had observed imbedded in the flesh a soft mass which appeared of enigmatic character. The fol- lowing day he procured from market a drum-fish, on the dissection of which he found imbedded in the tail several egg-shaped masses, about 3 inches long and less than an inch thick, which proved to be a large coiled worm (Acanthorhynchus reptans) *. This it was that gave delicacy to the dainty, and in this instance the parasite seems to enhance the excellence of the food. At another evening enter- tainment nearer home he partook of some stewed terrapins. Taking into his mouth what appeared to be an egg, it produced such an impression as led to its rejection. Seeming so peculiar he tied it in the corner of his handkerchief for more convenient examination. The specimen, now exhibited, was a membranous bag which contained thirty yellowish-white maggots from 8 to 12 millim. long by 1° to 3 millim. broad. They are the larvze of a bot-fly, and resemble those of the Gastrophilus of the horse. Their characters are as follows :— Body of the larva fusiform, acute anteriorly, obtuse posteriorly, consisting of twelve segments, including the head, which is armed with a pair of strong, black, hooked maxille; terminal segment with a pair of trilateral, oval, chitinous disks, each with three spi- racles; intermediate segments with numerous minute recurved hooklets, disposed in incompletely separated bands at the fore and back part of the segments. * Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. 1858, p. 111. 232 Miscellaneous. The sac containing the larve is about three fourths of an inch long and half an inch broad, with a short tubular prolongation open at the extremity. It was uncertain whether the sac formed part of the intestine. The dish of stewed terrapins was suspected to have been a mix- ture of the diamond-back, Emys palustris, and the red-bellied ter- rapin, Z. rugosa. This is not the only instance of the occurrence of bots in turtles, as Prof. A. S. Packard notes the case of larve being found in the skin of the neck of the box-turtle, Cistudo carolina *. —Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. December 13, 1887, p. 393. A new Member of the Deep-water Fauna of the Freshwater Basins. By Dr. O. E. Imnor. In my first deep-water investigations in the summer of 1883 and during the continuation of these studies I regularly found in a number of lakes (¢. g. the Lake of Zurich) a fine, transparent, seti- gerous worm, of which permanent preparations were made from specimens obtained in the Lungeno lake, where it was particularly plentiful, on the 17th March, 1584. I paid no particular attention to it, because from its abundance and the remarkable facilities offered by the nature of its body for exact investigation I regarded it as certainly already described. Zeppelin’s memoir upon Cteno- drilus monostylos furnished the inducement to examine this Cheto- pod more carefully. It is a form which can hardly be ranged in any known genus. It comes near to the genera Ctenodrilus and Parthenope, of which only marine species are known. According to Forel, Duplessis, and Grube the following Cheetopoda occur in the deep-water fauna of lakes :—Tubifex rivulorum, Lamk.; 7. velutinus, Grube; Cliteliio Lemani, Grube= Bythono- mus Leman, Gr.=B. profundus, Dupl.=Lumbriculus pellucidus, Dupl. Noticeable anatomical peculiarities of the new form are :— There is no ciliary coat on the surface of the body. The sete exist only in one series of tufts on each side, directed towards the ventral surface. The sete are thin, straight nearly to both ends, where they are slightly bent in opposite directions, and cleft into a fine fork at the free end. At rather more than one third of the length we find a slight enlargement of the part immersed in the body. I have not hitherto found individuals with generative organs, but, on the contrary, always multiplication by division. The body externally appears to be composed only of four segments, each of which bears two tufts of from four to six sete. All the sete are of similar structure. The nervous system is distinctly developed. It consists of a cerebral ganglion situated above the wide, thin-walled, anterior division of the digestive canal; this is of a broad band-like form with a slight constriction in the middle. * ‘American Naturalist,’ 1882, p. 598, ke Miscellaneous. 233 The ceesophageal commissures are pretty strongly developed. The ventral cord presents two closely approximated longitudinal com- missures, with a considerable number of ganglionic dilatations, which are in part not very sharply marked off, extending as far as the extremity of the posterior segment of the body. The whole nervous system lies in the body-cavity, not imbedded in the body- wall, as is the case in Ctenodrilus and Parthenope. So much for the preliminary characterization of this interesting Cheetopod, which measures a few millimetres in length. I name it Vetrovermis hyalinus, noy. gen. et spec. As a locality of consider- able elevation I may cite the lake of St. Moritz in the Upper Enga- dine.—Zoologischer Anzeiger, no. 270, January 23, 1888, p. 48. On Psorospermium Heeckelii. By Dr. Orro Zacwarias. Years ago (1855) Hiickel, during a microscopic examination of the tissues of the freshwater crayfish, discovered a peculiar parasite, which does not appear to have been since frequently observed. Grobben * (1877) again found it in the connective parts of the testis in Astacus, and recently (1883) Hilgendorf } also observed it, espe- cially in the vicinity of the thoracic chain of ganglia in the crayfish. ** In order to fix the structure in question by a definite name” the last-mentioned author has proposed the designation Psorospermium Heeckelri. Last summer (1887) I frequently met with the sporozoon in question during the investigation of Silesian crayfish, and I ascer- tained its presence also in examples from Galicia (Tarnopol). It must therefore be a generally distributed parasite, but one which does no injury to its host. The specimens of Astacus examined by me were apparently quite healthy. The organisms under consideration possess an elongated oval form and are sharply marked off from the tissues of their host by a firm cuticle. Their longitudinal diameter measures about (180 millim., their greatest breadth only 0:040-0-050 millim. Their thickness is also very small. They are flat, tongue-shaped structures, which may be met with in many thousands in a single individual crayfish. It is not impossible that when they increase to too great an extent they may cause epidemics among the crayfish. At any rate it will be advisable to examine (microscopically) from this point of view the tissues of diseased Astact. According to my observations Psorospermium Heckelit occurs less frequently in young than in old crayfish. I have thoroughly ex- amined all the tissues of individuals two inches long, and found nothing. When on the point of desisting from the microscopic examination I remembered that the eyes of the animals had been * ‘Beitr. zur Kenntn. d. mannl, Geschlechtsorg. der Decapoden,’ &c., 1878. } Ber, Geselisch. naturf. Freunde in Berlin, Sitz, am 20 Noy, 1883. 234 Mewieacs. entirely neglected. These were now examined in their connective parts, and here numerous Psorospermia were easily recognizable. This discovery led me to the notion that these parasites possibly make their way in (in a motile young state) and establish them- selves first of all in the softer parts of the eye-peduncle in newly hatched crayfish. However, I have established with certainty that Psorospermiwm Heeckelii is able to multiply in the body of its host. This fact was not previously known. I ascertained it by means of staining with aceto-carmine. The portions of tissue under examination were placed in this approved staining-material for an hour, and then cleared in dilute glycerine. Of the material thus treated I made numerous torn preparations which gave me an insight not only into the reproduction of the Psorospermium, but also into its minute structure. Externally, as already stated, there is in our parasite a thick cuticular zone, which marks the boundary from the tissue of the erayfish. This cuticle does not stain at all with aceto-carmine. On its inner wall there is a lining which greedily takes up the colour and which is divided by fine interstices into a number of portions of different size. This is the “ pattern of large meshes” which Hilgendorf also saw. From this lining of the wall proceed the reproductive bodies, large balls (acquiring a dark red colour), which are always present to the number of eight to ten when the time for their appearance arrives. When these bodies are perfectly mature the cuticle bursts in the sporozoon at one of the two ends, and the issue of the separate balls takes place into the surrounding tissue. ach reproductive body forms a spherical structure, which possesses, quite in the interior, a ‘ nucleus,” which remains entirely uncoloured. Externally each spherule is enclosed by an envelope which stains deep red; and between this and the pale nucleus we see a rose-coloured interme- diate zone. By the secretion of a cuticle (after increase in length has taken place) these spherules come to resemble the parent organisms from which they originate. All possible transitions are found between the youngest and oldest stages, so that the very simple cycle of development is quite clearly indicated.—Zoolegischer Anzeager, no. 270, January 23, 1888, p. 49. Two new Genera of Epicarides (Probopyrus and Palegyge). By MM. A. Giarp and J. Bonnier. By the kindness of the Direction of the Royal Museum of Natural History at Brussels we have been enabled to study the collection of Bopyrina belonging to that important institution. In it we have found two interesting forms of Epicarides parasitic upon species of Palemon inhabiting the fresh waters of the Dutch Malaysia and probably of the island of Amboyna. It seems to us that these two Miscellaneous. 235 species must be*regarded as the typesof two new genera, Proho- pyrus and Palegyye *, from which are derived on the one hand the Bopyri and on the other the Gyg«, which have been previously described. We name them Probopyrus ascendens, Semper, and Pale- gyge Borrei, G. & B. Probopyrus ascendens (Bopyrus ascendens, Semper) has already been noticed by Semper as a parasite of the branchial cavity of Palemon ornatus, Olivier, which, in the Philippine Islands, lives in the brooks up to 4000 feet above the level of the sea. The genus Probopyrus is distinguished from Bopyrus by the characters of the pleon in the two sexes. In the female on the dorsal surface the segments of the abdomen, although soldered together, are separated by very distinct lines of demarcation, visible even at the middle of the body. In the ventral part the pleopoda, instead of being re- duced to a mere rudimentary plate on each side of the abdomen, are formed by pairs of appendages homologous with those which we have indicated by the letters 6 and ¢ in Cepon and the Ionine ¢. This important character appears to have escaped the notice of Sem- per, who figures simple abdominal plates (Joc. ezt. fig. 38) like those of the typical Bopyri. In the male the pleon bears traces of lateral appendages which are absolutely wanting in the Bopyri. Bopyrus palemoneticola, Packard (Bopyrus manhattensis, Gissler $), a para- site of Palemonetes vulgaris, Stimps., on the Atlantic coast of North America, must also enter our genus Probopyrus, judging from the figures given by Gissler. Probopyrus ascendens differs from Probopyrus palemoneticola by its larger size, the form of the pygidium of the female, that of the pleal plates, &c. The presence of P. ascendens in the Dutch Kast Indies considerably extends the habitat of this Crustacean. The second species that we have studied has received the name of Paleqyge* Borre:. It is with pleasure that we dedicate it to the learned curator of the Brussels Museum, M. Preudhomme de Borre, well known for his fine writings on the Arthropoda. We met with it in the branchial cavity of Palemon dispar, KE. von Martens ||. Some ten specimens of this species were mixed with those of P. or- natus in the Brussels Museum. Only one of them contained a parasite, or rather a couple of parasites. The Palegyge stand exactly in the same relation to Gyge as the Probopyri to Bopyrus. They represent a less degraded ancestral form, which has retained, in the structure of the pleon, the typical organization of the Ioninz. In the characters of the foot-jaws, in * Sic; recte Palegyge. + ‘The Natural Conditions of Existence as they affect Animal Life’ (1881), p. 147, fig. 38. ¢{ See Giard and Bonnier, ‘ Contributions 4 l'étude des Bopyriens.— Monographie du genre Cepon’ (1887), pl. i. § Gissler, “ A Singular Parasitic Isopod &c.,” in ‘American Natura- list,’ vol. xvi. (1882), p. 6, pls. i. and il. || Prof. De Man, of Middleburg, has kindly aided us in the determina- tion of this Palemon, 236 Miscellaneous. the ventral folds of the last two thoracic segments, and of certain segments of the abdomen in the female, and by the separation of the segments of the pleon in the male, Palegyge Borrei closely ap- proaches the genus Gyge; but it differs therefrom in that the pleal plates (branchiw of the older authors) instead of being simple are double (d and c), as is the case only in the young females in Gyge branchialis. The ventral fringes exist only on the last two seg- ments of the thorax and on the first segment of the abdomen. In the male we find traces of pleopoda only on the first three abdo- minal segments. In the alcohol which contained the infested Palemons we obtained a male Cryptoniscian which we find it at present impossible to appropriate to one of the genera examined rather than to the other. It is interesting to find that the archaic types of Epicarides, Pro- bopyrus and Palegyge, occur upon genera of Palemons inhabiting fresh water. It is true that Palemonetes vulgaris, the host of Pro- bopyrus palemoneticola, is a littoral species. But most of the Pale- monetes, and especially the common P. varians, live in fresh or brackish waters. This is the case also with the section Macrobra- chium, Sp. Bate, to which Palemon ornatus and P. dispar belong. The typical Bopyri seem to live exclusively upon the Paleemons of the section Leander, Desm., as defined by Stimpson. Of this abso- lutely marine group most of our European species, P. serratus, P. squilla, P. rectirostris, &c., form part, each of which bears a parasite of the genus Bopyrus proper. We know nothing of the embryogeny of the Macrobrachia, but the arrangement of the lateral spines of the carapace in these Pala- mons presents a character which is only transitory in Leander, The development of Palemonetes varians, which has been admirably elucidated by P. Mayer, shows us that in these Crustaceans the abdominal feet originate from before backwards, as in the ancestors of the Carides, and not by an abridged process, as in the Leanders, Although from this point of view, as with regard to ethology, Pale- monetes vulgaris forms the passage to the marine Palemons, we think that it is desirable to attribute to this character a greater phylogenetic importance than that of the absence of the mandibular palpus, upon which P. Mayer relies in deriving the Palemonetes from Paleemon. We therefore regard the Palaemonetes and the Macrobrachia as more ancient forms than the Zeandri, forms which have maintained themselves, thanks to their freshwater habitat. The existence upon these ancestral types of archaic genera of Epicarides (Probopyrus and Palegyge) is, we think, a fresh confirmation of the law of paral- lelism between the phylum of the parasites and that of their hosts. — Comptes Rendus, January 23, 1888, p. 304. waeten.. Wey THE ANNALS AND MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY. [SIXTH SERIES. ] No. 4. APRIL 1888. “XXIX.—On the Structure of Fistulipora incrustans, Phill. (F. minor, W‘Coy). By Joun Youne, F.G.S. THE interest excited by the researches of recent years amongst the group of organisms forming the Monticuliporide has been chiefly due to the methods now employed in obtaining a knowledge of their internal structures, these being seen to differ very much even in organisms that are externally so alike as formerly to have been placed in the same genera or species. Another point of interest in connexion with the group is the doubt that still exists in the minds of many paleontologists as to their proper position in the animal king- dom, one set of observers placing them along with the Polyzoa or Bryozoa, another with the Actinozoa or Corals. It is to be hoped that future investigations will help to clear up this point and settle the question one way or other. In the ‘ Annals’ for December 1882 I contributed a short aper ‘On the Identity of Ceramopora (Berenicea) megastoma, M‘Coy, with Fistulipora minor, M‘Coy,” and at p. 428 I fur- ther referred to one or two external characters I had observed in this organism in its several stages of growth that, so far as I was then aware, had not been noticed by former observers, These were :—lIst, that the mouths of the cells in the younger stages are of a trilobed form, this character being due to the Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol... LZ 238 Mr. J. Young on the Structure of occurrence of two short spines that project, one on each side, from the raised lower lip of the cell; 2nd, that the cell-mouths are seen to be closed by a thin calcareous cover (or operculum) which I then considered to be the commencement of tabule in the cells; 3rd, that in the spaces (interstitial) between the cells there are also numerous small polygonal cells that are arranged in from one to three rows; 4th, that we often find in the several stages of the organism that these smaller cells are closed by a thin calcareous outer layer, which leaves only the larger cell-openings visible. These characters I stated had been formerly noted by myself in a paper in the Glasg. Geol. Soc. Trans. vol. vi. p. 213 (1879). In the ‘ Annals’ for Dec. 1885 there is a paper by Prof. H. Alleyne Nicholson, M.D., and Arthur H. Foord, F.G.S., “On the Genus Sistulipora, M‘Coy,” with figures and descriptions of several species. In that paper I am glad to find that my identification of M‘Coy’s Fistulipora in its younger and older stages was admitted by the authors, and further that they had been able to show, from an examination of the type specimen, that Phillips’s earlier described Calamopora incrustans was identical with fF. mdnor, M‘Coy, Phillips’s species thus becoming the type of the genus Mstulipora, M‘Coy. In their remarks upon /. ¢ncrustans, Phill., as well as on the other species of the genus which they describe, I observe that Messrs. Nicholson and Foord fail to notice some of the external characters seen on the surface of the type species and which are noted in my paper in the ‘ Annals.’ As I con- sider a knowledge of these characters to be essential, and of importance to any one studying the structure of the organism, also for enabling them to form some opinion as to its zoo- logical relationships, I again take the liberty of bringing the subject before the readers of the ‘ Annals,’ pointing out in more detail the characters I had already noted as well as one or two other internal structures that I have found in the Car- boniferous Mistulipora since my paper appeared, all of which I have been able to verify in well-preserved specimens and in numerous sections that I have prepared for microscopic examination. I may first remark, with regard to the trilobed form of the cell-mouths in the autopores of Histulipora, that this is not a character that is exclusively confined to this genus, as Mr. E. O. Ulrich figures and describes several forms, in a paper in the Journ. of the Cincin. Soc. of Nat. Hist. for April 1884, as American genera of Bryozoa that have the same trilobed form of cell-mouths in their autopores, with an Fistulipora incrustans, Phill. (F. minor, M‘Coy). 239 internal structure that in some of the forms relates them closely to Fistulipora. I also find this same trilobed form of cell-mouth present in two genera of Carboniferous organisms formerly placed with the Polyzoa; these are Sulcoretepora parallela, Phill., S. raricosta, M‘Coy, and Goniocladia cellu- lifera, Eth., Jun. On sectioning these forms I find that they have a series of vesicular cells in the interspaces between the autopores, as found in the Cystodictyonide, Ulrich, and I have now placed them in that family (Edinb. Geol. Soc. Trans. vol. v. p. 461, 1887). As stated in my former paper in the ‘ Annals,’ I find also that the trilobed condition of the cell-mouths is characteristic only of the younger stages of the organism in Fistulipora. In the older stages of growth, or where it forms thick crusts in which the tubes of the autopores become more erect, the cell-mouths are seen to be more or less circular in form and to have a slightly raised lip or rim all round the margin of the openings. As there is thusso much difference and variability in the form of the mouths of the autopores in the younger and older stages of the organism, I do not feel inclined to place any value on this trilobed form of the cell-mouth as a generic character, as is done by Messrs. Nicholson and Foord, especially when we find that it oceurs amongst a group of organisms that do not seem to be generically related to one another in every case, although the above authors would place some of Mr. Ulrich’s forms with Jistulipore that possessed this character. The closing of the mouths of the autopores in /. ¢nerustans by a calcareous cover or operculum is a character that I have jound in specimens from various localities and in several stages of growth. ‘These opercula are seen to be more or less convex on their upper surface, and are perforated in their younger stage by a small transverse opening that becomes obliterated or filled up by the organism in the older stages. Mr. Ulrich also notices these perforated calcareous opercula in his paper above mentioned, and finds them also in one species of Listulipora, F. clausa, n. sp. He, like myself, is inclined to regard them as the beginning of the successive tabule that show themselves in vertical sections of the tubes of the autopores. ‘Their rarity at the surface in the tubes of most specimens is easily accounted for by the somewhat sparse and wide intervals that exist between the tabulz in many cases, and also often depends on whether the organisms had lived onwards for a period after the formation of the opercula ; in that case they would be found deeper in the tubes and not observable at the surface. 17* 240 Mr. J. Young on the Structure of In my former paper in the ‘ Annals’ I noted the occurrence in the earlier stages of F. inerustans of small polygonal cells that filled in the interspaces between the autopores. In this earlier stage I had accepted as probably correct Mr. G. R. Vine’s identification of the organism with Ceramopora, in which genus he had placed it, rather than with Bere- nicea and Diastopora, in which its younger forms were for- merly placed. Messrs. Nicholson and Foord, however, in their paper take exception to this identification with Ceramo- pora, and state that this genus is distinct in all its stages from Histulipora. The presence or absence of the poly- gonal cells (mesopores) here noted seems to have raised some doubt in the minds of these authors as to the correct identification of the younger stage of F. minor, M‘Coy, with the organism which M‘Coy figures and describes as Berenicea megastoma, they stating (p. 503 of their paper) that “it 1s not possible to be absolutely certain of this without an examination of M‘Coy’s original specimen, especially as M‘Coy’s figure of Berenicea megastoma does not exhibit any mesopores, nor does his description of the species contain any allusion to the presence of interstitial tubes.’ Perhaps I may be able to somewhat dispel this doubt by stating that we find in our Scottish limestone-shales examples of the younger stage of /#. minor that agree exactly with M‘Coy’s figure and description of Berenicea megastoma. ‘That is, they are found as adherent ‘spot-like crusts” that sometimes show the open mesopores on the surface ; in other examples, like M‘Coy’s specimen, the mesopores are seen to be covered by a thin calcareous layer of sclerenchyma-deposit that I shall notice later on. ‘There is thus every reason to believe that M‘Coy’s specimen had the mesopores closed by a similar cal- careous layer, and the reason why they were not noticed by him is probably due to the fact that he only saw one example of the organism, the one figured. My reason for this belief is that the organism in the early stage seems to be rare in Ireland, he giving only one locality for it and mentioning no other examples. Had he seen other specimens he could hardly have failed to observe the mesopores on the surface of some of them. In our Scottish specimens they are seen to occur on the surface of the organism in all its stages of growth, but are sometimes closed or partially closed by the calcareous outer layer that I noted in my former paper (p. 428), which Dr. Lindstrém terms the ‘ Thecostegites stage.”’ IT also find that Mr. Ulrich has noticed this closed condition of the mesopores in several genera of American Bryozoa, and terms the obscuring layer a secondary deposit of sclerenchyma that Fistulipora incrustans, Phill. (F. minor, M‘Coy). 241 has grown at the surface over the cells. That this secondary deposit of sclerenchyma covers the successive growths , of mesopores in /. ¢ncrustans in thicker and thinner layers is well seen in transparent sections of its zoarium, where it presents an entirely different structure from that forming the true cell-walls. In the latter the calcite is seen to be much more dense, and transmits less light through its structure than that of the sclerenchyma-layers. This difference of appearance in the two layers is very observable in nearly all my sections and enables them to be readily distinguished by the greater transparency of the one compared with the other. I first noticed this closed condition of the mesopores on the outer surface of specimens, and thought the calcareous layer was confined to such surface; but sections of the organism show that it is present throughout the whole thickness of the zoarium, from its early incrusting condition to its later stages, ee it is seen to increase in the thickness of its layers in many specimens as they reach the outer surface. Vertical and tangential sections show that it is confined chiefly to the interspaces between the autopores, but it is also seen to coat the outer surface of the tube-walls of the autopores, and in their earlier reclined condition, before becoming erect, the sclerenchyma is seen to rest as a thick layer upon the outer concave curve of the tubes, where it forms at the surface of the zoarium the thickened raised lips of the cells that are so noticeable in the younger stages of the organism. In the older stage, in which the autopores become more erect and with circular mouths, the sclerenchyma forms a regular layer around the walls, as well as often a thin deposit in their interior. ‘These layers of sclerenchyma, whether resting upon the mesopores or autopores, are seen to be of very variable thickness throughout the structure and extent of the same specimen, and differ much even in examples from the same locality. In vertical sections some of the layers are not thicker than the true cell-walls, which are always thin. Other layers, however, are seen to be from ten to fifty times this thickness; these are seen in transverse sections to form zonal bands around the circumference of the zoarium and mark successive stages in the growth of the mesopores outwards towards the surface. Another interesting character shown in vertical sections and illustrating the contemporaneous growth of the scleren- chyma-layers with that of those forming the cell-walls, is where we see that every successive group of mesopore-cells is completely separated from those below by the sclerenchyma- layer, the amount of separation in the true walls in each 242 Mr. J. Young on the Structure of instance being exactly that of the thickness of the intervening deposit. In tangential sections of the organism taken below its outer surface we also find that where the sections happen to pass horizontally through any of the layers of sclerenchyma there the mesopores disappear, their walls not extending either upwards or downwards through this deposit ; but as the obscuring layer passes out of section, as happens in most instances, owing to the curvature of the layers around the specimen, the mesopores are always dis- tinctly visible over those parts where the sclerenchyma is absent, or, owing to the darker colour of their cell-walls, are to be seen shining through a thin layer of the sclerenchyma at its junction with the mesopores. In connexion with this sclerenchyma-deposit I have also to note the fact that its whole structure is pervaded by a system of very minute pores or foramina which are distinctly visible in all the better-preserved specimens of the organism. This character in J. cncrustans I first observed on the surface of some specimens from the limestone-shales of the Lanarkshire coal-field, and noticed in a paper in the Glasg. Geol. Soc. ‘Trans. vol. vii. p. 246 (1583). I have also, since then, proved their existence in all the inner layers of sclerenchyma by numerous sections that I have prepared. When seen on the surface-layer these pores appear as very minute slightly raised tubercles, whilst in the transparent sections they are seen as tubes or foramina, according as they are viewed in vertical or transverse positions. I am glad to find that Mr. Ulrich, in the paper to which I have already referred, both mentions and figures this perforated structure as being found in one or two forms of American Bryozoa, one of which is the Pstulipora? clausa, Ulrich. In writing on this species he says (p. 47), “‘ My tangential sec- tions do not show positively that this deposit (sclerenchyma) was perforated ; but judging from the evidence at hand, and especially that afforded by one or two vertical sections, and the very minute pits shown in many specimens, I should say that such was actually the case, and I do not doubt that I will yet find a section that will show it in an unquestionable manner.’”’ I may here state that I have found clear evidence of this perforated structure in the sclerenchyma-layers of all those specimens in which the calcite has not been too much altered through crystallization. When such is the case the foramina are generally obliterated or are, as in some sections, only faintly visible in parts, where it requires the practised eye to detect them under the microscope. In the paper by Messrs. Nicholson and Foord they notice Fistulipora incrustans, PA7ll. (F. minor, M‘Coy). 243 the peculiarity that exists in the lighter sclerenchyma-layer (although they do not call it such) ‘that rests on the folds or raised lips of the autopores in £. tnerustans, and state (p. 498), “ This lighter portion consists of crystalline calcite of a similar character to that of the matrix or infilling of the cells, though very slightly darker, while the remaining portion of the cell-wall and the walls of the mesopores are composed of a dense, granular, opaque calcite.” It seems to be evident from this statement that their sec- tions did not show any trace of foramina or pores in the calcite that forms the thickened lips of the cells ; but they are agreed that the sclerenchyma-layer, which they term a “ crystalline calcite,” was organically formed, for they further state, “ This difference in the mineral composition in the two parts of the cell-wall must certainly have originated in the living tissues of the organism, because the same phenomenon is met with in species from such widely separated localities as Canada and Westphalia.” I do not think that any evidence can be clearer than that such was the case, although the further evidence of organic structure in the form of minute perforations, such as those I have referred to, seems to have been absent in their specimens. When the sclerenchyma-layers are examined in vertical sections under the microscope it is seen that the foramina or tubes pass upwards through the deposit nearly at right angles to its growth, the only radiation seen in the structure being due to the curving of the sclerenchyma over and around the convex cells of the mesopores. In the thickened layer that is seen resting on the folds of the depressed autopores in the younger stages of growth the foramina also pass through the deposit nearly at right angles to the tubes on which it rests. he foramina or tubes in the sclerenchyma often give the layers a fibrous or brush-like structure, which, when viewed in vertical sections, appears as fine in the tex- ture as very fine velvet. In tangential sections the foramina in finely preserved specimens are seen as very minute pores. Whether any of these pass through the true cell-w alls, either in the autopores or mesopores, is a point on which I have not obtained clear evidence as yet; but I am inclined to think that they do, and this is also the opinion of Mr, Ulrich, from an examina- tion of American specimens. In some of my sections I find a peculiar and minutely broken-up condition of the denser portion of the cell-wall that presents the appearance of having, as it were, been perforated by tubes; but as this is not clearly seen in every section, | am doubtful whether such a 244 Mr. J. Young on the Structure of structure originally existed or not. Other specimens, how- ever, may yet prove this point one way or other. Messrs. Nicholson and Foord state that the true cell-walls of the autopores do not surround the whole of the tube in its dense or opaque condition, but blend at the point where the folds occur into the layer of lighter crystalline calcite that forms the raised lips of the cells, stating (p. 498) that “ it will be noticed that the fold is of a lighter colour than the other part of the cell-wall.” This does not appear to be a cha- racter of any value, as [ find in my best-preserved sections that the true cell-wall is often quite persistent in its density and darker colour around the tubes, even where they are thickened at the folds by the layer of sclerenchyma. In my sections it; is sometimes seen that the walls of certain cells do blend and disappear in some instances where they are covered by the lighter calcite layer; but these same sections also show in other instances the walls quite complete around the majority of the cells, and this complete condition of the walls is seen to exist in nearly all the sections in which the tubes have become erect and the mouths of the autopores more circular. The disappearance of the cell-wall around the folds in those instances where it is seen to be wanting seems to be due to some kind of absorption of the denser calcite and its replace- ment by the sclerenchyma either when the organisms were living or afterwards by some process or other during fossiliza- tion. It, however, is seen to be a variable character even in the same specimen. Having stated this much regarding the structures I for- merly found in #. cncrustans I will here further notice shortly one other interesting structure that I have recently dis- covered in specimens obtained from Bowfield, Renfrewshire, near Glasgow. The form of Pstulpora found at this place may yet prove to be a distinct species from, or variety of, F. incrustans ; but beyond the difference in the form of its zoarlum and the structure to be noticed there seems to be little difference either in the form of the autopores or in the number and arrangement of the mesopores and macule from those seen in the older stages of some specimens of J”, ¢nerus- tuns. ‘The organism is generally found in the form of frag- ments of branching, subcylindrical, hollow stems, varying in thickness from one quarter to half an inch in diameter, the interior of the stems being now filled by a deposit of clay- ironstone. ‘The new internal structure that I have to note in this species consists of a group of slender spines that are seen in the sections to radiate from the inner wall of the autopores to near the centre of the tubes. These radiating spines have Fistulipora incrustans, Phill. (F. minor, M*Coy). 245 very much the same character as those seen in the autopores and mesopores of Heteropora neozelanica, Busk, which are figured and described by Prof. Nicholson in his ‘ Monticuli- pora,’ p. 69, fig. 9 (1881). In the Carboniferous form, how- ever, the spines are only seen in the autopores, and in this respect it differs from the species of Heteropora above noted, where they are found in both groups of cells. The spines appear to be as slender and as numerous as those of HH. neo- zelanica, there being from ten to twelve in many of the sections, in which they are seen to be arranged within the circle of the cells at slightly varying distances from one another. They also vary in their length within the tubes, as in Heteropora, and many of them have become thickened by a secondary deposit of calcite that now renders them more conspicuous in the sections. I find them most numerous and best preserved in those portions of the tubes that lie at a little distance below the outer surface of the zoarium. In the younger stage of the autopores the spines are seen to be rare orabsent. ‘The tabule in the tubes are moderately common, and in those portions where the spines exist the latter are seen amongst the tabule projecting inwards from the cell- walls, but apparently in no regular order of arrangement. The species of Jstu/ipora under notice has the outer surface of the zoarium often well preserved. On it the mouths of the autopores are seen to be nearly circular in form, having a slightly raised lip or rim all round the cell. The interspaces between the autopores that are occupied by the mesopores show in most specimens a thick sclerenchyma-layer at the surface that completely conceals the mesopores. This layer also covers the mesopores that lie deeper within the branches, and in certain stages it forms thick zonal layers all round the stem that separate the mesopores in their layers from each other by the whole thickness of the sclerenchyma-deposit. All over the surface of the sclerenchyma-layer, as well as upon the raised lips of the cells, there exist numerous, small, slightly raised tubercles, that give this surface a minutely granulated appearance. Their structure under the microscope is seen to be identical with the smaller forms of spiniform tubercles (acanthopores) found in many species of the Monti- culiporide. In this species of Mistulipora, however, they seem to be much more numerous than I have yet seen noted in any other member of the genus. One other interesting character of this organism, as illustrated by tangential sections ot the branches when cut below their surface, is the occur- rence of similar acanthopores in the thicker inferior layers of sclerenchyma that | formerly mentioned as forming the zonal 246 On Fistulipora incrustans, Phill. (F. minor, J‘ Coy). bands within the branches. Iam inclined to think, from the evidence presented, that these thickened layers indicate periods in the life of the organism in which the mesopores, from some cause or other, ceased to be developed, or, when present, were small aad widely scattered. The aie dence also indicates that when the mesopores ceased to grow the sclerenchyma-deposit was ieady to take its place, the latter being seen to form a continuous uninterrupted deposit upon the tubes of the autopores outwards to their surface, whereas in the spaces occupied by the mesopores it only alternates with the latter, but does not form a regular con- tinuous outward growth. From the foregoing remarks it will be seen that the British Carboniferous Listulipora presents several interesting struc- tures upon which little has been formerly written, and which only well-preserved specimens have now revealed. I shall not at present dwell further upon these structures, nor attempt to discuss any of the points relating to the zoological relation- ships of the genus, beyond briefly stating that none of the structures here noticed are peculiar to Fistulipora, they being found in other organisms, some of which are at present placed with the Monticuliporide, others with the Polyzoa. The vesicular interstitial cells (mesopores) found in F%stulipora, accompanied by a perforated sclerenchyma-structure and a trilobed form of the cell-mouths in the autopores, are cha- racters that are present in both Scottish and American forms of the Cystodictyonide, Ulrich. Spiniform tubercles (acan- thopores) along with a minutely perforated sclerenchyma- structure, as in J. ¢ncrustans, are also present and often beautifully preserved in the Carboniferous Fenestellide and other Polyzoans—these structures in transparent sections being often quite comparable in all their characters with similar structures found in the Monticuliporide. ‘The oceur- rence also of numerous radial spines in the tubes of the Car- boniterous Hstulipora is another character that closely relates it to Heteropora, a genus that is also found to have its cell- mouths closed in certain stages, according to Prof. Nicholson, ‘ Monticulipora,’ p. 67, with “ 4 calcareous (or more usually chitinous) surface-pellicle,’ ’ which he further says ‘is a feature which speaks strongly for Polyzoan affinities,” although he afterwards states that this closed condition of the cells “ by a calcareous pellicle” is not unknown amongst certain corals belonging to the genus Favosites, the species of which he names. I will, on the other hand, only state in conclusion that I have also found in several species of undoubted Car- boniferous Polyzoa the cells closed by a calcareous secondary Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. rp Yi deposit that in its earlier stage is seen to be pierced by a very small pore opposite the cell-mouths, this pore or opening being afterwards filled up in the later stage in many of the specimens. XXX.—Are there Deep-sea Meduse ? By J. WALTER FEWKEs *. In a Report on the Medusz collected by the ‘ Albatross’ in 1883-84 t I have already considered the question whether there are zones of Medusan life in the depths of the sea. I have not, however, from the nature of that paper written all that may be said, even in the present condition of our know- ledge, of the facts bearing upon it. It is hoped that the present paper will at least point out the great interest attached to a scientific answer to the question which is taken as the title of this communication. A study of the fauna of the deep sea is of comparatively modern growth. It is barely thirty years ago that naturalists almost universally believed the abysses of the ocean to be deserts as far as life is concerned. Deep-sea exploration has, however, not only revealed the fact that the ocean-bed at great depths is peopled by a rich and varied fauna, but also that the animals which constitute that fauna are peculiar and markedly different from those found in shallow waters. It would seem a most extraordinary exception if, after the floor of the ocean at great depths had been found to be inha- bited, the fathoms on fathoms of water through which the sounding-weight passes to reach those depths are destitute of lite. In mid-ocean, where there is a highly varied nomadic lite upon the surface and where the dredge has brought up from the ocean-bed a characteristic assemblage of animals, are we to suppose that between these places there is not a repre- sentative tauna, or must we conclude that after we sink a tew fathoms below the surface life ceases, and that it is not until we come to the floor of the ocean that life again appears? If between these two limits there is a fauna, is that fauna the * From the ‘ American Journal of Science,’ February 1888, pp. 166-179. + “Report on the Medusze collected by the U.S. Fish Commission steamer ‘ Albatross’ in the region of the Gulf Stream in 1883-84.” Annual Report Comm. Fish and Fisheries, 1884, pp. 927-977, pls. i—x. 1886, Many of the ideas there presented are also noticed in this paper, 248 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. same as that found at the surface, or is it characteristic ? Can the animals which compose it be circumscribed in bathy- metrical zones, out of which they cannot pass with impunity ? Do we, in short, have in the nomadic oceanic life a change of fauna as we sink below the surface ? Naturalists have been led to suppose that since we find peculiar modifications in animals living upon the sea-bottom at great depths we should necessarily look for the same variation among nomadic animals at intermediate depths. It would then seem probable that there are bathymetrical zones for free-swimming animals, and that these animals are cha- racteristic as compared with others which live at the surface. An investigation of the character of this fauna, if such there be, has an interest to the evolutionist, for it might be sup- posed to acquaint him with facts bearing on the general characters of the ancestors of certain genera of surface-life. I can imagine few places on the earth’s surface where the uniformity of physical conditions is greater than in the depths of the sea. I do not mean, as might be supposed, necessarily on the floor of the ocean, but at the depth of say 1000 fathoms separated from the ocean-bed by a wall of water of the same depth. Here, if anywhere, we may look for uniformity of conditions, and if environment has anything to do with modi- fications in the generic forms of animal life, here we may expect to discover animals which preserve ancestral features. On the surface of the ocean there are changes of temperature and of light and climatic variations ; at the floor of the ocean there may be reactions of the interior of the earth upon its crust, perhaps lava-flows or geological oscillations * ; but midway between these two places, equally removed from both, disturbing causes only rarely penetrate, and conditions remain more constant year by year. May we not expect to find here a corresponding uniformity in the fauna as compared either with the highly organized animals of the surface or with those of the depths of the ocean? Is that fauna more uniform than any other in the ocean ? No group of animals is better suited for a study of the questions which suggest themselves concerning the bathy- metrical zones of characteristic animals, free-swimming at different depths in the ocean, than the Meduse. ‘The group is a large and very variable one. It is confined, with but few exceptions, to the ocean. Moreover, it is probable that its ancestors were oceanic animals. No group of marine * Such changes might take place even if the oceans have practically been the same in past geologic times as at present. Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. 249 animals presents fewer difficulties in studying the questions which we have stated than this. It was with the impetus of a new enthusiasm for the study of these questions that L undertook, by the advice of Prof. Verrill, the examination of the rich collections of deep-sea Meduse made in the Gulf-stream by the ‘ Albatross.’ It seemed to me that the examination revealed much of general scientific interest. I shall not consider in this discussion the Hydroida, as the members of this group are for the most part attached to the ground, and the problems connected with them are the same as those which pertain to all deep-sea animals attached to or partially living on the ocean-bed. We shall also pass by in silence the Ctenophora, no genus of which has yet been ascribed to the deep sea. I propose to considera few of those jelly- fishes which are known as the Acraspeda, and incidentally the Stphonophora. The history of the study of the deep-sea Medusz belonging to these divisions is a very brief one. In many of the mono- graphs on these groups we have isolated mentions of Medusze which are ascribed to the deep sea. The jelly-fishes thus mentioned were commonly washed into shallow water by ocean- currents, by storms, or unusual events in the ocean, and the depths at which they were supposed to live could only be conjectural. ‘lhe specimens themselves were, for the most part, in a mutilated condition. The first and only paper on the Siphonophora of the deep sea is by Prof. Studer *, who describes new species and genera of these animals which were found twisted on ropes and wires used in deep-sea dredging and sounding. All of these are closely related to a genus called Rhizophysa, which is itself allied to a Medusa called Physalia, or the “ Portuguese man-of-war,”’ which habitually floats on the surface of the ocean. The most important work which we have on the Acraspeda (the ordinary jelly-fishes found in shallow waters) of the deep seas is a report | by Prof. E. Heckel on a collection made by H.M.S. ‘Challenger.’ No one has done more than he to elucidate the structure of the jelly-fishes, and he stands without an equal in his contributions to a knowledge of the deep-sea members of the group. This work of Heckel is, up to the * ‘Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie,’ vol. xxi. + “Report on the Deep-Sea Medusze dredged by H.M.S. ‘ Challenger ’ during the years 1873-76.” Report on the Scientific Results of the Voyage of H.MLS. ‘Challenger’ during the years 1873-76, vol. iv, no. ii. 250 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. present, the greatest contribution of any naturalist to the study of the Medusan representatives of the deep-sea fauna. If space permitted one or two other smaller contributions might be mentioned; but these two works are the most important additions to our knowledge of the deep-sea Acras- peda and Siphonophora. We have no complete account of the deep-sea jelly-fishes of the Gulf-stream. That great body of water, which sweeps along our coast from the Straits of Florida northward, bears a nomadic life, of the wealth of which no one has yet a just conception. Those who have studied the stream in all lati- tudes have spoken of this fact, and one needs but to lower a drag-net in its waters for a few minutes to become convinced of its truth. The surface of the Gulf-stream has been but partially explored, the inhabitants of its depths, except on the very bed, are unknown. The means which have been used for the collecting of ani- mals from intermediate depths are not all that could be wished for. There is a call for greater refinement in this kind of col- lecting. A common way of obtaining this life is as follows. The dredge, trawl, or drag-net drawn up from a great depth is found to bring with it a Medusa. ‘That Medusa is recorded from the depth of the trawl. What then is the possibility that it entered the dredge on the passage up through the water? I think every one will acknowledge that the possi- bility is very great, and that the Medusa may or may not have come from the deep sea. A drag-net attached to a dredge-rope or wire is sometimes lowered to a certain depth and then drawn up. Here also we may ask, how is it known that the Medusa found in the net entered it at the recorded depth? A Siphonophore clinging to a wire-rope used in sounding or dredging may or may not, as shown by A. Agas- siz, have become twisted upon it at the depth at which the animal appears to- be found when brought on deck. “In most cases,” writes Prof. Verrill, “it is impossible to say whether the novel forms of Meduse taken in the trawl and trawl-wings are inhabitants of the bottom waters or the sur- face, or of intermediate depths. Eventually those that belong to the surface-fauna will doubtless be taken in the surface- nets; but this will require much more extensive collecting of the surface animals than has yet been attempted.” It will thus be seen that the means of determining the depth at which the collecting of free oceanic animals takes place are too imperfect for any accurate knowledge of the bathymetrical limits of so-called deep-sea Meduse. We are, in fact, on the very threshold of this kind of research, and Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. 251 what is now most needed in the study of bathymetrical zones of marine life are improvements in the method of collecting at any depth, so that we can tell exactly at what distance below the surface a nomadic animal is captured. Devices have been suggested, one of which, the so-called “ gravitating-trap ”’ of Lieut. Sigsbee, has been described in the ‘ Bulletin’ of the Museum of Comparative Zoolozy at Cambridge. Iam not SY 5 aware how extensively this apparatus, or others of similar kind, has been used by those who are in charge of deep-sea . ~) . exploration, or whether it has been sufficiently tried to test its usefulness *. If Medusze were always as abundant at great depths as they sometimes are at the surface, a device might easily be invented for the successful capture of at least a few specimens. It seems more probable that Medusz are not common enough to warrant one in supposing them very numerous, and the difficulty in their capture thus becomes greater, rendering it necessary that some modification of the gravitating-trap be invented fT. In a letter to Mr. C. P. Patterson (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. vol. vi. no. 8) Mr. A. Agassiz calls attention to the uncertain methods adopted for ascertaining at what depths free-swimming animals live, and from experiments with the “ Sigsbee Trap” concludes (p. 153), while he does not deny that there are certain genera of deep-sea Medusa, that ‘the above experiments appear to prove conclusively that the surface-fauna of the sea is really limited to a comparatively narrow belt in depth, and that there is no intermediate belt, so to speak, of animal life between those living on the bottom or close to it and the surface-fauna.”’ This statement from such a high authority in the study of marine zoology would seem to effectually crush any murmur ot belief in intermediate zones in the distribution of oceanic forms of hfe. While I have the highest respect for this view, I cannot help entertaining an opinion that more observations are necessary before we can accept the proposition that there * “ Results of Explorations made by the Steamer ‘ Albatross’ off the Northern Coast of the United States in 1883,” Annual Report Comm. Fish and Fisheries, 1883. + The small amount of water which enters the Sigsbee gravitating- trap is one great objection to it. Negative results with this apparatus do not necessarily show that life does not exist at the depth at which the door is opened, and the instrument does not collect from a large enough area for a successful determination of the abundance of life which it is intended to capture. From what has been published, and statements of those engaged in deep-sea exploration, | am led to suppose that the “Sigsbee Gravitating-Trap” has given only negative data in regard to the problem of the existence of characteristic nomadic life in intermediate depths of the sea. 252 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. are not characteristic belts of pelagic animals at different depths. With the question whether the recorded depths at which the Meduse which we shall consider are found are accurate or not we cannot deal. Indeed at this stage of this kind of deep-sea exploration an examination of these methods would be foreign to the purposes of this paper. We take the dataas given by the collector and at present leave the improvement of the collecting-apparatus to others. Can we not approach this subject from another side? Are there any characteristics in the Medusze themselves which show that they are preeminently fitted to live at the depths or approximate depths from which they are reported? Has their habitat left any traces in the modification of their anatomy ? Has the uniformity of conditions in their habitat led to a corresponding simplicity in their structure, and are they nearer the ancestral forms than others with a more varied environment ? An account of the singular structure of one or two typical genera may help us to answer this question, or at all events present certain facts which bear upon it. Let us therefore for illustration consider one or two representatives of the Acraspeda and Siphonophora disco- vered by the ‘ Albatross’ in the depths of the Gulf-stream. Every one familiar with the anatomical structure of the Siphonophores will recognize how difficult it is to find in those genera like Rhizophysa anything to point to an adap- tation to a deep-sea life. The ‘ Albatross’ has discovered new Physophores closely allied to Rhizophysa, one of which, Petrophysa, reaches the enormous size of 20 feet in length in alcohol. The float of this animal is larger than that of any true Siphonophore except Physalia. The large size of the float in these Physophores would seem an effective argument against their adaptation to a life in deep water, especially as their nearest ally, Physalia, is preeminently a surface form. It is extremely difficult to gather from the structure of the known Siphonophora ascribed to the deep sea anything to indicate an adaptation to such a life. The group can afford little satisfaction in our answer to the question of whether there is a nomadic deep-sea life or not. The nature of the argument for the existence of Medusan life in bathymetrical zones may be best illustrated by con- sidering a few examples of the Acraspeda. These are not the only instances which might be chosen, and possibly are not the best. They are thought to be as suggestive as any se the Acraspeda which have been ascribed to great epths. Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. 253 One of the most characteristic families of Acraspeda is called the Collaspide. The family is supposed to belong to the deep-sea and is represented by two genera, Atolla and Collaspis, which differ from each other rather obscurely in the regular or irregular arrangement of the sexual glands. It is a question whether we have more than specific differ- ences in the features which have been pointed out by Heckel as separating the two. Up to the present the genns Afolla is represented by a single species collected by the ‘Challenger’ (A. Wyvillid, Heck.) and two species from the Gulf-stream (4. Bairdit and A. Verrillii, Fewkes). The structure of Afol/a is thought to be more primitive than that of the ordinary inshore genera, Cyanea and Aurelia. It is so characteristic that I repeat from my paper on the anatomy of this genus a condensed notice of some peculi- arities *, If we compare Atol/la with our common surface Meduse, such as Aurelia, we notice many marked peculiarities. In the former we havea coronal furrow, which is not repre- sented in Aurelia, although found in a well-known surface Medusa (Periphylla). We have in Atolla a variable number (generally twenty-two) of sense-bodies or peduncles of the same. In Aurelia we have always eight sense-bodies. ‘The eoronal muscle is peculiar to Alodla. The sense-bodies of Atolla are spoken of by Heckel as rudimentary, and it is supposed that we have in a deep-sea Medusa an adaptation for a life in the depths into which the * The umbrella, when seen from the upperside, is found to be divided by a deep ring-shaped groove into a central and a peripheral region. The groove is called the coronal fossa, the central region the discus centralis, and the periphery the corona. The corona is formed of a number of wedge-shaped gelatinous blocks, joined together and bearing on their outer rim alternately tentacies and sense-organs. These gelatinous blocks are designated by the term socle, taken from architectural nomenclature, and are of two kinds—those which bear the tentacles, called the tentacular socles, and those which carry the sense-bodies (if such exist), the socles of the sense-bodies. The socles of the sense-bodies bear two thin flaps, called the marginal lappets. On the underside of the disk we have, below the corona, a large ring-shaped muscle, called the coronal muscle, which is highly characteristic and larger in this genus than in any other known Medusa, Axially to this muscle there is a zone formed of eight kidney-shaped sexual glands and a simple mouth, which opens into a bag-shaped stomach. In the interior of the body there is a circular cavity filling the central disk, which opens by four orifices into a ring- shaped sinus, which lies in the gelatinous body of the corona. From the outer edye of this ring-shaped sinus simple, unbranched, peripheral tubes extend through the bell-substance, passing into the cavities of the ten- tacles and rudimentary marginal sense-bodies. Ann, & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol, i. 18 254 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. light never penetrates. We may have here what we so often find in deep-sea animals, a reduction in the size and efficiency of the special organ of sense to fit the Medusa for the condi- tions under which it must live at great depths. Stated in a startling way, we might speak of Afto//a as a blind Medusa. This statement would hardly be justifiable, and we can at present go no further than to say that the special sense-bodies of sight * are supposed to be rudimentary. It must, how- ever, be borne in mind that nowhere among Acraspeda do we have so many, twenty-two, sense-bodies as here. In some specimens there are twenty-eight sense-bodies in this genus. It is extraordinary that one of the known species of Atolla (A. Wyvilli’, Heck.) comes from the Antarctic Ocean, while our two species were both from the warm (?) water of the Gulf-stream. In the southern hemisphere its lowest limit is about 2000 fathoms, while north of the equator it comes from the surface or within a few hundred fathoms. Among the Medusz collected by Lieut. Greely in the icy waters of Lady Franklin Bay is an interesting jelly-fish allied to Atolla. This genus (Nauphanta) has been found but once before, and then by the naturalists of the ‘ Challenger’ in the neighbourhood of the island of Tristan d’Acunha in the South Atlantic. In the latter locality it is recorded from about 1500 fathoms, while in Lady Franklin Bay it is found at the sur- face. rom several differences in these two specimens, those from the Arctic and those from the South Atlantic, [ have supposed the boreal form to be new and have called it by the specific name polaris t. The ‘Challenger’ specimens were placed under a new genus, called by Heckel Nauphanta f. Before we consider the relationship between Atolla, Nau- phanta, and other related Meduse ascribed to the deep sea, * Whether the “eye ” of the jelly-fish can distinguish form or not has not been demonstrated. Simple experiments made by passing rays of light through dishes in which they are confined, or the simple fact that they almost always congregate on the illuminated side of the same, are not conclusive to me that they distinguish form. Experiments with sen- sitive plates to show the depths to which light penetrates the water are most suggestive in this connexion. It seems pertinent to the whole inquiry to ask whether looked at from the physical side there are not rays of light of such a nature that the vertebrate eye is not able to perceive them, but which may act upon the visual organs of other animals. + Nauphanta polaris has a central disk as in Atolla, a coronal fossa, and a corona, which, however, is formed of sixteen socles, eight of which bear tentacles, tentacular socles, and eight sense-bodies. The outlines of these socles is more clearly marked than in Afol/a on the upper surface of the corona which they form, on account of the deep sculpture which separates them. { The name Nauphanta was preoccupied in 1879, when applied to this Medusa, having been given to a worm in 1864, ’ & 8 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Medusee. 255 let me mention another new Medusa collected by the ‘ Alba- tross’ in the Gulf-stream. The genus Nauphantopsis is of interesting affinities, since it has the same central disk as Nauphanta and Atolla, the same coronal fossa and coronal socles. It is most closely allied to Nauphanta, but has thirty-two socles instead of sixteen, eight sense-bodies (?), and twenty-four tentacles *. These tentacles are therefore arranged in threes, the series of three alternating with the eight sense-bodies—all with gelatinous socles. It is easy to interpret the three deep-sea Acraspeda, Atolla, Nauphanta, and Nauphantopsis. At first sight they closely resemble gigantic young Aurelie or Cyanee in a stage which is called the Ephyra. ‘This is especially true of Nauphanta, which has the same number and arrangement of tentacles as the young Cyanea or Aurelia in the Ephyra stage. It is so close in fact that at first sight they seem identical. In Nauphanta we have mature ovaries, and this would seem to indicate the adult form. ‘The existence, however, of ova and a sexual maturity is by no means an indication of the acqui- sition of the adult form among Meduse, and many instances might be mentioned of a jelly-fish with mature ova even betore embryonic appendages have been dropped. ‘There is nothing then to prove that Nauphanta is not the young of some other Medusa, and on the other hand there is no proof that it is not an adult. If it is an adult, it is a mature Me- dusa with likeness to embryonic conditions of other Meduse. It would then be nearer the ancestral form of Acraspeda than any of the more common Medusz like Cyanea and Aurelia. At first study I was inclined to regard Atolla as a giant Hphyra of some unknown Medusa. Its affinities are certainly very close to Nauphanta, and through the latter genus it is connected with HKphyra, the young of Cyanea. We may therefore regard both these genera as embryonic in their struc- ture and as close allies of the young of a higher jelly-fish. It is a most interesting fact that two genera with such marked characters are considered deep-sea genera. Hxactly what the * Nauphantopsis is an interesting genus in its relationship to the surface- genus Periphylla, which has four sense-bodies and twelve tentacles in four series of three each. We likewise have in the same genus marked coronal socles, sixteen in number, while Nauphantopsis has thirty-two. Nauphantopsis then appears to be a connecting genus between Nauphanta and Periphylla. I believe we are justified in regarding Nauphanta as an adult, although when I first studied it I was strongly inclined to consider it an immature animal. It must be confessed that, with the exception that it has eight sense-bodies, while Periphylla has but four, there are strong resemblances between a young Periphylla and the genus Nau- phanta. iets 256 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. evolutionist would expect from the uniformity of conditions which exist in deep water we find manifested in the simple anatomy of two of the more characteristic deep-sea genera of Acraspeda, a simplicity of structure of embryonic and there- fore of ancestral nature. It is certainly strange that these two facts are associated. It is an extraordinary coinci- dence if the deep water at which the Meduse were found and the embryonic affinities in their anatomy have not the relationship of Cause and Effect. The discovery of a Nau- phanta in the icy waters of the Arctic zone*, while it shows that the genus may approach the surface when the temperature of the depth at which it lives becomes a surface-temperature, would also indicate that the genus is not confined to the great depth at which it is reported from the South Atlantic. If Nauphanta cannot rise to the surface in the latitudes of ‘Tris- tan d’Acunha, it may be that the elevation of temperature above its habitat keeps it at great depths. At the higher latitude of North Greenland, however, the cold zone, in which Nauphanta lives in the South Atlantic, is about the surface- temperature. Here then, as far as thermal conditions go, the Medusa can rise to the surface. We here encounter what I believe will be found to be an influence of more important character in the modification of Medusan life at great depths than the depth of water itself. Medusa are sensitive to changes of temperature in the ocean ; so sensitive, in fact, that for many genera the lines of demarcation between warm and cold oceanic currents are often dead lines to these delicate creatures. It is well known that certain genera can be frozen without being killed by the change, and that Meduse suffer less from a diminution in temperature than from an elevation of the same. ‘This is particularly true of those genera, like Aurelia, Sarsia, and others, which habitually inhabit cold water. A temperature of +70° I. is fatal to them, while many tropical forms will easily live even in higher tempera- tures. ‘l'emperature in the ocean has drawn invisible lines in the distribution of Medusz in depth as well as latitude ; and it is at present very difficult to separate this cause from that of pressure in the bathymetrical limits of the jelly-fishes. The poverty of our knowledge of the ranges of temperatures which jelly-fishes can endure is too great to admit of an generalizations of value on this question. Still there are no tacts of more vital importance in the discussion of the ques- tion of whether there are deep-sea Acraspeda than those * «Report on the Medusie collected by the Lady Franklin Bay Expe- dition,’ Lieut. A. W. Greely commanding. Appendix no. xi. Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Medusee. 257 which bring information of the thermal limits at which the Medusee can live. It would be profitable, if space permitted, to consider other genera of Acraspeda made known by the ‘ Albatross’ in their bearings on the question which is the title of this paper. The three genera already considered present us the strongest arguments which can be found in the modification of external and internal anatomy, as indicative of a deep-sea habitat. “Those Meduse,”’ writes Heckel, “‘ may be regarded with greater probability as permanent and characteristic inhabitants of the deep-sea, which have either adapted themselves by special modifications of organization to such a mode of life, or which give evidence by their primitive structure of a re- mote phylogenetic origin.” He then enumerates those which he places in this category, among which are the two remark- able genera Atolla and Nauphanta. “It is by no means certain,” writes Hackel, “that all the eighteen Meduse described below (Report on ‘ Challenger’ Medusee) are con- stant inhabitants of the deep sea.”” We have discussed the argument drawn from two of the most characteristic of the Acraspeda, viz. Atolla and Nauphanta, and can readily sub- scribe to this statement as far as these are concerned. The resemblance of Nauphantopsis and Atolla to Ephyra is believed to have a morphological significance ; Ephyra is thought to be the ancestral form of the Acraspeda, and these so-called deep-sea Meduse still preserve the ancestral form with small modifications, except in size, repetition of organs, and certain other characters. Of the development of Atolla or of the Collaspidee we know nothing, and yet a knowledge of this subject is possibly to reveal the solution of important questions. If the mode of growth should prove to be a direct development without a Scyphostoma, it would certainly in- crease my belief that these Meduse somehow resemble the ancestral forms. I have already elsewhere shown that among the Hydromeduse with alternation of generations and those with a direct development, the latter method is normal, while the former is a secondary modification. Among Acraspeda also the direct development of Pelagia is the ancestral method, while the formation of a Scyphostoma is a secondary modification. We should expect to find in Afolla a direct development if it be an ancestral genus. [rom its mode of life in the high seas we should also expect the same *. * I believe the Lucernarians are degenerate adult Acraspeda, which have attached themselves to the bottom much in the same way as Cas- stopea frondosa, and become modified in consequence. While it may be said that they are homologous to the Scyphostoma stage, it is not thought 258 Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. Abandoning for the present as insufficient any evidence which might be adduced from the structure of the Meduse themselves, and passing to the recorded facts in relation to bathymetrical distribution, we find no more satisfaction from this consideration. It would appear that the strongest argu- ments for the existence of nomadic deep-sea Medusze of the Acraspeda are found by Heckel in the following genera *. The names in brackets are authorities for distribution. 1. Pectanthis.—Surtace (Heckel). 2. Pectyllis—200-600 fath. (Heckel). 3. Pectis.—1260 fath. (Heckel). 4. Cunarcha.— Possibly captured in drawing up the lead ” (Heckel). 5. Afginura.— 2150 fath. apparently ” (Haeckel). 6. Periphylla.—Surface (Fewkes). 7. Periphema.—1975 fath. (Heeckel). 8. Tesserantha.—2160 fath. (Heckel). 9. Atolla.—2040 fath. (Heckel) ; surface (Fewkes). 10. Nauphanta.—1425 fath. (Heeckel) ; surface (Fewkes). Of the above genera the ‘ Albatross’ has collected many specimens of Periphylla and Atolla from the surface of the ocean. Greely collected a species of Nauphanta from the icy waters of the surface of Lady Franklin Bay ; Periphema is so closely allied to Periphylla that we may well hesitate to accept its limitation to the great depth at which it is recorded (1975 fath.) ; Pectyllis is recorded from 200 to 600 fath. In the present use of the word deep-sea this genus can hardly be regarded as preeminently a deep-sea Medusa. There remain t Pectis (1260 fath.) and Zesserantha (2160 fath.) as that they are ancestral. They are in reality secondarily modified, for the ancestral method of development is direct, without an attached young, in Acraspeda as in Craspedota. While the primitive structure and relationship of Atolla, Nauphanta, and Nauphantopsis would seem to ally them closely to Ephyra, and stamp them as less modified than such genera as Cyanea, in certain anatomical details they might be regarded as higher even than the last mentioned. We cannot consequently draw from their simple relationship to an em- bryonic form the conclusion that they have retained that likeness on account of the simpler conditions of deep-water habitat, Nor is the argument drawn from the supposed abortion of the sense-body conclusive as far as these Meduse are concerned, although it looks plausible. * Op, ct. Introduction, p. i. + Cunarcha was “ possibly captured in drawing up the lead,’ and AZyi- nura, 2150 fath., “ apparently.” Asa bit of positive evidence that Afolla is a deep-sea Medusa, Mr. Mr. J. W. Fewkes on Deep-sea Meduse. 259 the only genera in the above list which can be regarded as purely deep-sea in their habit. Hach of these is described from single specimens, and the former is closely allied to well- known surface-genera, ‘The foundation in observation for a belief in the existence of nomadic deep-sea Meduse, as far as recorded depths go, is certainly not all that might be desired. Possibly a stronger argument for the existence of deep- sea Acraspeda may be drawn from the structure of the interesting free genus of Lucernaride (Lucernaria bathyphila, Heck.). This species is recorded from 540 fath. The fixed Lucernarie are found in shallow water. The argument drawn from the structure of the free Lucernarian would be stronger if the so-called attached species had been brought up from great depths or if Scyphostoma had been reported from the ocean bed. It is suggested that those who have in charge the collecting of deep-sea animals observe with care the contents of the dredges for attached Scyphostoma and Lucernarians, and it is particularly desirable, trom a morpho- logical standpoint, that the development of such genera as Atolla be known. If it can be shown that this and related Medusz have an indirect development, with an attached Strobila living in great depths, they may rightly be called deep-sea Medusee. A nomadic jelly-fish, limited in bathy- metrical habitat, could best fulfil its conditions of life by having a direct development without attached larval con- ditions. Why cannot we suppose that deep-sea Meduse can live at the surface and also at great depths? Why look for bathy- metrical zones in the ocean for nomadic animals? The main reason seems to be the exceptional nature of such a wide dis- tribution in places so widely separated in physical character- istics. It may be possible for a Medusa to live equally well at the surface and under a pressure of 2000 fath. of water, and in the different temperatures of these two regions ;_ but if they can endure these widely different conditions, they do not resemble other animals and their own relatives from the shallow waters. ‘The logical inference from what is known of the differences between the facies of deep-sea animals on the ocean-bottom and those from the littoral zone would seem to be true of animals which are not fixed to the ground nor Thomas Lee, who has seen the genus when collected, informed me, after I had shown him a specimen of Afolla, that he remembers it in deep- water trawls. In new collections made by the ‘ Albatross’ in 1885-86, Atolla in several instances is recorded from the ‘ surface,” and one of those described in the collections of 1883-84 is recorded from the surface. 260 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Coleoptera. dependent upon it, viz. that there are bathymetric limits in the ocean, even to nomadic animals apparently as helpless as the Meduse. In closing my short discussion of the question of deep-sea nomadic Medusan life it may be said that, as far as the data thus far gathered go, neither the recorded depths nor the structure of the genera considered demonstrates that we have a serial distribution of free Meduse in bathymetrical zones. While our present information is insufficient to answer the question, 7t seems to me that the case is much stronger than the arguments which can be advanced in its support. There is little doubt that Medusan life has bathymetrical limita- tions. Our well-known surface Medusz probably cannot live at great depths, and their places are probably taken there by others; still, until there are more exact data bearing on this conclusion, it cannot be demonstrated to be true. What is now needed is, in the first place, an accurate determination of the depth at which Medusz of different genera are cap- tured, and secondly a more accurate study of the peculiarities of anatomy and development of those which are supposed to be thus limited in habitat. It is also equally necessary that the surface-fauna should be better known for comparison. ‘There are at present a few marine stations in the Mediterranean and North Atlantic where the study of surface-life is zealously prosecuted; but it is only when the Miiller’s net has been used with equal zeal in the South Atlantic, the Indian Ocean, and Pacific that we can have a basis to work upon. An exploring vessel on a cruise through these waters is not enough. It is a reconnaissance. ‘There must be established permanent marine stations where the study will be carried on year after year for a long time in one locality. XXXL—WNew Species of Lucanide, Cetoniide, and Bupres- tides in the British Museum. By CuHarRLes O. WATER- HOUSE. Lucanide. Hexarthrius Davison?, n. sp. Color Lucant cervi et eodem sat similis, capite thoraceque magis rugosis; mandibulis elongatis, nitidis, nigris, apicem versus inclinatis, intus quadridentatis, dente basali valido. ¢. Long. 23-26 lin. ; mandib. 113-13 ln. he. gn, te Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Coleoptera. 261 Allied to H. Bowringii and of nearly the same form, but with the elytra sculptured as in Lucanus cervus, except that the suture is smooth and shining. Head very broad, a little broader than long, flatter than in H. Bowringit, very closely and moderately coarsely granular, much wider in front of the eyes than behind, where there isa slight swelling. Mandibles very obscurely granulose-punctate, much less deflexed than in most species of this genus, very straight, curving in at the apex, somewhat flat on their upper surface, vertical and flat on the outside. ‘There is a strong tooth close to the base (obliquely truncate at its apex in the larger example), a small obtuse tooth at the middle, a larger one near the apex, and a very small one close to the apex. The clypeus is deflexed, angularly produced in the middle, with a short, truncate, re- flexed lobe on each side, which gives the clypeus (when viewed from above) the appearance of being deeply emargi- nate. Thorax as in H. Lowringii, but not quite so short, very slightly narrowed in front, densely granular, the granu- lation less distinct and the surface more shining on the disk. Scutellum densely and finely punctured. Prosternal process narrow and obtusely keeled, not broad and flat, as in H. Bowringit. ti Animallai, Koimbatur (W. Davison, Esq.). Brit. Mus. Cetoniidz. Genyodonta Jacksont, n. sp. General form and colour of G. flavomaculata. Brownish yellow, the elytra with a yellow patch on each, as in flavo- maculata, not extending to the apex. Thorax with four black spots. Scutellum with two black spots. Each elytron has a distinct black spot at the base close to the scutellum. There is a black spot on the mesothoracic epimera, another on the metathoracic epimera, usually four spots on the meta- sternum, and one on the underside of the posterior femora. 3. Head as in G. flavomaculata, but with the ridge at the base of the antennz more elevated, more compressed, with its angle obtusely rounded, not nearly so porrect as in Gt. quad- ricornis. Length 114 lines. Hab. Massai, 8.E. Africa. Brit. Mus. This species may at once be distinguished from its allies by the black spot at the base of the elytra, which are more- over much smoother than in G. flavomaculata. Mr. Jackson met with this species in considerable numbers, and there is very little variation among the specimens. 262 Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Coleoptera. Macronota ochracetpes, n. sp. Nigra, supra surda, subtus nitida; capite vittis duabus, thorace vittis quatuor et punctis duobus basalibus ochraceis; elytris rubris, sutura, plaga communi quadrata mediana (medio gutta ochracea notata), vitta obliqua humerali (plaga mediana attin- gente) maculaque apicali nigris; abdominis lateribus ochraceo- maculatis, pygidio maculis tribus ochraceis ornato; clypeo, tibiis tarsisque rufo-ochraceis. Long. 10 lin. Very near to M. quadrivittata, but larger and with some- what different arrangement of colour. ‘The front of the clypeus is reddish yellow and shining, less closely punctured. The thorax is rather broader, impressed at the posterior part. The four stripes are placed nearly as in M/. quadrivittata, but they do not reach the base of the thorax, and at the base there are two short oblique spots not quite united to the two median stripes. The scutellum has a very narrow yellow border. ‘The oblique black stripe extending from the shoulder to the square patch on the suture unites with the patch in one of the examples. There is a very small yellow spot on the humeral stripe in one specimen. The spots on the pygidium are large, the middle one elongate. Antenne reddish yellow, with a black spot on the basal joint. ‘The femora are black, with the upper surface and apex reddish. ‘The anterior tibiz have two teeth besides the apical one. ‘There is a round yellow spot on the outer part of the posterior coxe. Hab, Animallai Hills, Koimbatur (W. Davison, Hsq.). Brit. Mus. Macronota flavosparsa, i. sp. Nigra, opaca; capite vittis duabus flavis; clypeo vix emarginato, margine perparum reflexo; thorace vittis quatuor maculisque baseos obliquis flavis; scutello flavo-limbato; elytris macula communi mediana, altera apicali, duabus lateralibus flavis ; cor- pore subtus nigro nitido, ad latera plus minusye flavo. Elytris vel rubris nigro-vittatis, vel totis nigris. Long. 7 jin. Very similar to M/. quadrivittata 8 in general appearance, but the two middle stripes on the thorax converge posteriorly and generally unite at a short distance from the base, where there are two separate oblique spots. The yellow stripes on the head are rather broad, and there is a rather large spot above each eye. The thorax is parallel at the sides poste- riorly, obliquely narrowed anteriorly, impressed at the basal Mr. C. O. Waterhouse on new Coleoptera. 263 lobe. The punctures on the disk are moderately close together, confluent and linear at the sides and anterior angles, yellow. The lateral stripe unites with the discoidal stripe at the front margin. The elytra are dull red, the suture, a quadrangular patch (common to both elytra) at the middle, a stripe from the humeral callosity to the middle patch, and a sublateral stripe black. ‘There is a yellow spot across the suture about the middle, a lateral spot on the margin before the middle, and a second behind the middle, and a yellow mark at the apex, which, with its companion on the other elytron, forms an a. ‘There are a few other small yellow spots scattered irregularly over the surface. The pygidium is almost entirely yellow, as are all the lateral parts of the une creide of the insect. Club of the antenne moderately ong. Variety 1, 6.—The discoidal stripes on the thorax nar- rower, the lateral ones not extended to the anterior angles of the thorax. Elytra black, with the yellow spots as in the preceding. Pygidium black, with a basal line (emitting a short line from its middle) pale yellow. Pale yellow at the sides of the underside of the insect more broken and forming transverse spots at the sides of the abdomen. Hab. Animallai Hills, Koimbatur (W. Davison, Esq.). Brit. Mus. Variety 2, ? .—Clypeus distinctly but not deeply emargi- nate, strongly punctured, the margin not reflexed. Discoidal stripes of the thorax broad, united posteriorly, and forming a V; lateral stripes not extending to the anterior angles. ‘The black on the elytra much more extensive and occupying the greater part of the surface; the lateral spots absent; the apex yellow, but the yellow does not ascend the suture. The strie near the suture are yellow. The pygidium with a very narrow basal line and a very broad central patch yellow. Underside of the insect with large yellow spots at the sides, those on the abdomen transverse and divided on the margin. Hab. French Rocks, Seringapatam (J/rs. Hamilton). Variety 3, 9 .—Like no. 2, but with the lateral stripe of the thorax nearly united with the basal spot. The elytra almost entirely red, with only two short black stripes. ‘The spots at the sides of the abdomen simple. Club of the an- tenne a trifle shorter. Hab. French Rocks. 264 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Opaque Scarlet Spherules Variety 4, ?.—Similar to no. 3, but with the discoidal stripes of the thorax uniting before the middle and continued posteriorly as one broad band to the basal spots with which it unites; the lateral stripe reduced to two very small spots. The red colour of the elytra prevails ; the yellow at the apex inconspicuous. Pygidium with an oblong spot in the middle. Abdomen with transverse spots at the sides. Hab. Koimbatur (MM. J. Walhouse, Esq.). Buprestide. Chrysochroa alternans, n. sp. C. fulgidissime affinis et similis, obscurior, creberrime fortius punc- tata, seneo-viridis, subaurata, thorace elytrisque cupreo-rufo- vittatis. Long. 17 lin. Very similar to C. fulgidissima, but less brilliant, with less golden tints ; relatively shorter and more strongly punctured throughout, especially on the disk of the thorax. The elytra. are distinctly enlarged at the middle, and are consequently less gradually narrowed to the apex, which is slightly trun- cate, the sutural angle slightly dentiform. ‘The coste are strongly marked. Hab. Loo Choo. Brit. Mus. XX XII.—On the Nature of the Opaque Scarlet Spherules found in the Chambers and Canals of many Fossilized Foraminifera. By H. J. Carrer, F.R.S. &e. In the number of the ‘Annals’ for last month (p. 172), while describing two new species belonging to the Loftusiide,, I had oceasion to lay particular stress on the presence in them, as well as in Loftusia persica, of “ opaque scarlet spherules,” which, although for the most part dispersed through the substance of the fossil, are nevertheless fre- quently to be seen in the chambers of the foraminiferal tests that have been taken in by each of these species, from which it may fairly be assumed that all had this origin ; and these spherules I have further assumed to be representa- tive of the reproductive bodies of the Foraminifera from observations which led to this conclusion (p. 177). Such found in many Fossilized Foraminifera. 265 observations, however, it was necessary to summarize briefly on that occasion, as my object then was chiefly to describe the new species of Loftusiide and not the reproductive process of the Foraminifera. But now that the former has been done I propose to return to the latter (so far as the scarlet spherules are concerned) more particularly, and for this pur- pose it seems best to describe how I came to regard the scarlet spherules as reproductive bodies, and thus recognized them in Loftusia persica. In limine, then, it should be premised that there is a small portion of Kocene formation on the western side of India, in the neighbourhood of the towns of Surat and Broach, in the province of Guzerat, which is thus described by Medlicott and Blanford in their ‘ Geology of India,’ pt. i. p. 340 (1879), viz. :—‘‘ North-west of Surat are thick beds of ferruginous clay, assuming, where exposed, the characteristic brown crust and pseudo-scoriaceous character of laterite, from which they differ in no respect.” ‘These rest on “ the traps,” and “ with them are interstratified beds of gravel or conglomerate con- taining agate pebbles (the agates being derived from the traps) and limestone, sometimes nearly pure, but more frequently sandy, argillaceous, or ferruginous, and abounding in Num- mulites and other fossils. ‘The thickness of the whole can only be roughly estimated as between 500 and 1000 feet.” From this formation, about midway between Broach and Surat and the town of Bang, at the village of Wasna or Wansa, that is about 39 miles west-north-west of Broach, the late Major Fulljames picked up some fragments, which he sent to me at the Bombay branch of the Royal Asiatic Society in the year 1853, and of which an account will be found in the ‘ Journal’ of that society (vol. v. p. 624 &c.). Some years afterwards, that is in 1861, I noticed that some of the fragments contained foraminiferal tests in a brilliantly coloured and infiltrated state, to examine which more particu- larly I broke up a piece, and from it extracted several small specimens of Nummulites and Orbitoides, which, on being ground down to a smooth surface and thus applied to a “glass slip’? by means of Canada balsam, presented under a low power of the microscope sections of unwonted structural clearness and definition, in which the whole of the complicated and delicate parts, both shelly and sarcodic, of the Foraminifera could be seen even better than in the recent specimen. I urther, they were more or less charged with the “opaque scarlet spherules ”’ in such situations that they could not be regarded as anything but fossilized parts of the recently living animal ; nor could any opinion be formed 266 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Opaque Scarlet Spherules of their nature than that they were the representatives in a mineralized state of its reproductive elements. I therefore did not hesitate to regard them as such, and so, for confirmation, gave them, in connexion with similar objects in recent specimens of Operculina, as illustrations of the repro- ductive process, probably in the Foraminifera generally (( Annals,’ 1861, vol. viil. pp. 318 and 319, 325, and 451, and pl. xvii. figs. 12-15 and 1,0). But being then in India I was not aware that Max Schultze had previously noticed and delineated similar bodies in the chambers of recent Rotalie (§Organismus der Polythalamien,’ 1854, p. 27), nor that he had shortly after, viz. two years, verified this in a species of Meliola (Miiller’s ‘ Archiv,’ 1856, Nos. 1 and 2, p- 165, Taf. vi. B). However, here I left the subject, and here it would have remained for myself had not accident thrown in my way the fossil for which I have proposed the name of ‘Stoliczkiella Theo- baldi,” wherein I was surprised to find, both dispersed through its substance and in the chambers of the enclosed foraminiferal tests themselves, red bodies similar in every respect to those observed in the Wasna specimens, as stated in the communi- cation to which I have alluded. I then sought for the same in my mounted slices of Loftusia persica, where they were equally abundant; and finally found them again equally plentiful in that species for which I have proposed the name of “ Millarella cantabrigiensis”’ (1. c.). So that, but for these coincidences and this chain of evidence, which an experience of twenty-seven years has thus brought to light, the nature of the Loftusiide in this respect might have remained unknown for a considerable time. It should be noticed here that the only coloured portions in the infiltrated specimens from Wasna are the sarcoditerous cavities and the scarlet spherules, while the shelly parts remain opaque white or transparent, as the case may be; thus the chambers and the intercameral tubes, together with the canal-system, are all more or less filled with bright ochre- yellow substance, while the reproductive bodies vary both in point of colour and size, as will be stated hereafter, but are of course most striking by contrast where composed of opaque scarlet or bright rusty-red substance, which renders their presence so peculiarly distinct in these instances that they may be counted under the microscope as easily as peas in the palm of the hand. Among the specimens of infiltrated Foraminifera from the Eocene of the locality mentioned I am enabled, trom the varied sections which they present, to select a series which found in many Fossilized Foraminifera. 267 clearly demonstrates the following facts as regards the “scarlet spherules,” viz. :— At the earliest stage in which they can be distinguished they are colourless or slightly opaque, indistinct, and situated singly in the cells of an areolar structure which fills the chamber of the Nummulite. Next they present themselves in a more defined form, of an opaque yellowish-white colour, but still adherent to each other or clustered. In a third stage they are more separated, semitransparent, and of a brown colour, recalling to mind, from their sphericity, when imbedded in clear calespar, ova in the “ hard roe of a herring.” Lastly, they present themselves as the “ opaque scarlet spherules ”’ above mentioned. In size the “scarlet spherules”” vary from 1-600th in. down to about 1-7000th in. in diameter, which is that of the interior of the intercameral tubes, in which they may be seen to be arranged linearly, by reason of the narrowness of the tubes, while in their larger forms they may also be seen in the chambers and in the vessels of the canal-system, grouped in the former, and linearly arranged if in plurality in the latter, for the same reason. But, wherever they may be, they are always confined to the sarcodiferous cavities of the test, by which they cannot be confounded with any cnorganic mineralization. In number they are most abundant where developed in the areolar tissue of the chambers, when they are of medium size, and each areolar cell appears to be tenanted by only one body ; when a little larger and in an opaque scarlet state they are less numerous, but vary much in this respect as well as in size in the chambers where they may be present, unless one or more have passed into one of the vessels of the canal- system, in which case they are from its narrowness, as before stated, single, or if in plurality linearly disposed; lastly, in their largest form, that is when 1-G600th in. in diameter, they are generally single in a chamber where there appears to be nothing else, when they may be seen to be composed of a delicate spherical capsule filled with extremely minute opaque red spherules. Under such circumstances it is hardly possible to regard these bodies otherwise than as elements of reproduction, even if we had not recent specimens (where of course they are not red, as this is the effect of mineralization) to compare them with; while they are so abundant in some specimens of these infiltrated Nummulites as to fill not only the large marginal chamber but the whole of the shoulder-like processes of this cavity, which are extended laterally on both sides of 268 Mr. H. J. Carter on the Opaque Scarlet Spherules the Nummulite up to the summit of the disk, thus according with the extremely prolific nature of these Rhizopodous animals, as indicated by the accumulation of their tests in deposits of bygone ages, as well as those of the present day, in localities where they prevail. What relation the large opaque scarlet spherule has to the smaller ones I am not able to say, nor is it my business here to inquire. Suffice it to observe that it has not yet been shown that sexual reproduction exists in the Foraminifera, on which this difference in size may be thought to bear, however clear it may be that some of the opaque scarlet bodies in their living and consequently uncoloured state may become new individuals. Another point worth noticing in the infiltrated Foraminifera of the specimens from the EKocene of Western India to which I have alluded is that they appear not only to have died in the midst of their fecundity, as many of the chambers are literally crammed with these spherules of one colour or another, but from their wonderful state of preservation gene- rally to have undergone the metamorphism of fossilization before their soft parts had passed into dissolution. Some- times, however, in some parts the red colouring-matter of the scarlet spherules appears to have become diffused, as if the material which takes the red colour in mineralization had previously been in a diffused state. Although the Foraminifera taken in by Loftusta persica, Stoliczkiella, aud Millarella do not present the brilliant colora- tion generally which renders the different structures so clear and impressive in the Wasna specimens, their forms are ren- dered recognizable by the presence of the white shelly skele- ton or test with the ‘ opaque scarlet spherules”’ not only in their cameral cavities, but scattered through the mineralized substance of all three fossil species, which, when living, appear to have fed upon them so abundantly that in some parts the structure is rendered absolutely red by their presence, at once evidencing the great fertility of the Foraminifera, as before stated, and the probable object for which they had been taken in by the Loftusta. Neither is the colour influenced in this respect by that of the deposit in which they are found im- bedded, tor that ot Lojtusva persica is in grey limestone and that of Millarella cantabrigiensis in chalk. In the other specimens of Millarella to which I have alluded (footnote, p. 180 /oc. cit.) the same kind of foraminiferal detritus is present, but there are no “scarlet spherules,” from which it must be inferred that the tests were taken in and fossilized under different circumstances, that is that they were found in many Fossilized Foraminifera. 269 not in a state of fecundity like those containing the scarlet spherules, or that the fossilization failed to render these repro- ductive bodies red. Thus the presence of these bodies in a red-coloured state is of no specific value. Moreover, I have observed them scantily here and there in Nummulites contained in a specimen of highly ferruginized yellow deposit from Upper Sind, which is almost entirely com- posed of the larger forms of the Foraminifera, while for the most part their chambers are charged with the same kind of bodies in a defined but uncoloured or whitish-yellow state, like those above mentioned in the Wasna specimens. Again, when I had discovered them in the Wasna speci- mens so wonderfully preserved, I was induced to obtain more if possible, so wrote to a friend at Broach to get me some; but all that I received in reply was a packet of Nummulites and Orbitoides, each about the size of a shilling, which cer- tainly possessed the yellow colour of the deposit, but without the presence of any of the opaque scarlet spherules or even any thing beyond the definition of structure observed in Nummulites generally. Were I to seek for specimens bril- liantly coloured, similar to those of the village of Wasna, I should be inclined to search for them in the most laterttized parts of the deposit, where they have become brick-red by the profuse diffusion of ferric oxides that characterizes this formation. In speculating as to the nature of the animal of the Lof- tusiide in the paper to which I have alluded (p. 181), I omitted to notice that at the circumference of the specimen of Millarella cantabrigiensis the structure indicates that the whole commenced in a reticulated plastic substance, in which the “pits or vacuities’”’ brought to view in the horizontal section represent the interstices, while, as the animal increased in size, this structure inwardly became more compact and then developed the “circular divisions” or inspissations represented in fig. 6 of my illustrations (pl. xiii. 2. c.). To which I would add that the so-called “ labyrinthic”’ structure of Loftusia persica may be the fossil representative of a similarly composed solid plasmic structure, although it now looks tubular. How tar these organisms may be allied to typical Fora- minifera I am not prepared to say; but of this I am certain, that if such Rhizopodous organisms are to be included among them, they should have a distinct and appropriate diagnosis. N.B.—To get a clear impression of the composition of a Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol.i. 19 270 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera. fossil under the microscope from the surface of a section it should, when not overlaid permanently by Canada balsam and a glass cover, be overlaid for the occasion by a little water and a glass cover; otherwise the roughness of the dry surface alone, however much it may be polished, will render the examination most imperfect and unsatisfactory. XXXIII.—On Longicorn Coleoptera of the Family Lamiide. By Cuarues J. GAnAN, M.A., Assistant in the Zoological Department of the British Museum. [Plate XVI. figs. 1-5.] AUTHALODES, n. g. Head of moderate size and strongly concave between its an- tennal tubercles ; the latter rather short and somewhat distant ; front convex, subequilateral. Last joint of palpi ovate-cylin- drical. Antenne scarcely longer than half the body; scape stout, subcylindrical, slightly curved, somewhat expanded at the apex, the latter with a small but distinct cicatrice ; fourth joint equal in length to the second and third united, distinctly shorter than the scape. Prothorax acutely spined at the sides and with large rounded tubercles on the disk. Elytra oblong, rough, with alternating rows of larger and smaller granules, rounded at the apex, and each elytron having at its base a small median projection. Legs subequal, the posterior a little longer than the ante- rior or middle; femora linear; middle tibiee emarginate. Pro- and mesosterna simple. Metasternum moderately elongate. This genus is allied to Trachystola, of which it has the general form, but from which it may be readily distinguished by the short third joint of its antenne, by the peculiar tuber- culation of its thorax, and the less prominent median projec- tion at the base of each elytron. Lthalodes verrucosus, n. sp. (Pl. XVI. fig. 1.) Niger, squamositate fusca indutus; antennis concoloribus; pro- thorace lateribus acute spinoso, dorso quinque tuberculis ; elytris seriato-granulatis, apicibus rotundatis. Long. 23-28 mm., lat. 10-11 mm. Hab. North China. of the Family Lamiide. 271 Black, covered (excepting the tubercles of the thorax and the summits of the granules of the elytra) with a dark brown squamosity. Head impunctate. Prothorax acutely spined at the sides, with five tubercles on the disk, of which one (median), much larger than the others, is emarginate behind and somewhat heart-shaped ; two are placed one on each side in front of this, while the remaining two, quite small and, at first sight, scarcely noticeable, lie one on each side of and close to the large median tubercle, whose free lateral borders overlap and partly conceal them. Elytra with four rows of larger and five of smaller granules on each, and in addition a short row of smaller granules on the outer margin of each extending about one third of its length from the base. The sutural row of smaller granules appears double at the base, owing to the presence of a few granules of larger size on each side of the scutellum, and extending in a curve on to the median process of the base. Epepeotes uncinatus, n. sp. (Pl. XVI. fig. 2.) Niger, viridi-griseo pubescens; capite et prothorace supra albo tri- vittatis, vitta media prothoracis angusta, evanida; elytris albo bivittatis, nigro maculatis, apicibus truncatis. Long. 14—28 mm., lat. 43-9 mm. Hab. North India. Black, with a greyish-green pubescence, which is darker on the head and prothorax. Head with three white vitte on the vertex and one behind the lower lobe of each eye. Thorax with three white vitte above, the middle one narrow and faint, and in some specimens almost entirely absent ; a white vitta on each side just above the coxa, continued on to the sides of the breast. The lateral vittee on the dorsal side of the thorax are continued on to the elytra through their entire length as two more or less distinct white bands; in some specimens these bands appear as nothing more than lighter portions of the pubescence, passing gradually into the darker shades on each side. Elytra with numerous small black spots, apices truncate, the angles not produced. Abdomen with a single row of white spots on each side. Legs and first joint of antenne coloured like the rest of the body ; the remaining joints of the antenne in the male fuscous, in the female dark grey, with their apices fuscous. Mesosternum feebly tubercled. This very distinct species bears, in the British-Museum collection, the manuscript name which I have adopted. 19* Zhe Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera Though an apparently common species, I have been unable to find any description of it. Epepeotes albomaculatus, n. sp. E. punctulato affinis, sed differt maculis elytrorum majoribus et pau- cioribus, vitta media thoracis brevi, abdomine quatuor seriebus maculorum. Long. 25-30 mm, Hab. North India. In colour and general appearance this species much re- sembles L. punctulatus, Westw. ; it is, however, a little larger, the median vitta of the thorax stops short behind at about one third of its length; the white spots on the elytra are much larger and fewer in number; they vary in size, the largest being at the middle of each elytron. The elytra are quite smooth behind and without any trace of caring, their apices are transversely truncate, with all the angles very slightly produced. Hach of the first four abdominal segments has two white spots, the fifth one spot, on each side. ‘The three specimens are apparently all females. The species (. punctulatus) referred to above is, I believe, synonymous with H. (Monohammus) guttatus, Guér., which is placed in the Munich Catalogue in the genus Huoplia. A specimen of the former in the British-Museum collection is Dejean’s Monohammus guttatus, and a second specimen of Chevrolat’s collection is ticketed guttata, Guér. To the genus Epepeotes must also be added the Monohammus lateralis, Guér. Lpepeotes meridianus, Pasc., is probably synonymous with it. Pelargoderus flavicornis,n. sp. (Pl. XVI. fig. 3.) d. Niger, griseo pubescens, fusco mixtus ; antennis corpore paulo longioribus, articulis primo et secundo nigris, ceteris flavis, apici- bus fusco-ferrugineis ; prothorace lateribus modice tuberculato ; quoque elytro pone medium macula magna, nigra, nitida; apici- bus subrotundatis. Long. 26 mm., lat. 9 mm. Hab. Nias Island. Black, with a short greyish pubescence mixed with fuscous. Antenne in the male a little longer than the body, the scape and second joint black, the remaining joints rather thick, flavous at the base and dark ferruginous at the tips. Thorax with fairly well-marked lateral spines. Elytra with a large of the Family Lamiide. 273 black shining spot on each behind the middle ; apices slightly obliquely truncate or almost rounded. Legs greyish pubes- cent; anterior tibia in the male somewhat twisted, feebly dentate along their lower border, with a distinct tooth near their tarsal end. The first two joints of the anterior tarsus in the same sex somewhat laterally expanded. Mesosternum with a small conical tubercle. This species is very distinct, almost generically so, by reason of the shortness and greater thickness of its antenna. In no other species of Pelargoderus are the antenne in the male less than twice the length of the body. The greater size of the spots on its elytra and the lighter colour of its antenne are also marks which will easily differentiate it from other species. Monohammus rivulosus (Pasc. MS8.), n. sp. Omnino pubescens, punctis dispersis nonnullis elytrorum exceptis ; capite, prothorace, cruribus et corpore subtus griseis; elytris brunneis albo vittatis; antennis griseis, articulis a tertio apicibus fuscis. Long. 18-26 mm., lat. 6-9 mm. Hab. North India (Assam) and Laos. Head, thorax, the underside of the body, and the legs dark grey and somewhat glossy. Antenne grey, with the tips of « the third to the last joint dark brown. ‘The elytra are of a light brown colour, streaked with dull white; one broad streak sets out from the shoulders, and, after passing ob- liquely inwards, runs close to and parallel with the suture for the rest of its distance; posteriorly a very narrow stripe of brown divides it into two ; in addition to these there are two narrow stripes of white posteriorly, all uniting towards the apex, and a short white streak below the shoulder. The elytra are minutely punctured and have also some large, widely scattered, shallow punctures, which give them a some- what spotted appearance. The apices are rounded. Monohammus ciliatus, n. sp. ®neo-niger, sparse ochraceo-pubescens, prothorace brevi, lateribus fortiter spinosis, spinis recurvis; elytris punctulatis, ad basin minute granulatis, apicibus rotundatis, angulis suturalibus leviter productis ; antennis fuscis, subtus ciliatis. Long. 27 mm., lat. 9 mm. Hab. China. Black, with an ochraceous pubescence entirely covering 274 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera the head, legs, and underside of the body, but limited to more or less confluent spots on the thorax and elytra. The head deeply and triangularly concave between the antennal tu- bereles, and longitudinally suleate. Thorax much _ broader than long, the lateral spines very long and directed somewhat backwards, very closely and finely punctured on the disk, the latter with a slight median lobe or swelling near its base just in front of and faintly projecting over the posterior transverse groove. Elytra very finely granulate at the base, the granules replaced behind by very close and somewhat fine punctures, which extend almost to the apex; the latter rounded, with the sutural angles very slightly produced. The last two joints of the antenne are broken off in the two specimens under observation ; the remaining nine are together about as long as the body, the scape and second joint are covered with an ochreous pubescence, the other joints show a trace of pubes- cence above, and all are fringed with hairs beneath. Both specimens are, I believe, females. The ciliate antenne and the rather short prothorax, with its long and recurved lateral spines, are characters which make the species doubtfully a Monohammus. Haplohammus speciosus, n. sp. Pube olivaceo-aurea velutina tectus ; capitis fronte sparse et minute punctulata; prothorace haud levi, antice et postice transverse bisulcato ; elytris minute subseriatim punctulatis, apicibus sub- rotundatis. Long. 15-23 mm., lat. 5-8 mm. Hab. China and Hong Kong. Completely covered with a dense, golden-olive, velvety pubescence, with shades varying in different lights. The pubescence is as bright on the under as on the upper side of the body, is less bright on the legs, and is rather dull on the front of the head and on the basal joint of the antenne. A narrow median impressed line along the face and occiput. Cicatrice of scape pubescent, its margin not quite complete. Bases of third to eleventh antennal joints yellowish brown, clothed with a faint grey pubescence (denser in the female), the apices fuscous ferruginous. The prothorax appears slightly uneven on the disk; but this is chiefly due to the ruffled-looking pubescence; it has four transverse grooves, two anteriorly, of which one is very close to the anterior bor- der, and two posteriorly ; a faint median lobe or process abuts slightly on the anterior of the two latter grooves. A few punctures on each side of the middle of the disk. Elytra of the Family Lamiide. 275 smooth, minutely and somewhat seriately punctured, the punctures visible only on the basal half. Apices somewhat angular, almost rounded. Anterior femora, especially in the male, stouter than the posterior pairs. The only described species with which the present one might be confused are MW. permutans and M. vicinus of Pascoe, yet from these it is very distinct. In each of these two species the legs are varied with brown, the prothorax above is more punctured, and the transverse grooves are scarcely distinct, while the elytra are coarsely enough granulate at the base, with small black granules. hey are, taken altogether, much coarser-looking species. Haplohammus socius, n. sp. H, specioso simillimus, sed differt colore pallidiore, capitis fronte impunctata, prothorace paulo longiore, leviore. Long. 19-21 mm., lat. 6-7 mm. Hab. China. Very like the last species, but with a paler and somewhat silvery pubescence. he front of the head impunctate ; the prothorax somewhat longer than in spectosus, more even on the disk, with an appearance of a faint longitudinal median ridge, the transverse grooves less distinct, but still quite apparent. Dihammus spinipennis, n. sp. Griseo-fusco pubescens ; antennis concoloribus, ¢ longissimis, scapo minute et sparse nigro-maculato; prothorace supra inequali, minute granuloso, subtus plicato ; elytris ad humeros rectis, api- cibus truncatis, angulis externis valde spinosis. Long. 32-34 mm., lat. 11-12 mm. Hab. New Caledonia. Brownish grey; the antennal tubercles in front, the scape of the antenne, the underside of the body, and the legs with minute scattered black spots, due to punctures, from each of which springs a short white bristle. Head with its sides and vertex darker than its front. Prothorax somewhat uneven on the disk, with numerous very small black granules on each side and extending on to the lateral spines. Scutellum pale, with a narrow black line in the middle. Elytra straight at the shoulders, minutely punctured throughout, apices trun- cate, with the outer angles strongly spined, the sutural angles not produced. ‘he anterior tibiz in the male slightly toothed near their tarsal end. First joint of anterior tarsus in the 276 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera male long, and produced on its outer side into a spur. Smaller than longicornis, Thoms., and distinguished, inter alia, by the long spines to the elytra. Cyriocrates Waterhouser, n. sp. (Pl. XVI. fig. 4.) Niger, squamosa pubescentia viridi-cerulea; prothorace supra eequali, macula longitudinali nigra subdepressa media; elytris ad basin granulis parvis, nigris, maculorum nigrorum tribus seriebus transversis; antennis 2 corpore paulo brevioribus, articulis basal- ibus viridi-ceeruleis, cxteris nigris. Long. 27 mm., lat. 11 mm. Hab. Nias Island. Excepting a longitudinal black spot on the thorax and three (or four) series of spots on the elytra, the body is entirely covered with a bluish-green squamous pubescence, somewhat iridescent on parts. Head, including the labrum and base of the mandibles, entirely bluish green, with a very faint longi- tudinal median line on the face and vertex. Antenne in the female a little shorter than the body; the scape, second joint, and bases of the third and fourth joints blue, the rest black. Prothorax with strong and sharp lateral spines; the disk smooth. Elytra with some small black granules at the base, with three transverse, somewhat anteriorly curved bands, each made up of eight quadrate black spots. (In a second speci- men there is a fourth indefinite band, which may have been due to rubbing.) From each of the minute and scattered punctures of the elytra there springs ashort black hair; these hairs, of which there are a few also on the prothorax, are only visible when looked at sideways. Legs coloured like the rest of the body; the middle tibize, fringed, like the posterior, with black hairs on their lower outer border, are but very faintly emarginate. In colour and markings resembles Monohammus Bowring?, White, but is otherwise very distinct. I have named this fine species after my colleague, Mr. C. O. Waterhouse, to whose help and guidance I owe much. Aristobia angustifrons, n. sp. Pallide griseo-pubescens, nigro maculata et plagiata; oculorum lobis inferioribus grossissimis, approximatis; antennis nigro-annulatis, articulis primo, tertio et quarto apice villosis; prothorace supra of the Family Lamiide. 277 vix insequali, maculis nigris parvis plurimis, lateribus spinis longis, acutis; elytris nigro plagiatis, apicibus emarginatis. Long. 37 mm., lat. 13 mm. Hab. Siam. Clothed with a pale grey pubescence, having spots and patches of black. Head with very large eyes, and conse- quently a narrow front; vertex longitudinally sulcate. Scape of the antenne faintly grey at the base, the apex black and with a small tuft of black hairs ; the second and bases of the following joints pale grey, their apices black ; third joint at its apex with a tuft of black hairs almost entirely sur- rounding it, the fourth also slightly villose at its extremity. Head and thorax above thickly dotted with small black spots. Elytra granulate at the base; a black patch covering the shoulders and extending inwards almost as far as the scutel- lum, the latter dark grey ; four velvety black spots or patches along the margin of each elytron, the largest at the middle, and four spots on each along the suture. The body under- neath grey, each of the first four abdominal segments with a black nitid spot in the middle and two smaller spots on each side. The femora ringed with black at the ends, pale grey in the middle. Tibiz with a small black patch near the tarsal end; the tarsi black, slightly mixed with grey. By its very large and approximate eyes this species differs from most species of the genus; in this, as in some other respects, it seems to come close to A. Voetit, ‘Thoms. Celosterna (Lamia) pulchellator, Westwood, which appears in the Munich Catalogue under Batocera, has been referred by Ritsema to the genus Psaromada, while it is redescribed and figured by Aurivillius as Huoplia argenteo-maculata (‘ Entomologisk Tidskrift,’ 1887). Its true affinity is with the species C. yavana and C. plagiata. Monohammus carissimus, Pasc., is a Coelosterna, for which C. tessellata, White, is a synonym. Celosterna imitator, White, is a Cyriocrates, and closely enough allied to C. Horsfieldi, Hope. Rhaphidopsis (Hutenia) elegans, Waterh., is a Calosterna. Calosterna trifasciella, White, is the type of the following genus. EUTANIOPSIS, n. g. Head broadly concave between the antennal tubercles ; front rectangular, broader than long. Inferior lobes of the 278 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera eyes rather small, reaching not more than halfway to the base of the mandibles. Antenne in the male a little longer than the body, in the female somewhat shorter; scape stout, thickest in the middle, with a broad and completely margined cicatrice at the apex; third joint longer than the scape, he fourth and following joints gradually decreasing in length and thickness. Prothorax subtransverse, somewhat swollen in the middle, narrower behind than in front of the lateral median spines. Elytra rather narrow, oblique at the shoulders, with their sides parallel and apices rounded. Legs with the femora rather thick in the middle; the middle tibize entire ; the claws of the tarsi broadly divergent. The sternal processes are simple, the mesosternal narrowly truncate behind and not pointed. The anterior coxal cavities incompletely closed in behind. Owing to its distinct and completely margined cicatrice this genus must be placed in the Monohammus-group, in which it may come after Caelosterna. From the latter genus it is easily distinguished by its narrower form, its smaller eyes, and broader front, its elytra oblique at the shoulders, and its ante- rior coxal cavities open behind. Type £. trifasciella, White (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1850, p. 18, pl. xi. fig. 1). A somewhat variable species from China, Hong Kong, N. India, and Penang. Thomson apparently confounded this species with his Eutenia Javetii. In his description of Hutenia he gives Javetii as the type; but subsequently trfasciata, White, is given as the type, and Javetéi as a synonym. I have no doubt that tr¢fasctata was written in error for tr¢fasciella, and I feel almost as certain that Thomson was wrong in his identification of that species. At any rate his description of Eutenia is quite inapplicable to trifasciella, White. HAPLOTHRIX, n. g. Of the somewhat elongated form and general appearance of the genus Goes. Head as in Monohammus; antenne (male) more than half as long again as the body ; scape rather long and slender, with a narrow and completely margined cicatrice; the third joint a little longer than the scape, the fourth to tenth decreas- ing in length, the eleventh nearly twice as long as the tenth. Prothorax rather small, laterally spined. of the Family Lamiide. 279 Legs of equal length; the femora sublinear ; middle tibia without the slightest trace of tubercle or notch. Sternal processes simple and rather narrow ; the anterior coxal cavities distinctly open behind *. This last character, in conjunction with the entire median tibiz and the rather narrow sternal processes, will sufficiently distinguish the genus amongst the group of the Monoham- mids; there is only one other genus of the group (Huteniopsis, described in the present paper) in which the anterior coxal cavities are open behind; from this genus it is very distinct. May be placed after Mecynitppus and Goes. Haplothriz simpler, n. sp. (Pl. XVI. figs. 5 & 5 a.) Omnino dense brunneo-griseo pubescens; antennis concoloribus, scapi cicatrice pubescente ; prothorace supra equali, spinis lateral- ibus ad basin angustis ; elytris elongatis, lateribus subparallelis, apicibus rotundatis ; segmento abdominis quinto ( ¢) ad apicem media fovea. Long. 26 mm., lat. 8 mm. Hab. Siam. The whole of the body, the legs, and antenne covered with a unicolorous, dense, drab-grey pubescence. The head im- punctate. The prothorax smooth above, the lateral spines rather narrow at the base; the elytra very minutely punc- tured, the punctures scarcely visible through the pubescence. The legs all very similar in size and form. The last seg- ment of the abdomen in the male is slightly emarginate at the apex, and has, just in front of this emargination, a deep and somewhat transverse depression. Pharsalia alboplagiata, n. sp. P. vinosa affinis, sed major ; prothorace omnino ochraceo, impunctato, antice et postice transverse sulcato; elytris lateribus ante medium * In the treatment of the Lamiide this character of the coxal cavities, so useful in other families, has been hitherto neglected. Lacordaire, indeed, in his introductory account of the family, states that the anterior coxal cavities are constantly closed behind. I have shown that there are exceptions to this rule in the Monohammus-group. In the Batocera- group of Lacordaire the character is of greater importance, for by means of it the genera may conveniently be subdivided into two groups, in one of which the coxal cavities are open behind, in the other closed. The former includes Latocera and all the genera which most closely resemble Batocera in their organization, viz. Apriona, Megacriodes, and Rosen- bergta. 280 Mr. C. J. Gahan on new Longicorn Coleoptera. albo-plagiatis, apicibus rotundatis ; antennis fuscis, tenuiter griseo- pubescentibus. Long. 21 mm., lat. 7 mm. Hab. Borneo. Head with an ochraceous-grey pubescence and with a faint longitudinal raised line on the front. Prothorax with a short transverse depression on the middle of the disk. Elytra without basal crests, roughly punctured at the base, the punc- tures becoming smaller as they pass backwards ; the basal part, especially around the scutellum, and the scutellum itself with an ochreous pubescence ; a large white, somewhat broken patch on each side in front of the middle; towards the apex the pubescence is again ochreous. The whole of the under- side of the body, except along the middle of the abdomen, ochraceous. The legs entirely ochraceous grey. Excepting vicina, Pasc., this is the only described species of the genus in which the elytra are without basal crests. Pharsalia pulchra, n. sp. P. mortali affinis ; prothorace supra flavo-variegato, scutello flaves- cente; elytris nigro-velutinis, flavo maculatis et fasciatis. Long. 233 mm., lat. 9 mm. Hab. Siam. Closely allied to Pharsalia (Zygocera) mortalis, Thoms., with which it agrees very well in its structural details. It is, however, distinct enough by the colour and pattern of its markings. At the base of the elytra is a flavous band well intermingled with black; just in front of the middle is a tolerably broad transverse flavous band, which is interrupted and mingled with black near the suture. ‘Towards the apex there are three or four irregular flavous spots on each elytron, and some smaller spots in front of them near the suture. The markings on the head are similar to those of mortalts. Pharsalia (Zygocera) mortalis, Thoms. This species occurs twice in the Munich Catalogue, once under the genus Callipyrga and again as Cereopsius saga (Dejean’s Cat.). Recently (Notes Leyd. Mus. vol. ix. 1887) it has been fully described and referred to its true genus by Van de Poll under the name albomaculata. Rosenbergia eaigqua, n. sp. . Parva, nigra, pube grisea tecta; antennis corpore paulo longi- Mr. A. 8. Woodward on the Dentition of Rhinoptera. 281 oribus, scapo apice leviter ruguloso; elytris griseis ochraceo mixtis, granulis maculisque parvis, nigris, nitidis, numerosis ; apicibus truncatis, angulis productis. Long. 32 mm., lat. 10 mm. Hab. New Guinea. Pubescence dull leaden grey on the head and thorax, light grey on the underside of the body, somewhat darker on the legs, and a light grey mixed with ochreous on the elytra. Head somewhat large; eyes large and subapproximate; a median impressed line on the face and vertex. Superior lobes of the eyes margined behind on the vertex with minute black dots. Antenne with the scape rather stout, somewhat rugose towards the apex, as in species of Aprioua; first to third joints and base of fourth grey, the rest sooty brown. Prothorax with two transverse wrinkles in front of the middle, the lateral spines scarcely directed upwards and not constricted at the base. Elytra with a very small trans- versely directed tooth at each shoulder, with numerous small, black, scarcely raised granules near the base; posteriorly these granules are replaced by spots which extend almost to the apex. The latter transversely truncate, with the angles produced into short spines, the outer spines very slightly longer than the sutural. Much smaller and otherwise distinct from any of the species of the genus hitherto described. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVI. Frias. 1-5. Fig. 1. Atthalodes verrucosus. Fig. 2. Epepeotes uncinatus. Fig. 3. Pelargoderus flavicornis. Fig. 4. Cyriocrates Waterhouset, Figs. 5 & 5a. Haplothrix simplex. XXXIV.—WNote on an Abnormal Specimen of the Dentition of Rhinoptera. By ] } (PI. XXI. figs. 15-17.) In figs. 15 and 16 the superficial isolated prickles are exaggerated into somewhat concentric rows of large and small spines, directed backwards on the posterior and for- wards on the anterior part of the valve, and less regularly arranged tubercles occupy the inner slope of the hinder or gigot-lobe. The middle lobe is distinct, as in all the other specimens of these Beyrichiw ; but the hinder lobe is no longer rounded and divided crosswise, and the front lobe is also obsolete or shapeless and overgrown with tubercles. Fig. 17 has a still more extreme variation in its concentric overlapping growths of leaf-like, coarsely denticulated expan- sions over the hinder lobe, which retains the dorsal projec- tion, seen also in figs. 12-15. The middle lobe is distinct and smooth; the front lobe is smooth and low above, but prominent and partially tuberculate in its lower moiety. The originals of figs. 12-17 are well-preserved white speci- mens from the Uppermost Silurian strata of Slite, Gothland. VI. LeperpiiiA, Rouault, 1851. (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. xvii. 1856, p. 84, and ser. 5 vol. vill. 1881, p. 333 &c.; Proc. Geol. Assoc. vol. ix. 1886, p. 503.) J 1. Leperditia grandis, Schrenck. (BLOOM. tes. a, fd.) (Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 3.) This Leperditia is evidently a small individual of Z. gran- dis, as described and figured by Fr. Schmidt in the Mém. Acad. Imp. Sci. St.-Pétersb. sér. 7, vol. xxi. 1873, p. 10, figs. 1-Ga. According to him it is the same as FI’. Rémer’s L. gigantea. This right valve, figured in the drawings sent from Stock- holm, shows distinctly at its ventral margin the two minute 404 Prof. T. R. Jones on the pits, which Fr. Schmidt describes as perforating the valve ; here, however, they appear to be only shallow pits. From the lowest limestone beds of C&stergarn. VII. Tuipsura, Jones & Holl, 1869. (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iii. p. 213.) 1. Thlipsura v-scripta, J. & H., var. discreta, Jones. (Pl. XX4aT. figs. 9a, 95, 9c, 10.) Thlipsura v-scripta, J. & F., var. discreta, Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Goth- land, 1887, p. 6. This species was described and its British variety figured in 1869 by Jones & Holl (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. ii. p. 214, pl. xv. fig. 3). See also op. cit. ser. 5, vol. xix. p. 403. In the Swedish variety, of which about fifty specimens form part of the series sent to me in 1886, the front sulcus is oblique, being not quite perpendicular, and those on the hinder half of the valve keep slightly apart, not closing together to form the letter V completely. There is also aslight, curved, convex ridge within and parallel to the posterior margin; but it is not always well developed. Dr. Krause has figured this variety as Primitia minuta (Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Ges. vol. xxix. p. 38, pl. i. fig. 19). Abundant in the shale of Frojel. VIII. Primiria, Jones & Holl, 1865. (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xvi. p. 415.) 1. Primitia levis, Jones. (Pl. XXII. figs. 12 a, 120.) Primitia levis (parte), Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 4. This is a smooth, subtriangular, somewhat Leperditioid form, straight on the back, rounded at the ends, but one of them much higher (broader) than the other. It appears to be new. The only group to which I can refer it is that of the smooth Primitie, such as P. matutina, semicircularis, obsoleta, ovata, and oblonga, in pl. xiii. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. xvi. p. 423 &c. It is convex mainly in the postero-ventral region. Its contact-edges are bevelled in- wards, except along the straight edge, which seems to be the back and hinge-line. It would more closely resemble P. obso- leta, J. & H., if it were shorter and less compressed anteriorly. Edge-view (fig. 12 6) narrow-ovate. Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 405 This may be provisionally known as P. levis. Though the smooth Primitie pass by gradation into the suleate forms, possibly a subgeneric term might be usefully applied to them. So far as its outline is concerned P, devis much resembles Leperditia tyraica, Fr. Schmidt; but its internal edges are not those of Leperditia, nor has it the special surface-charac- ters of that genus. Only two specimens (from the shale of Fréjel) were among those sent in 1886. 2. Primitia stricta, sp. nov. (Pl. XXII. figs. 13 a, 13 6.) Primitia levis (parte), Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 4. More compressed than fig. 12, and with less height at the posterior third, this unique specimen is more oblong in outline, with parallel sides. Hdge view (fig. 136) narrow oblong, but acute in front and rounded behind. From Fréjel, in 1886. In shape this approximates to Primitia variolata, J. & H. (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. xvi. p. 418, pl. xiii. fig. 6) ; but it is not so evenly rounded at the ends and has neither the sulcus nor the punctation. It is smooth, like the little P. matutina, J. & H. (loc. cit. fig. 7), but differs from it in shape. 3. Primitia valida, J. & H. Primitia valida, J. & ., Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xvii. 1886, . 409, pl. xiv. fig. 7, and vol. xix. p. 198, pl. vi. fig. 7; Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 4. In the Swedish specimens (of which twenty-four were sent in 1886) the reticulation of the surface is much more definite than in the British examples. ‘There is also a distinct row of minute denticles along the ventral edge of each valve in many of the Swedish specimens. From Fréjel. 4. Primitia grandis, Jones. (Pl. XXIL figs. 14a, 148, 14¢.) Primitia grandis, Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 4. One of the drawings sent from Stockholm shows a beauti- ful, large, suboblong, reticulate Primitia without a sulcus. It is near P. valida, J. & H., and, indeed, in one of the varieties of that species the sulcus is obsolete, namely var. breviata (op. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol... 28 406 Prof. T. R. Jones on the cit. pl. xiv. fig. 8). The ventral margin of P. grandis has a delicate punctation, due apparently to the meshes of the ornamental network coming against the raised marginal rim. From Fréjel. 5. Primitia reticristata, Jones. (Pl. XXII. figs. 15 a, 156, 15 ¢.) Primitia reticristata, Jones, Silur, Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 5. This is closely allied to P. cristata, J. & H. (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. xvi. 1865, p. 420, pl. xiii. fig. 1). It differs, however, somewhat in outline, being more semicircular in its contour, and especially in having a beautifully reticulate surface. About twelve specimens were among those sent in 1886. From Frojel. 6. Primitia seminulum, Jones. (PIXE: figs. 1i-a,217 b.) Primitia seminulum, Jones, Silur, Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 5. This is a variety of P. seminulum, J. (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xvii. p. 413 for references, pl. xiv. fig. 14). It is slightly modified, being rather longer than the British specimens. ‘Three or four among the specimens sent in 1886. From Fréjel. IX. Primitiopsis, Jones, 1887. Primitiopsis, Jones, Silur, Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 5. This is like Primitia externally, except that the anterior end has a specially smooth area, corresponding with an internal portion, which is partitioned off from the rest of the cavity by a cross wall. 1. Primitiopsis planifrons, Jones. (Pl. XXII. figs. 18a, 183, 18c, 18d.) Primitiopsis planifrons, Jones, op. cit. p. 5, woodcuts. Suboblong, with rounded ends; bearing a faint sulcus, to- gether with the subcentral pit, which is normal in Primitia ; also another slight furrow is observable in the anterior dorsal region. The convexity is greatest along the ventral region, as is usually the case with Primitie of the group to which Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 407 P. umbilicata, P. valida, and their allies belong; and the ventral convexity, overhanging the margin, hides the con- tinuous row of denticles which borders each valve. The sur- face is reticulate except at the anterior end. The interior of each valve has a thin cross wall in the anterior region, dividing off about an eighth of the length of the valve from the rest of the interior. This constitutes the generic distinc- tion. The narrow crescentic area of surface, corresponding to the separated portion of the interior, being destitute of ornament and therefore smooth, gives the specific name. There are eight or nine individuals (from the soft shale- beds of Fréjel) among the specimens sent from Stockholm in It is correct to take the smooth end of Primitiopsis for the anterior, because that end has its analogue in the structure of the recent Chlamydotheca, Saussure, although in this living form the partition of the anterior portion is not always so com- plete, and its outside not so distinctly differentiated from the rest of the surface, as in our Paleeozoic specimens. 1*. Primitiopsis planifrons, var. ventrosa, Jones. (Pl. XXII. figs. 19 a, 196, 19 c.) Promitiopsis planifrons, var. ventrosa, Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 6. This is closely allied to the last described, but is remark- able for the relative convexity of its ventral region, its less height, and increased dorsal hollow, making it narrow-oblong and subcylindrical in shape. Only one specimen occurred among those sent in 1886, from Frdjel. X. Entomis, Jones, 1861. (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xi, 1873, p. 413.) 1. Entomis Lindstremi, Jones. (Pl. XXIL. figs. 16 a, 16 3.) Entomis Lindstremi, Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 3. An Entomis closely related to others already known, but distinct from them all. It is ovate-oblong ; rounded at the ends unequally, ellipti- cally curved below, and nearly straight above. The sulcus is straight and strong, a little in advance of the middle of the valve. The hinder moiety of the valve is fully convex, steep 28* 408 Prof. T. R. Jones on the behind, and sloping forward into the suleus; the front part is not so much swollen and slopes down to the anterior margin. This form is near to EL. dimidiata, Barrande (Syst. Sil. Boh. vol. i. Suppl. p. 513, pl. xxiv. figs. 7, 8, 9), but it is longer, more oblong, and not so convex. L, pelagica, Barr. (ibid. figs. 1-6), is a near ally, but it is too convex and has a tubercle. Among other allies are EH. tubervsa, Jones, and E. depressa, Salter (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xiv. pp. 891 and 394, pl. xv. figs. 1, 5, 6, 7, and figs. 2-3), but the relative convexities, conditions of sulcus, and other fea- tures distinguish them. . reniformis (Kolmodin) and HE. Angelini, Jones (op. cit.), are far too round and globose, and the sulcus differs also. I may here remark that Hntomis Marstoniana (op. cit. fig. 8) is possibly the same as Kolmodin’s /. rendformis (City. K. Vet.-Akad. Férhandl. vol. xxxvi. 1880, p. 135, pl. xix. fig. 2). ” Some six or eight specimens of H. Lindstrami were found in the uppermost limestone of Linde klint (cliff or hill) and Sandarfve kulle (top or hillock). Length nearly 4 millim. 2. Entomis inequalis, Jones. (Pl. XXII. figs. 20 a, 20 6, 20c.) Prinutia inequalis, Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 5. This is a peculiar and relatively large valve, having a Pri- mitian character in its reticulate ornament and being Ento- midian in its sulcation. This last feature is very strongly marked, and indeed, | think, exaggerated by pressure, making the two moieties of the valve very unequal in both size and convexity. One is much more swollen than the other and overhangs the ventral and part of the antero-ventral margin ; this larger moiety extending forwards below, and thus lessen- ing the area of the front moiety. The sulcus reaches the ventral margin, as in Entomidella -and Bolbozoe*, but its extent and peculiar sigmoidal curve are most probably partly due to pressure. The hinge-line of the valve is straight within (that is, below the dorsal exten- sions of the two moieties of the valve) ; the front margin has a strong dorsal angle, is boldly curved below it, and edged with a raised rim and minute denticles. The postero-dorsal angle has been broken away. The specimen is unique, among those sent from Stockholm in 1886, and, like most of these, was from Fréjel. * See Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. December 1884, pp. 400 and 401. Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 409 XI. AdcuminaA, Jones & Holl, 1869. (Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. iii. p. 217.) 1. Aehmina bovina, Jones. (Pl. XXII. fig. 8.) Achmina bovina, Jones, Aun, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xix. p. 412, pl. xii. fig. 6. Some drawings sent from Stockholm, and of one of which fig. 8 is a copy, show a form identical with the British species from the Wenlock Shale, but more delicately toothed along the free margin. It is common in the shale of Fréjel, Goth- land, also belonging to the Wenlock series. XII. BursuLevua *, Jones, 1887. (Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 7.) This is a small, bivalved, probably Ostracodal form, with more or less triangular valves, which have one or two horn- like projections on the ventral edge ot each valve. 1. Bursulella triangularis, Jones. (Pl. XXII. figs. 5, 6.) Bursulella triangularis, Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 7, woodcuts. The upper and lower edges of the valves are straight, but the ventral edge is much shorter than the other, and a delicate spike projects from each of its angles. The corners of each valve are somewhat rounded and on the lower edge are marked inside with a series of shallow pits, making a slightly crenate contact-line. In outline this curious bivalve, which is probably an Ostracod, looks like a little subtriangular purse (hence the generic name), widest at the top, and ornamented below with two neat little projections. It occurs in the Cephalopodan Limestone of Samsugn, in Othem, and the uppermost beds of Slite, some twenty speci- mens having been found. 2. Bursulella semiluna, Jones. (Pl. XXII. figs. 4a, 46, 4c.) Bursulella semiluna, Jones, Silur. Ostrac. Gothland, 1887, p. 7. Here the valves have a nearly semicircular ventral outline * Bursa, a purse ; bursula, a little purse; bursulella, a very little purse. 410 Prof. T. R. Jones on the and a straight dorsal edge, with blunt angles. On each valve two short spikes project from the ventral edge. This is cre- nated within with small regular pits, making a neatly serrated junction ; the pairs of spikes, opposite one to the other, close against each other when the valves are shut. Seen sideways this fossil looks like a little halfmoon-shaped equal-ended boat, standing on its convex edge, with two pointed feet instead of a keel. From the Rhizophyllum-beds of Lau, where it seems to be rare. 3. Bursulella unicornis, Jones. (Pl. XXII. fig. 7.) Bursulella unicornis, Jones, Silur. Ostrae, Gothland, 1887, p. 7. Valve triangular, with its dorsal corners rounded and its ventral border narrowing into a long subcylindrical spike. A few specimens have been found in the shale of Fréjel and the Cephalopodan Limestone of Samsugn and Slite. Note-—My friend Professor Lindstrém has sent me for examination several small Entomostraca which he obtained lately from a red clay at Wisby, Gothland, belonging to the red marl-shales at the base of Stricklandinia-marls (equiva- lent to the Upper Llandovery) in Gothland. Among them there is a Beyrichia Kledeni (with hypertrophied front lobe), Polycope, sp., Leperditia, small sp., Batrdia(?), Pontocypris Mawitt, P. Smithit, Bythocypris, spp., Cythere subquadrata (?), and some probably undescribed species. ‘These specimens are from the basement of the lowest known Silurian strata of Gothland. Jote.— Whilst this paper was in the press I received from Herr J. Kiesow, of Dantzic, a paper on some Beyrichie from Gothland, published in the Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Ges. Jahrg. 1888. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. PuaTE XXI, [ All the figures are magnified 15 diameters. ] Fig. 1. Klaedenia apiculata, nov. a, right valve; 6, edge view; c, end view. Fig. 2. The same. Left valve. Fig. 3. The same. Left valve. Fig. 4. The same. a, left valve, with the antero-ventral lobe hyper- trophied ; b, edge view ; ¢, end view. Fig. Fig. Fug. Fig. Fug. Fug. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fug. Eg. Fxg. Paleozoic Bivalved Entomostraca. 411 5. The same. Right valve, somewhat damaged. 6. Beyrichia clavata, Kolmodin. Left valve. 7. The same, Right valve. 8. The same. Right valve. 9. The same. Left valve; antero-ventral lobe hypertrophied ; pos- tero-dorsal angle broken. 10. Beyrichia Bollhiana, var. umbonata, Reuter. Left valve. 11. The same. Right valve. 12. Beyrichia tuberculata (Kléden). Old individual, damaged, the antero-dorsal portion having been crushed. 13. Beyrichia tuberculata, var. spicata, noy., or possibly a very old individual of B. tuberculata (Kloden), Left valve, broken. 14. Beyrichia tuberculata, var. spicata, nov. Right valve. 15. Beyrichia tuberculata, vay. foliosa, nov. Left valve. 16. The same. Right valve. 17. The same, Extreme variation; right valve. PLATE XXII. [All the figures are magnified 15 diameters, excepting those marked otherwise. | . 1. Macrocypris Vinei, J. & H. a, carapace, showing the left valve ; b, edge view ; ¢, end view. Fig. 2. The same. Right valve, shorter specimen. Fig. 3. Pontocypris Mawii, J. & H. a, right valve; 6, edge view of a valve ; c, end view of carapace. Fig. 4. Bursulella semiluna, J. a, side view of carapace; 6, ventral edge ; e, end view. Magnified 30 diam. Fig. 5. Bursulella triangularis, J. Side view. Magnified 30 diam. Fig. 6. The same. Interior of valve. Magnified 50 diam. Fig. 7. Bursulella unicornis, J. Side view. Magnified 30 diam. Fig. 8. Atchmina bovina, J. Side view. Magnitied 30 diam. Fig. 9. Thlipsura v-scripta, J. & H., var. discreta, J. a, side view of carapace, showing right valve; >, edge view. Fig. 10. The same. Left valve. Fig. 11. Leperditia grandis, Schrenck. a, right valve, small, nat. size ; b, one of the marginal pits, magnified. Fig. 12. Primitia levis, J. a, left valve of carapace; b, edge view of carapace, Fig. 13. Primitia stricta, J, a and b as above. Fig. 14. Primitia grandis, J. a, carapace, showing left valve; 6, ventral view; c, end view. Magnified 30 diam. Fig, 15. Primitia reticristata, J, a, carapace, showing right valve; b, dor- sal view; c, end view. Fig. 16. Entonus Lindstremi, J. a, left valve; 6, dorsal edge. Mag- nified 5 diam. Fig. 17. Primitia seminulum, J. a, right valve; 6, dorsal view. Fig. 18. Primitiopsis planifrons, J. a, left valve ; b, dorsal view ; c, edge view of carapace; d, interior of left valve. . 19. Primitiopsis planifrons, var. ventrosa, J. a, right valve; 6, dor- sal edge ; c, end view of carapace. . 20. Entomis inequalis, J. a, right valve, probably somewhat short- ened by pressure ; 0, dorsal edge; c, front end. 412 Mr. R. Kidston on the Fructification and LIV.—On the Fructification and Affinities of Archeopteris hibernica, Forbes, sp. By Rozpert Kipston, F.R.S.E., EGS.” Unper the name of Cyclopteris hibernica, Archeopteris hibernica was described by Forbes in 1852+} from the Yellow Sandstones of the south of Ireland, where, at Kiltorkan and a few other localities, this fern is one of the most character- istic fossils. In 1858 t¢ Mr. W. H. Baily, in describing the fructification of Archeopteris hibernica, Forbes, sp., said that “one of the fertile pinnules of a specimen showed the spores were aggre- gated into clusters or sori, and that the indusium or protecting cover had been but little broken up. A fertile pinnule from another specimen, however, appeared to be in a more ad- vanced stage, losing in a great measure the aggregated character of the sori, and showing the proteeting cases (which were granulated) to be much disturbed. “(ther specimens in the collection were alluded to, one of which, with a length of 16 inches, had twelve pinnules on each side of the rachis in full fructification without any appearance of leaflets, the spore-cases being scattered in all directions; another of the same length had about twenty pinnules on each side, the lower ones being in full fructifica- tion, which decreased gradually towards the upper portion of the frond, the leaflets taking its place.” At the same time Mr. Baily exhibited a diagram illus- trating ‘ what was considered to be the base of the stem or rhizoma, having a rounded expansion, apparently separating into scales which continued upwards, tragments of leaflets being attached to the stem at different intervals.” Schimper, in 1869§, figured and described Cyclopteris hibernica, Forbes, under the name of Palwopteris hibernica. In describing the fruiting pinnules he says: “ These have undergone a complete metamorphosis and are trans- formed into groups in which all foliar expansion has entirely disappeared, and which show a principal rachis not at all represented in the sterile pimnules which are destitute of a medial nerve.” He also describes the sporangia as clavate, * Communicated by the Author, having been read before the Royal Physical Society of Edinburgh, April 18, 1888. + Brit. Assoc. Report, 1852, p. 43. { Ibid. 1858, p. 79. § Traité d. paléont. végét. vol. 1. p. 475, pl. xxxvi. Affinities of Archeopteris hibernica, Forbes. 413 costate ( soris (sporangiis?) costulatis”). He gives an enlarged drawing of the sporangia at pl. xxxvi. fig. 4. More recently Mr. Carruthers redescribed the fruit of this fern *. Among other things he says :—“‘ In some specimens in the British Museum all the lower pinne are entirely tertile. I am satisfied that the ovate-oblong sori are generally single, and not clustered, and are two-lipped, the slit passing one third of the way down the sorus. ‘I'he vein is continued as a free receptacle in the centre of the cup or cyst, as in existing Hymenophyllee, in which it is included, not reaching beyond the entire portion. In some specimens the receptacle is broad or thick, indicating the presence of something besides itself in the cup, and giving the appear- ance that would be produced if it were covered with spo- rangia; I cannot, however, detect any indication on the outer surtace which might have been expected trom the individual sporangia. ‘The compression of the specimens in the rock, which has made the free receptacle appear like a vein on the wall of the cup, together with the highly altered condition of the rock in which the fossils are contained, account for the imperfect preservation of the minute structures. “The interpretation which I have here given of the fructi- fication of this interesting fossil exhibits so close a resem- blance to what we find in the living genus Hymenophyllum that, were it not for the vegetative portions, | would without hesitation place it in that genus.” Crépin t, in 1874, figured and described some specimens of Archeopteris (Paleopteris) hibernica, var. minor, from vieux, Belgium, of which he also figures the fruit, but does not describe it in detail. As the generic name Paleopteris, adopted by Schimper for this and some allied ferns, had been previously employed by Geinitz{ for a fossil which he supposed to be a fern-stem (but which has been discovered to be the stem of Cordattes), Dawson §, in 1852, proposed the name Archeopteris for the plants placed in Paleopteris, Schimper (not Geinitz). Daw- son’s genus Archwopterts must therefore be employed for Cyclopteris hibernica and its generic associates, as Paleopteris, * Geol. Mag. vol. ix. no. 2, Feb. 1872. + “Description de quelques plantes fossiles de l’étage des psammites du Condroz (Devonien supérieur),” Bull. Acad. roy. d. Belgique, 2° sér. vol. xxxvili. no. 8, Aug. 1874. t Vers. d. Steinkf. in Sachsen, p. 32; see also Grand’Eury, ‘ Flore car- bon. du Départ. de la Loire,’ pp. 241 and 243, - § Foss. Plants of the Hrian (Devonian) and Upper Silurian Formations of Canada, part ii. p. 98 (1882). 414 On Archeopteris hibernica, Forbes. Schimper, is inadmissible, having been previously used by Geinitz for a different group of plants. Among the Canadian species described by Dawson the point of chief interest to us is the figure and description of the fruit of Archeopteris gaspiensis, a very closely allied species, if really distinct from Archewopteris hibernica, Forbes, sp. His description of the fruit is as follows :—“ Fertile pinne with about twelve pinnules, each having a long midrib with about seven pairs of crowded oblong spore-cases about 3 millim. in length, pointed or somewhat obtuse at top, straight at the sides, and apparently dehiscent at the apex. ‘The midrib projects some distance beyond the spore-cases.” It is further mentioned that Archwopiterts gaspiensis ‘ differs from A, hibernica in the arrangement and form of the spore-cases and in its shorter pinne, with fewer and less obtuse pinnules’’*. Since examining the specimens of Archwopteris hibernica in the British Museum I have doubted the accuracy of the description of the fruit of this fern as given by Schimper and Carruthers, but refrained from expressing any opinion till I had an opportunity of examining the specimens of this plant in the collections of the Science and Art Museum, Dublin, and of the Geological Survey of Ireland. I have now examined these specimens, and feel convinced that the description of the fruit as given by Schimper and Carruthers is inaccurate. I have entirely failed to observe the presence of a keel on the sporangia, as figured by Schimper, or the occurrence of a “ slit passing one third of the way down the sorus,’ or any of the other Hymenophyllaceous characters mentioned by Mr. Carruthers. The sporangia (so far as my observations have gone, and I have examined minutely the specimens in the British Museum, as well as those in the two collections in Dublin, the finest of which are in the col- lection of the Geological Survey of Ireland) are narrow-oval, sessile, or very shortly stalked, as a rule pointed at both extremities, though occasionally blunt; they are usually developed singly, though occasionally in pairs, and are appa- rently produced on the upperside of the rachis-like vein of the very much metamorphosed pinnules, which in this case almost assume the structure of pinne, though their being only modified pinnules is proved by their position and by the occasional occurrence of a few sporangia on the margin of some of the foliage-pinnules, which, in the few such cases observed, had undergone but little reduction in the limb of the pinnule. A similar production of sporangia on the * Dawson, J. c. p. 99. Mr. G. A. Bouleng ~~» “'atrachians from Brazil. 415 incompletely modified foliage-pinnules is not uncommon in Osmunda regalis. The fruiting-pinnules end in several simple or divided thread-like filaments. The fruit appears to consist of exannulate Marattiaceous sporangia. Another interesting point was observed on some of the specimens in the collection of the Geological Survey of Ireland. This had evidently been noticed by Mr. Baily, though its importance was not fully appreciated, and is referred to by him as a rounded expansion of the base of the stem, which apparently separated into scales. Mr. Carruthers, evidently reterring to the same structure, says ‘‘ The stipes were thick, of considerable length, and clothed with large scales, which formed a dense covering at the enlarged base” *. The structures here alluded to are two large stipules, one on each side of the base of the rachis, and on some of the specimens in the collection of the Geological Survey of Ireland they are admirably shown. What has given rise to the statement that the base of the stipe was “ clothed with large scales ” is evidently the remains of large pinnules which are situated on the main rachis between the pinne, and are continued to almost the extreme basal termination of the rachis. Such pinnules, obliquely imbedded in the matrix and broken over, have been mistaken for scales. So far as my observations have gone, the rachis is entirely destitute of membranous scales. The preseuce of the stipules at the base of the rachis of Archeopteris hibernica, altogether independently of the evi- dence afforded by the fruit, points strongly to its affinities being with the Marattiaceze ; and when to this is added the Marattiaceous structure of the fruit itself, there does not remain the slightest doubt in my mind that the true position ot Archeopteris hibernica is in the Marattiacee. In conclusion, I have to express my thanks to Dr. A. Geikie and Prof. Ball for all the facilities they kindly gave me for examining the specimens in the respective collections of the Geological Survey of Ireland and in the Science and Art Museum, Dublin. LV.—A List of Batrachians from the Province Santa Catharina, Brazil. By G. A. BOULENGER. Two rather extensive collections of Frogs, formed in the Sierra do Catharina by Hr. Michaélis, which I have recently * Carruthers, /. c. 416 Mr. G. A. Boulenger on Batrachians from Brazil. examined, afford information as to the little-known Batra- chian fauna of the Province Santa Catharina. The principal interest resides in the comparison with the fauna of the con- tiguous province of Rio Grande do Sul, now fairly known, thanks to the exertions of Hensel, von Ihering, and Bischoff. It will be seen from the following list that the range of several forms recently discovered in the latter province ex- tends to Santa Catharina. 1. Engystoma ovale, var. bicolor, Val. 2. Engystoma leucostictum, sp. n. Snout obtuse, feebly projecting, not twice as long as the diameter of the eye. Fore limb much longer than its dis- tance from the end of the snout. The tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the shoulder, the tarso-metatarsal the eye. ‘Toes obtuse, with a rudiment of web; a single, very small, roundish, metatarsal tubercle. Dark brown above, with scattered, minute, white dots ; limbs marbled with pink above ; a fine interrupted white line along the hinder side of the thighs ; lower surfaces white, spotted and marbled with dark brown. From snout to vent 25 millim. A single female specimen. 3. Pseudis mantidactyla, Cope. 4. Hlosia nasus, Licht. 5. Hylodes Gollmeri, Ptrs. (Guenthert, Stdr.). 6. Ceratophrys Botei, Wied. 7. Paludicola Olfersti, Mart. 8. Paludicola biligonigera, Cope. 9. Leptodactylus Gaudichaudii, D. & B. 10. Eupemphiz nana, Blgr. 11. Bufo arenarum, Hens. 12. Hyla faber, Wied. 13. Hyla marginata, Bley. 14, Hyla pulchella, D. & B. Mr. A. G. Butler on Butterflies from Khandesh, 417 15. Hyla Bischoffit, Blgr. 16. Hyla bivittata, Blgr. 17. Hyla nasica, Cope. 18. Hyla senicula, Burm. 19. Hyla catharine, sp. n. Tongue circular, very slightly nicked and free behind. Vomerine teeth in two transverse groups close together be- tween the rather large choane. Head much depressed, as long as broad; snout rounded, as long as the diameter of the orbit; canthus rostralis rather indistinct, curved; loreal region concave ; interorbital space as broad as the upper eye- lid ; tympanum very distinct, half the diameter of the eye. An indistinct rudiment of web between the outer fingers; no projecting rudiment of pollex ; toes two thirds webbed; disks smaller than the tympanum; subarticular tubercles mode- rate; no tarsal fold. The tibio-tarsal articulation reaches between the eye and the tip of the snout. Upper surfaces slightly warty; belly and lower surface of thighs granulate ; no fold across the chest. Greyish or brown above, with symmetrical darker bands and marblings; a large, triangular, dark spot between the eyes, light-edged anteriorly; a A - shaped band on the sacral region; limbs with dark cross bands ; groin white (in spirit), with black marblings; con- cealed surfaces of hind limbs barred black and white ; lower surfaces whitish, with small blackish spots. From snout to vent 42 millim. T'wo female specimens. 20. Hyla aurantiaca, Daud. 21. Phyllomedusa Iheringii, Blev. LVI.—On Butterflies of the Genus Teracolus obtained by Mr. H. G. Palliser at Khandesh in the Winter of 1886-7. By ArtHur G. Butter, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e. Amonest the butterflies collected by Mr. Palliser in the Khandesh district of Bombay, the species of Yeracolus are the most interesting ; and as this gentleman has very gene- rously presented such as we required, including a unique 418 Mr. A. G. Butler on Butterflies from Khandesh. pair of a new species, to the National Collection, I think I cannot do less than say a few words about them. A series of 7. dynamene included one or two examples of the form 7. carntfer, which approaches 7’. calais of Arabia and Africa. A series of 7’. ochreipennis (= T. rorus) were in the collec- tion; they had been identified, I believe by my old friend M. De Nicéville, as 7. puellaris. T. fulvia of Wallace and a beautiful new species were both named 7. fausta! I herewith append a description of the latter :— Teracolus Pallisert, sp. n. 6. About the size of 7. fausta: primaries above with the pattern and coloration of 7. solaris of Deesa; secondaries with the marginal spots even smaller than in T. fausta; head, collar, and tegule of an unusual rosy colour: under surface of a pale buffy ochreous tint; the apical area of pri- maries and the whole of secondaries (but especially the outer borders of the wings) washed with rose-colour ; the ordinary markings arranged much as in 7’. fulvia, but the discocellular ocelloid spots narrower and smaller and the discal series smaller and redder than in that species. LExpanse ef wings 45 millim. ?. Interno-median area of primaries and basal two thirds of secondaries milk-white, remainder of these wings suffused with pale salmon-colour ; the black apical area of the pri- maries nearly as in the female of 7. /austa or the male of T. fulvia, but the discocellular spot smaller even than in its own male; base of the wings sprinkled with grey scales as far as the middle of the cell; secondaries with the marginal spots rather smaller than in 7’, fausta 9; head, collar, and tegule pink: under surface cream-coloured, the external bor- ders dull pale pink; the discocellular spots small and oval; the discal spots as in the male of 7. fulvia, but of a pinky brown or soft chocolate tint. Expanse of wings 43 millim. West of Dhulia, Khandesh ; December 1886. The female of J. fulvia, which is a larger and more coarsely coloured species, is pure white, with very heavy black borders, as in the allied TZ. tripunctatus ; it was in Mr. Palliser’s collection, but only represented by one damaged example; the Museum does not at present possess it; but I hope this may not long be the case. The Museum series of the 7. fausta group is especially rich, and therefore it is the more satisfactory to be able to add two species, 7. fulvia and T’, Palliser? to our collection. My. E. A. Smith on Haliotis. 419 Of 7. fausta (typical) we possess six examples from the Turco-Persian frontier, three from Kandahar, and one of doubtful locality; the ‘ Zeller” collection added seven examples, in all of which the discocellular spot of primaries is replaced by a minute pale-centred ring, and the pattern of the underside is extremely pale; these specimens were received from Beirfit and Bagdad, and may either represent a distinct local type or a seasonal form. Of J’. faustina, owing to the generosity of Major Yerbury, we possess six examples ; of 7’. orientalis the male type only; of Z. vit eight specimens sent to us by Major Yerbury from Aden; of T. solaris four males, for three of which we were indebted to Col. Swinhoe; of ZY. fulvia, previously unrepresented in our series, we now have the male; of 7. trinotatus we have three males and a female; and, lastly, we now have a pair of 7. Palliser’. Every species of this group hitherto described is therefore represented. Of the carmine-tipped group Mr. Palliser obtained two species, which he tells me are indiscriminately called 7. danae in Bombay: one of these, which was represented only by a single male, is apparently a dwarfed example of that species; the other, of which there was a good series, is 7. san- guinalis, and only differs from the Ceylonese types in being slightly larger. Of the 7’. etrida group there were examples of JT. bimbura and 7. pernotatus, the latter less heavily bordered than usual; _and of the 7. evanthe group, T. pseudevanthe and T. titea. LVII.—Notice of an Abnormal Growth in a Species of Haliotis. By Epaar A. SMITH. Tue British Museum has recently acquired a specimen of Haliotis which is remarkable for having two rows of perfora- tions in the shell instead of one. So far as I can ascertain this is the only instance recorded of such an abnormality. The shell in question is an example of the large Japanese species H. gigantea, and measures 54 inches in length and nearly 44 in width. It is well known that the perforations in the shells of Haliotis are caused by a slit in the mantle of the animal at the particular part immediately beneath them. Instead of perfecting the contour of the shell, in the course of growth an interruption or sinus in the margin is produced, 420 Mr. E. A. Smith on Haliotis. which subsequently is formed into a complete raised per- foration. The number of perforations which remain open indicates the extent of the mantle-slit, but no¢ the number of the tentacular filaments along the margins. In this example four of the holes of the outer or normal series are open, whilst of the inner series, which runs parallel with the other at a distance at the widest part of a little more than an inch, all are closed or filled up. From this I conjecture that the edge of the mantle at this particular point was accidentally notched in early life (or perhaps it may have been a peculiarity from birth) and that the notch was not deep. The perforations in the shells of this genus are supposed to be for conveying water to the branchiz and also, to some extent, for the extrusion of fxcal matter. This theory in all probability is correct, as the gills and anal opening are situated immediately beneath, and one fails to see what other purpose they can serve. There being neither gills nor anal opening under the abnormal series of holes, they had no special func- tion to perform, and consequently the animal appears to have filled them up with nacre from within as soon as possible, so that not even the last-completed one is left unclosed. The supposed abnormal slit or peculiarity in the mantle must have been present when the creature was very young, for the series of holes is noticeable to within an inch of the apex, where the shell is so eroded that traces of both this and the outer series become obliterated. The growth of this abnormal series seems to have been more slowly effected than that of the outer row, since, in the same period, which can be judged of by the lines of growth, twelve were produced in the latter to eight in the former. In the figures of the European Haliotis tuberculata which appear in the works of Cuvier * and Fischer ¢ it will be observed that a tentacle is protruded through each of the last six or seven perforations. Cuvier, however, only describes ‘trois ou quatre filets”’ on the edges of the mantle-slit, and therefore it is all the more remarkable that in the figure referred to seven are represented. In another figure on the same plate (figure 11) three only are shown (the actual number which exists), and these are drawn in the relative positions which they seem invariably to occupy. I have carefully examined three specimens of H. tubercu- lata and examples of five other species from various parts of * Anat. Mollusques, pl. i. fig. 9. + Man. Conchy)l. fig. 596 (from an unpublished cut by Deshayes). On Shell-growth in Cephalopoda. 421 the world, and find in every instance only three tentacles present, and always similarly located. One is at the poste- rior end of the slit at the junction of the two margins just over the anus, and I believe would be protruded from the last open perforation, or, in other words, that most remote from the lip of the shell. The second is situated well forward on the left margin of the slit, and doubtless would, when the animal was living, occupy the last-completed opening. ‘The third is on the right margin somewhat further back, and, judging by the distance which separates it from the preceding tentacle, probably would be extruded through the second perforation. Philippi, in his ‘ Handbuch der Conchyliologie’ (p. 215), states that the animal thrusts through the holes the tentacular prolongations of the left side of the foot. This, however, is an impossibility, as the examination of any species at once shows, and possibly was merely a conclusion derived from the appearance of Cuvier’s or some other figure. LVIII.—Professor Blake and Shell-growth in Cephalopoda. By F. A. Barner, B.A. In the ‘ Annals’ for April (p. 298) a paper on shell-growth in Cephalopoda was published, in which I described certain facts that appeared inconsistent with the views of Dr. Riefstahl and others. From facts first published by Drs. Riefstahl and Appelléf, but verified and extended by my own observa- tions, I ventured to draw a few conclusions and to suggest an explanation which was avowedly theoretical. Prof. Blake (‘ Annals,’ May, p. 376) has been good enough to criticize my paper without delay. Unfortunately misconception on all sides necessitates a reply. His remarks dealing with ques- tions of priority and trustworthiness must be kept distinct from those dealing with facts and the conclusions based thereon. I first reply to the former ; for if a man is proved ignorant of previously published results and guilty of substi- tuting fancy for fact, his credit as a scientific worker is destroyed. There is no doubt that readers of Prof. Blake’s article understood him to mean that, so far as facts were concerned, I had said nothing new. ‘This they inferred from such sentences as ‘Nor do I find that these writers have anything definite to Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i. 29 422 Mr. F. A. Bather on Prof. Blake and add,” and from the last paragraph but one:—“ Although therefore a new student of the Cephalopoda is to be weleomed . . . it would be better that such a one should take up the story where others have left it than go over the old ground with preconceived theories and less careful observations. Nothing, in fact, in the present communication is new; though it may be little known, it was all in print six years ago. “T am not at all sure, however, that the suggestion &c.” In consequence of these sentences I wrote to Prof. Blake and asked for references to any papers in which the facts brought forward by Riefstahl and myself had been described. He replied with promptness, and kindly permits me to make use of his letter. He writes, “ Nor do I say that what you have said was all in print six years ago, but what J said.” We must therefore presume that Prof. Blake admits the originality of my observations, despite the contrary impression produced by his paper. What Prof. Blake does say is that the description of the structure of the Nautilus-shell contained in his Monograph is opposed to some of my conclusions, of which description, he adds, I ‘seem to be ignorant.” Those who know his admi- rable work will understand the damaging nature of this innuendo. Reply is of course impossible; but, as I gather from Prof. Blake’s letter that he infers my ignorance of his work from the fact that I do not refer to it in what he is pleased to call my “ Bibliography,” I may point out that a list of ‘ Papers and Works referred to” in the course of an article need not be a bibliography. Clearly mine was not: I mentioned neither the great work of Barrande, nor the articles in ‘ Science Gossip’ by Mr. H. E. Quilter, nor Prof. Seeley’s suggestive paper in Quart. Journ. Sci. (1864, p. 760), nor— but I might fill pages with references to papers on this sub- ject, with which Prof. Blake must be better acquainted than I am, but to which he has nowhere alluded. Ignorance of Prof. Blake’s writings, though it might handicap, could not disqualify my work. More serious is his constant uncertainty as to whether what I say is “ from autopsy or mental conception.” Much as I regret this, I can but state that when I refer to definite specimens, or when I give “figures drawn to nature,” I hope for some credence ; when, on the contrary, I propose an explanation and invariably speak of it as “a theory” or “a view,” I do not mean to assert it as a fact. I pass with relief to Prof. Blake’s discussion of facts and arguments ; and here I am glad to find so much agreement. Shell-growth in Cephalopoda. 423 So far as Sepia is concerned, Prof. Blake tacitly admits not only the originality but the correctness of the observations made by Riefstahl and myself. Where I differ from Rief- stahl as to the facts, and in the inferences based on those facts with regard to Sepia, he also gives me his support. This support is valuable, for Prof. Blake knew all that we have discovered about the hard parts six years ago. All -students will regret that his observations were never pub- lished. Prof. Blake apparently accepts the view that successive chitinous membranes are given off by the body-surface and subsequently calcified (a view which I claimed to defend rather than originate), and he joins me in ascribing to this process the formation of nacreous layer and septum. ‘This view differs from that advocated in Blake’s Brit. Foss. Ceph. p- 19, lines 23-27; it gives me pleasure to suppose that Prof. Blake’s change of opinion is partly due to my new facts and arguments. Prof. Blake denies “ thatin a Nautilus the earlier septa are approximate, the middle ones far apart, and the later ones approximate again.” It is hard to see how this meaning can be extracted from my sentence, viz. ‘ In the Nautiloidea the septa are still [7. e. at the present day] far apart, but approach in old age”’; and I have repeatedly verified the remarks on p- 80 of his Monograph. Although he there says nothing as to the relations of the septa in the young uncompleted shell, he need not suppose that I thought his observations “ too partial to be of value”; there was simply no occasion to allude to them. I proceeded to say that the Ammonoidea soon differed from the forms with approximate septa which Hyatt, Foord, and others regard as archaic :—‘‘ So early as the Goniatites the septa are far apart in proportion to the diameter of the whorl.” Prof. Blake (who seems to place all Goniatites in one genus) reminds me that G. sagittarius of the Devonian has very close-set septa, and asks if I can then maintain my state- ment. Certainly! I did not say “in al/ Goniatites” or even “in most Goniatites.”’ ‘The septa in one species may be ever so crowded ; this does not affect the septation in other species, in other genera, in other subfamilies. Prof. Blake cannot be guilty of so obvious a fallacy in logic; he merely misunder- stood the statement. Finally, Prof. Blake approves the suggestion to divide the Cephalopoda into three orders, dropping the old terms 'Tetra- branchiata and Dibranchiata. These orders are:—(i.) NAUTILOIDEA, Cephalopodain which the protoconch is not preserved, although coiling takes place: 29* 424 Mr. F. A. Bather on Prof. Blake and (ii.) AMMONOIDEA, Cephalopoda in which the protoconch is preserved by shell-coiling and comes to be affected thereby : (iii.) CoLrompEA, Cephalopoda in which the protoconch is typically preserved by an external sheath deposited by the mantle; the shell comes to be enveloped by the mantle, and may partly, even wholly, disappear. ‘The name Coleoidea (koAeds, sheath) is congruous with the other two already in use. The main points, then, have the very welcome support of Prof. Blake ; there are, however, two which he has severely criticized :—(i.) the suggestion that the membranes of the septa are typically continuous with those of the shell-wall ; (ii.) the theoretical assumption that the lamellee of Sepia are homologous with the septa of a Belemnite-phragmocone. (i.) A supposition on which no argument is based may well be described as “ imaginary.” But Prof. Blake’s manner of controverting the hypothesis is open to much objection. He writes (‘ Annals,’ p. 377), “if Mr. Bather had availed himself of my observations of the shell of Nautilus... . he could not have written as he does.” Then follow two paragraphs which distinctly profess to be an abstract of p. 17 et seq. of Prof. Blake’s Monograph. Whether the statements of Prof. Blake in the ‘ Annals’ are in accordance with fact I do not for the moment inquire ; it is enough to show that they do not harmonize with the statements of Prof. Blake in the Monograph. Prof. Blake (‘Annals’) states that the out- cropping edges of the fine laminz are 20,000 to the inch: this statement is not in the Monograph; on the contrary, from pl. i. fig. 8 of that work it appears that Prof. Blake’s “ outcropping edges” are 4000 to the inch, 2800 in fig. 7, while in the earlier chambers they can be ‘ seen under a low power,” and are drawn in pl. ii. fig. 5 at about 450 to the inch. The slight curvature of the shell cannot explain the discre- pancy. .Next, Prof. Blake (‘Annals’) states that the obliquity of these lamine ‘is very slight, so that in tracing them from their commencement inside to their termination against the outer layer of the shell, they pass more than one septum”: this statement is not in the Monograph, nor can it be inferred from the figures; on the contrary, in pl. 1. fig. 1 oblique lines are seen to pass from the inside to the outside within the space between two septa. Lastly, Prof. Blake (‘ Annals’) states that the shell is composed of three layers, and that “ the third layer is a thin amorphous substance covering the whole of the interior of the shell... In the later portion of the shell... it is seen between the septum and the shell, completely sepa- Shell-growth in Cephalopoda. 425 rating the two structures”: this statement is not in the Monograph ; on the contrary, there will be found on p. 19 this description :—‘ Besides these two layers there is a third, lining the interior of the shell. This is of very small thick- ness, and consists of similar laminz to the nacreous layer, &e.” The word “amorphous” is usually taken to mean “ without structure.” Prof. Blake’s descriptions are clearly inconsistent with one another. He did not suppose that I had made observations for myself. J have done so. And I am bound to add that both of his descriptions are inconsistent with the facts. We must suppose that his statements of this year are intended to supersede those of 1882: let us consider them. He says, “The outcropping edges of” the fine lamin are “ about 20,000 to the inch.” He says of these lamina, “ their obliquity is very slight, so that . . . they pass more than one septum.” It is seen by measuring the distance from suture to suture in a Nautilus-shell that, to fulfil the latter condition, each lamina must be from 1 to 3 inches long. It is therefore obvious that, to fulfil the former condition, there must be from 20,000 to 60,000 such laminee in the thickness of the nacreous layer. And yet, as Prof. Blake correctly says, “ about 1000 fine laminz may be counted in its thickness.” Prof. Blake’s statement, on which he rests much of his subsequent argument, that iridescence is here caused by dif- fraction of light due to outcropping edges of laminz (7. e. diffraction by a reflexion-grating), 1s based presumably on the theory of Brewster ; reference to the original paper (Phil. Trans. 1814, p. 397) will show that this, though the ordinary reading of it, 1s both incorrect and incomplete. In his Mono- graph Prof. Blake brushes aside the contrary conclusions of Dr. W. B. Carpenter without a reference to the elaborate arguments of that most accurate observer (see Brit. Assoc. Rep. 1844, p. 11). I do not here commit myself to any view, but examination of sections and shell-surfaces has con- vinced me that the cause to which Prof. Blake ascribes the observed phenomena is absolutely insufficient. For example, in the most iridescent part of the shell the lines of outcrop are furthest apart, and iridescent surfaces are seen between them. To maintain his assertion Prof. Blake is compelled to say that the septa are not iridescent. Nautilus-shells are not rare; but 1 have never yet seen one that confirms this last statement, Let us now consider “the third layer.” This was not described as amorphous by Hyatt (Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. ili, p. 105, 1872) or by Blake (Brit. Foss. Ceph. p. 19, 1882). 426 On Shell-growth in Cephalopoda. The latter, it is true, said: ‘In the acute angles made by the junction of the septa with the circumference of the shell is another deposit, less transparent than the nacreous layer, but showing very little structure.” It seems as though Prof. Blake were now confusing this with the “ third layer.” But his Monograph distinctly leads one to understand that this . deposit does not pass between the septum and the shell. He mentions also “a loose amorphous deposit” lining each sep- tum on either side, apparently continuous with that filling the angles. The fact is that all these deposits are of the same essential structure as the nacreous layer and septa. The constituent membranes are less compressed in the angles, but they become compressed and pass between the septum and the previously formed portion of shell-wall. They are, how- ever, united with the septal and shell membranes on either side by transverse chitinous connexions; these appear to be the walls of what Prof. Blake calls “ lacune”; they pass right into the nacreous layer and into the septum. There is therefore organic connexion between the septum and shell- wall in Nautilus, just as Riefstahl first described in Sepia. I confess that in my explanation (‘ Annals,’ p.306) I expressed myself too definitely ; the credit of pointing this out is due to Prof. Blake, but it will be understood that there was nothing in his previous description to conflict with my idea, and that his present statements are too incorrect to influence the same. ‘The following alteration of my previous paper (cb. p. 806) is based on my own observations; the altered words are in italics :—“ On the surface of the cells that coat the visceral hump a layer of chitin * is, by concrescence of their distal portions, continually formed, and from it the membranes are, as it were, exfoliated. Secretion begins in the anterior region of the shell-wall, and proceeds back- wards to the suture, thence centripetally over the septum to the posterior margin of the septal neck. The chitin of the septum is essentially one with the chitin of the shell- wall. Probably before, but possibly in consequence of, cal- eification t this chitin splits into membranes (vide supra). Lime is deposited as arragonite upon and between these mem- branes soon after their secretion ; nacre is produced by this more purely physical process, not by direct secretion.” I hope that this theoretical explanation will satisfy Prof. Blake, and I must thank him for affording me an opportunity of making the correction. * Chitin, more correctly conchiolin (see footnote, p. 303). T See Osborn, Stud. Biol. Lab. Johns Hopkins Univ. ii. p. 427 (1883), Mr. G. E. Dobson on two new Indian Soricide, 427 (1.) Some of my arguments depend, as Prof. Blake points out, on the homology of the lamelle in the pad of Sepia with the septa in the Belemnite-phragmocone. ‘This homology is ‘doubted by Prof. Blake, who now suggests that the lamelle of the pad are homologous with the calcified membranes of the nacreous layer in the shell-wall of Nautilus. His argu- ments are three. He claims first that his observations on shell-structure do not countenance my view: my readers will decide whether Prof. Blake’s description is valid evidence one way or the other. He states secondly that the lamelle of Sepia ‘ have no siphuncle, and they are not even perforated :” now each later-formed lamella is like anelliptical figure with the posterior part cut away by another broader ellipse; the earlier lamellee are of more circular outline, but are similarly incised ; if this incision represents the siphuncular space, then from this form to the form of the septa in Belosepia is a mere step; even in the Belemnite the siphuncle is so external as hardly to be surrounded by the septum. Lastly, he states that there is no trace of a “cap” or of a protoconch in Sepia: the explana- tion of this was given by Prof. Lankester in his ‘ Observa- tions on the Development of Cephalopoda” (Q. J. M.S. xv. p- 87) in 1875, and to the arguments of that authority no opposition has hitherto been offered. Lhe view taken by me as to the homologies of the Sepion was first put forward by Voltz (Mém. Soc. Hist. Nat. de Strassbourg, i. p. 1) in 1830; I am not aware that his argu- ments have ever been refuted ; the view is adopted by Prof. Gegenbaur in his well-known text-book; it has been con- firmed by recent observations, and, though I arrived at it independently from a study of the facts, I had no wish to retell an old tale. I accept with gratitude the support and welcome of Prof. Blake, and only regret that his article should necessitate a reply so full of controversy. For this L apologize to the readers of the ‘ Annals,’ but would remind them of the Rabbinical proverb, “ By the contention of students science is advanced.” LIX.—Descriptions of two new Species of Indian Soricidee. By G. E. Doxnson, M.A., F.R.S. As Mr. W. T. Blanford is about to print his work on the mammals of British India, and is anxious to include every known species from that region, he has requested me 428 Mr. G. E. Dobson on two new Indian Soricide. to publish diagnoses of the following species, of which full descriptions are to be found in the manuscript of the still unpublished part iii. of my ‘ Monograph of the Insectivora.’ The following two species of Crocidura belong to the so- called subgenus Pachyura, having the dental formula ne. 3—3, pm. 8—3, m. 83—3 __ ae =30 teeth. Crocidura leucogenys, sp. 1. Somewhat larger than C. aranea. The ears are short and clothed with a few short whitish hairs only ; the tail is thick and fusiform, and clothed as in C. murina, numerous long, fine grey hairs arising out of the shorter fur; the feet com- pared with the size of the body are small and slender, thinly clothed with short greyish-brown hairs; a very large lateral gland, like that in C. murina, is found in the usual position. The fur is short throughout ; above light cinnamon-brown with a reddish tinge intermixed with grey, the basal half of the hairs bluish ; the sides of the head between the angles of the mouth and the ears, the chin, and part of the chest are dirty white, the remainder of the ventral surface greyish; the upper surface and sides of the tail are brown, the lower sur- face grey. The skull and teeth closely resemble those of C. murina on a much reduced scale ; they also resemble those of C. Stolicz- kana, Anderson; but skulls of quite immature specimens of the latter species, although much smaller, have longer upper tooth-rows. Length (of an adult male preserved in alcohol) : head and body 75 millim., tail 47, ear 8, elbow to end of middle digit (without claw) 17, manus 7, pes 12; skull, occipital crest to front edge of premaxillary bone 19, greatest width of skull 9, length of upper tooth-row 7, length of lower tooth-row 8, length of mandible from condyle to tip of anterior tooth 124. Hab. India (Ajmir). Type an adult male collected by Sir O. B. St. John. Crocidura Dayt, sp. un. Smaller than C. rubicunda, but with a longer tail and nearly as large a foot. Fur and integument dark brown throughout, the ventral surface slightly paler, the basal three fourths of the fur on both surfaces dark bluish grey Tail long and clothed with very short hairs; m the single speci- On the Fishes of the Yangtsze- Kiang. 429 men there are scarcely any long fine hairs to be seen; feet slender and similarly thinly clothed. No trace of a lateral gland. The skull differs conspicuously from that of C. rubicunda in its smaller size. ‘The teeth differ in the shape of the first upper incisor as well as in the large size of the penultimate premolar. The first upper incisor has a large basal process provided with an internal basal cusp, the anterior principal cusp of this tooth is short and does not equal that of the second incisor in vertical extent ; the third incisor is smaller and shorter than the anterior maxillary tooth; the small penultimate premolar is much larger than usual in the genus, being about three fourths the size of the third incisor in cross section at the base, and its cusp slightly exceeds in vertical extent the anterior basal cusp of the last premolar; the ante- rior mandibular tooth has two notches. Length (of a skin): head and body 74 millim., tail 60, pes 154; skull, occipital crest to front edge of premaxillary bone 174, greatest width of skull 9, length of upper tooth- row 9, length of lower tooth-row 83, length of mandible from condyle to tip of anterior tooth 12. Hab. Madras Presidency, India (exact locality unknown). Collected and presented to the British Museum (Natural History) by Dep. Surgeon-General I’. Day, C.L.E. LX.— Contribution to our Knowledge of the Fishes of the Yangtsze-Kiang. By Dr. A. GUNTHER, Keeper of the Zoological Department, British Museum. Since I had the pleasure of reporting on a collection of Reptiles* made by Mr. A. E. Pratt at Kiu-Kiang, on the Yang- tsze River, he has proceeded further inland, to Ichang, a distance of 1000 miles from the mouth of the river. He was fortunate enough to obtain there a specimen of the porpoise, the exist- ence of which had been mentioned by several travellers (Blakiston, A. J. Little), and of which I especially desired * See anté, p. 165. I regret not to be able to make use of the notes on Chinese fishes in ‘ La Pisciculture et la Péche en Chine par P. Dabry de Thiersant,’ as the figures as well as the accompanying notes are the work of persons not conversant with the rudiments of descriptive ichthyology, and as likely to lead to misconceptions as to assist in the determination of the species. 430 Dr. A. Giinther on the him to procure a specimen. This porpoise is not what, from the great distance from the sea, I expected it to be, but proves to be identical with, or closely allied to, Delphinus (Neomeris) melas of Schlegel. I still consider it probable that a species of Platanista may yet be found to inhabit the Yangtsze-Kiang, a river which would seem to be well adapted for the existence of this type of freshwater Cetacean. The fishes sent by Mr. Pratt in the same consignment belong to the following species :— CHONDROSTEI: Aczpenser, sp. (two very young examples differing from the species hitherto known) ; Psephurus gla- dius, Martens (young). ACANTHOPTERYGII: Eleotris wantht, sp. n.; Ophiocephalus argus, Cant. ; Polyacanthus opercularis, L. SILURIDE: Stlurus asotus, L.; Macrones longirostris*, Gthr.; Macrones crassilabris, Gthr.; Macrones teniatus, Gthr. ; Macrones Vachellit, Rich. (A. 27) ; Macrones macro- pterus, Blkr. CYPRINIDE: Carassius auratus, L.; (Crossochilus montt- cola, sp. n.); Pseudogobio sinensis, Kner; Pseudogobio pro- ductus, Ptrs.; Pseudogobio maculatus, sp. n.; Rhinogobio cylindricus, sp. n.; Pseudorasbora parva, Schleg.; Xeno- cypris argentea, Gthr.; Ctenopharyngodon idellus, C. V. (specimens 2 feet long) ; Rhodeus sinensis, Gthr. ; Ochetobius elongatus, Kner; Squaliobarbus curriculus, Rich. ; Hypoph- thalmichthys molitrix, C. V.3; Chanodichthys pekinensis, Basil.; Culter clisheformis, Blkr.; Hemiculter leucisculus, Kner; Luciobrama typus, Blkr.; Homaloptera jfimbriata, gp. n. CopitipIna: Misgurnus anguillicaudatus, Cant.; Misgurnus mizolepis, sp. n.; Nemachilus xanthi, sp. n. I subjoin some notes, chiefly descriptive of the new species. Eleotris xantht. D6 pA di, gas lat 3: Preoperculum without spine. ‘Twelve series of scales between the origin of the second dorsal fin and the anal. The scales on the neck, cheek, and opercles are small and do not extend on to the interorbital space. Scales finely ciliated. The height of the body is one fourth of the total length (without caudal), the length of the head two sevenths. * This is not a Japanese species, as I was incorrectly informed when I described it. Fishes of the Yangtsze-Kiangq. 431 Kye rather small, shorter than the snout, one fifth of the length of the head, and exceeding the width of the interorbital space. Head rather compressed and high behind, with broad snout, and with the lower jaw prominent. The maxillary extends to the vertical from the front margin of the orbit. Gill-membranes attached to the median line of the isthmus. Vertical fins lower than the body ; caudal fin rounded, equal in length to the pectorals, which are three fifths of the length of the head. Light-coloured, with broad, indistinct, darker cross bands on the sides. Dorsal and caudal fins indistinctly spotted with brown; no spot at the base of the pectoral fin. This species, of which there is only one specimen in the collection, 24 inches long, is allied to Eleotris potamophila, but readily distinguished from it by its narrow, scaleless, interorbital space. I do not know of any other species of this genus extending equally high up in fresh water. Crossochilus monticola. Dit. Als. Thy lat; 42... vs transyv.-0/7: Lips not fringed, the lower with a firm, sharp, horny cover ; four barbels, of which the lower are nearly as long as the eye and the upper minute. The height of the body is two sevenths and the length of the head two ninths of the total length (without caudal). Hye of moderate size, two ninths of the length of the head, two thirds of that of the snout, and rather more than half the width of the interorbital space, which is convex. Snout obtuse in front, with pits in which probably horny tubercles are secreted during the breeding-season. Mouth transverse, inferior. The origin of the dorsal fin occupies nearly the middle between the end of the snout and the root of the caudal; root of the ventral fin opposite to the fourth, fifth, and sixth dorsal rays; pectoral fin a little shorter than the head, reaching nearly to the origin of the dorsal fin. Four longitudinal series of scales between the lateral line and the root of the ventral fin. Caudal fin deeply cleft, as long as the head. Coloration uniform. A single’ specimen, 7 inches long, was obtained by A. Henry, Esq. ., Ina mountain-stream flowing into the Ichang gorge of the Yangtsze River. Pseudogobio productus. Pseudogobio productus, Peters, MB, Berl. Akad. 1880, p. 1035, fig. 6 (head). Det) VALS V. 8. I lat250) Tay transv. 6/6: The height of the body is one seventh of the total length 432 Dr. A. Giinther on the (without caudal), the length of the head more than one fourth. Snout long and produced, with the upper profile concave, much longer than the diameter of the eye, which is one fourth of the length of the head. Mouth inferior, subsemicircular, of moderate width ; jaws with broad lips, the inferior fringed in the middle; upper lip not fringed; barbel as long as the eye, compressed and rather stiff. Preeorbital elongate, rhom- boidal. The origin of the dorsal fin is midway between the end of the snout and the first anal ray ; ventrals inserted below the hinder half of the dorsal. Caudal fin deeply forked. Pectoral fin inserted horizontally, as long as the head, but not extending to the ventral. Transparent greenish above, a narrow bluish band along the lateral line; abdomen silvery ; fins not spotted. Two specimens, of which the larger is 7 inches long, are in the collection. Pseudogobio maculatus. D.10, A.-8." 1. lat. 40. Wi transve4 75: Barbels none. Body rather compressed, its greatest depth being equal to the length of the head and one fourth of the total (without caudal) ; snout rather compressed, of moderate length, a little longer than the eye, the diameter of which is nearly one fourth of the length of the head. Interorbital space convex, as wide as the orbit. Mouth very small, sub- anterior ; lower lip interrupted in the middle. ‘The origin of the dorsal fin is nearer to the end of the snout than to the root of the caudal; ventrals inserted below the middle of the dor- sal; caudal fin moderately forked ; pectoral not quite so long as the head, extending to the origin of the dorsal fin, but not to the root of the ventral. Silvery, with large, irregular, deep black spots, each occupying one or more scales ; ante- rior part of the dorsal fin and a band along each caudal lobe black. Two specimens, the larger of which is 3 inches long, are in the collection. This species would belong, on account of the absence of barbels, to Bleeker’s genus Sarcochilichthys. Ehinogobio cylindricus. Dil. A..8. V8... U. lat.485, Li transys6/ 7 Body low, subcylindrical, its greatest depth being con- Fishes of the Yangtsze-Kiang. 433 tained five and a half times in the total length (without caudal), the length of the head four times and a fourth. Head low, with the snout much elongate and pointed, the eye being rather nearer to the gill-opening than to the end of the snout ; the projecting part of the snout is swollen, conical, the mouth being entirely at the lower side of the snout. Hye one fifth of the length of the head, less wide than the flat interorbital space. Upper lip swollen; lower very short, broadly interrupted in the middle; barbel very short, lying in a groove which extends forward to near the extremity ot the snout. Gill-membrane attached to the side of the isthmus. The origin of the dorsal fin is considerably nearer to the end of the snout than to the root of the caudal; ventrals inserted below the posterior half of the dorsal. Caudal deeply forked. The pectorals are much shorter than the head, and scarcely extend to the origin of the dorsal fin. The lower parts of the head and of the thoracic region entirely scaleless. Color- ation transparent, without any spots. One specimen, 4 inches long. This species differs from Lhinogobio typus in having a much smaller eye and in having the lower parts of the thorax scaleless. Hemiculter leucisculus, Kner. This species is subject to variations with regard to the width of the third suborbital bone and the position of the ventral fins. In specimens from [chang the third suborbital is broad enough to be in contact with the preopercular limb, whilst in specimens obtained in the lower parts of the river there is a more or less broad strip of soft skin intervening between suborbital and preoperculum. In the specimens from Ichang the root of the ventral is opposed to the first dorsal spine, whilst in the majority of our other specimens the whole of the ventral is in advance of the dorsal. Homaloptera fimbriata. Delis tA) Bal9e Nis ll: This species differs from the typical species of Homaloptera in the shape of its snout and in the arrangement of the barbels. ‘The snout is flat and spatulate, considerably nar- rowed in front and nearly as long as broad; the mouth is surrounded with fringes, from which the barbels differ only by their greater size; the barbels and fringes of the upper 434 On the Fishes of the Yangtsze-Kiang. jaw arranged in two concentric series, two pairs of barbels standing in the outer series ; behind each angle of the mouth there is a third pair of barbels. Scales minute and smooth, but there are a few larger ones along the median line of the back and along the lateral line. Origin of the anal fin rather nearer to the root of the caudal than to the occiput. Eyes very small, much nearer to the gill-opening than to the end of the snout; ventral fins oppo- site to the anterior half of the dorsal. Pectoral fins not extending to the ventrals. Body with broad, indistinct, dark cross bands; pectoral, ventral, and caudal fins with greyish spots. One specimen, 44 inches long. Misgurnus mizolepis. D..7 or &:,, A..Scor 9: Vi. 6 or 7. This species has larger scales than any other of the genus known to me; they are arranged in thirteen longitudinal rows between the dorsal fin and the lateral line and in ten between the lateral line and the ventral fin. JBarbels ten, four belonging to the mandible; the inner pair of the man- dibulary barbels are about half the length of the outer ones. Head and body compressed. The height of the body is nearly equal to the length of the head, which is contained six and a half times in the total (without caudal). Snout at least twice as long as the diameter of the eye, which is one sixth of the length of the head. Origin of the dorsal fin nearer to the root of the caudal than to the occiput, conspicu- ously in advance of the root of the ventral fin. Pectoral fin a little shorter than the head ; caudal fin rounded, continued by a series of rudimentary rays to the anal fin, and a similar distance forward on the dorsal edge of the tail; these rudi- mentary rays render the free portion of the tail particularly deep. Greyish green, with a greyish line along each series of scales; lower parts whitish, finely mottled with brown. Three specimens, of which the larger is 6} inches long, were sent by Mr. Styan from Kiu-Kiang. Nemachilus xanthi. D225 PAS Te. ae: Scales minute, but conspicuous. Caudal fin deeply emar- ginate ; the origin of the dorsal fin is midway between the end of the snout and the root of the caudal. The height of On the so-called Eyes of Tridacna. 435 the body is considerably less than the length of the head, which is one fourth of the total (without caudal). Snout of moderate length, pointed, as long as the postorbital portion of the head; eye of moderate size. A skinny adipose lobe occupies the place of the enlarged axillary scales of the pec- toral and ventral fins. Back crossed by fourteen narrow brownish bands; a small deep black spot at the end of the lateral line; each caudal lobe with four oblique blackish bands; each dorsal ray with one or two blackish specks. One specimen, 44 inches long. LXI.—On the so-called Eyes of Tridacna and the Occur- rence of Pseudochlorophyll-corpuscles in the Vascular System of the Lamellibranchiata. By J. Brock *., SINCE the investigations of L. Vaillant Tridacna has usually been reckoned among the eye-bearing bivalve Mollusca. As the clam-shells, or at least their smaller species, are among the commonest inhabitants of the Indian coral-reefs, I had sufficient inducement, during my residence in the Indian Archipelago in the year 1886, to undertake a careful investi- gation of these supposed eyes. But owing to the abundance of the tasks which presented themselves on the spot I suc- ceeded finally only in bringing with me to Hurope some well-preserved material which has furnished the sole foun- dation of the following description. As is well known, the margins of the mantle of the living species of Zridacna are splendidly coloured. The observa- tion of the living animals in their natural position is one of the most charming spectacles which the coral-reefs, rich as they are in beautiful forms and brilliant colours, can present, and the enthusiastic descriptions of travellers (Quoy and Gaimard +, Cuming f, Vaillant §) are in this particular not in the least exaggerated, as I can affirm from my own expe- rience. The so-called eyes have no small share in producing this * Translated by W.S. Dallas, F.L.8., from the ‘ Zeitschrift fiir wissen- schaftliche Zoologie,’ Band xlvi. pp. 270-287. The original memoir is illustrated with a plate (pl. xxii.). + ‘ Voyage de l’Astrolabe,’ Zoologie, par Quoy et Gaimard, tome iii. (1835), p. 488. { Reeve, ‘Conchologia Iconica,’ part xiv., Monograph of T’ridacna. § Ann. des Sc. Nat. sér. 3, tome iv. p. 73 (1865). 436 M. J. Brock on the beauty. They stand out from the margin of the mantle, which is sometimes ultramarine blue, sometimes emerald- green *, as an irregular row of differently coloured points, sometimes black, sometimes brown f, so that an impression is produced as if Nature, in order to heighten the brillant spectacle, had set differently coloured gems in the splendid material of which she forms the margins of the mantle. Even upon a superficial examination we easily see that these differently coloured spots adorn the summits of low, obtusely conical elevations, which Vaillant directly characterizes as “ eve-tentacles’ (“tentacules oculiformes,”’ Jd. ¢. p. 83). How far this is correct a closer examination of their structure will show. The considerable size which, as is well known, these animals attain, and the labour necessary for obtaining them (they have to be chiselled out of the blocks of madrepore {), at once placed a limit upon the amount of material brought away. My investigations have therefore been made exclusively upon three specimens; but as these furnished me with several hundred “eyes” for examination, the want of very young and of full-grown examples can alone be regarded as inju- rious to the completeness of the description. My largest spe- cimen, which measured 18 centim. along the margin of the mantle, was killed in very dilute chromic acid (0°25 per cent.), then treated with gradually stronger alcohol; in the case of a second specimen of the same size the margin of the mantle was separated from the living animal and hardened succes- sively in dilute osmic solution and then in alcohol; with a third small example J contented myself with hardening in alcohol. As will be seen hereafter these different methods of * In Tridacna crocea, Lam., according to Quoy and Gaimard, ultra- marine blue, in 7. elongata, Lam., green, in 7. sguamosa, Lam., which was observed by me, most frequently also green, but with all shades towards blue very frequent, until the animals were pure blue. Moreover the metallic lustre of the colours is so strong that, as Vaillant correctly remarks (/. c. p. 78) only comparison with jewels can give even a tolerably good notion of them. The pigment, according to Vaillant (/. c. p. 86) is exclusively seated in the epithelium of the mantle. At any rate the coloration disappears immediately in alcohol without leaving any traces ; it must also be remarked that nothing is to be found of a “ spangle- layer,” such as is so generally diffused in fishes with metallic lustre. + Black in T. elongata, observed by Vaillant (which is confirmed by Mobius, ‘ Beitrage zur Meeresfauna d. Insel Mauritius u. d. Seychellen, Berlin, 1880, p. 822), yellowish green in 7. crocea according to Quoy and Gaimard, as also from my personal recollections in T. sguamosa, Unfor- tunately I cannot now make any definite statement upon this point, as I omitted making a coloured drawing. } The mode of life of 7. sqwamosa appears therefore to agree perfectly with that of 7. ervcea, as described by Quoy and Gaimard (J. ¢. p. 488). so-called Eyes of Tridacna. 437 preservation have supplemented each other very advanta- geously for the investigation. _ Now, therefore, we may pass to the consideration of the eye- tentacles.” At the very first glance at the margin of ae mantle of a Tridacna we observe a series of irregular ly formed but generally obtusely conical tubercles or “warts, which, at variable distances from the margin, upon the inner or branchial surface of the mantle, form a row nearly parallel with the margin of the mantle, and in my largest example, in which the mantle-margin is about 18 centim. long, I count on each side about fifty of these structures. Their distance from each other and from the margin of the mantle is no less irregular than their size and form. While the distance from the margin usually varies between 2 and 5 millim., we find individual warts much further inwards, even as far as 15 millim. The distance of the warts from each other is equally variable. While we sometimes find groups of six or eight together in a close series, a more irregular arrangement in small groups of two or three placed ‘at variable distances apart is by far the most frequent condition. The form of the larger elevations is generally that of a low hill, which, however, appears seated upon the surface of the mantle not straight, but obliquely, in such a manner that the apex looks towards the margin of the mantle. In the largest structures of this kind the long diameter (by which I mean that perpendicular to the mantle-margin) is usually somewhat greater than the transverse diameter (parallel to the margin), which it may exceed by about one third; in middle- sized tubercles the two diameters are nearly equal, and in small ones the proportion may be in favour of the transverse diameter. In the largest warts observed by me the diameters in question attained the lengths of 3 and 2 millim. As regards the form of all the warts, of whatever size, it is characteristic that their dorsal surface melts very gently and gradually into that of the inner surface of the mantle, while the ventral surface (that turned towards the mantle-margin) descends abruptly, and, indeed, below the level of the surtace of the mantle, each sooth being surrounded on its ventral side by asemicircular furrow, which stands in the same relation to it as the fosse of a fortress to the bastion. ‘This fosse is very seldom faintly marked or quite effaced. __, Between the series of large warts and the margin of the mantle there is a series of smaller structures of a peculiar kind, which are only just visible with the naked eye. Some- times, but not frequently, the structures now to be described occur also between the larger warts or even beyond them ; Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. 30 438 M. J. Brock on the but the great majority of them form a continuous series between the larger warts and the mantle-margin, and show exactly the same irregularity of arrangement as the larger warts themselves. At the first glance the two kinds of struc- tures seem to have little to do with each other; frequently the smaller ones appear as mere scar-like shrinkings-in of the surface of the mantle without any perceptible elevation above the surface. But more advanced structures, in which these scar-like shrinkings already surround a slightly convex eminence, show us the transition towards typically con- structed warts. ‘These smaller structures are warts in course of development; the only thing remarkable in the process of development is the circumstance that the semicircular furrow which girdles the wart ventrally first sinks into the surface of the mantle, and only then the wart rises up above the inner mantle-surface from the dorsal declivity of this “fosse.”” ‘This idea is also fully confirmed by the examina- tion of series of transverse sections. In general the smaller structures just described are so little remarkable in the vicinity of the mantle-margin, even in chromic-acid preparations, that during life the slight differ- ences of relief caused by them will hardly appear at all. On the other hand, it would appear from Vaillant’s description that during life these structures also are the seat of an intense pigmentation, and therefore must catch the eye very readily. With regard to them our author says (/. c. p. 83) :—“ In the periphery of the free margin of the mantle the green colora- tion forms an uninterrupted border, which is adorned with a series of very regularly arranged black spots; near them, but further inwards, there are large projecting tubercles also marked with a black spot; they are more numerous in the vicinity of the branchial aperture, and represent the eye- tentacles.” While there can be no doubt as to the identity of these latter structures (which, moreover, are described more in de- tail in another place, /.c. p. 135) with the larger warts described by me, the agreement of the younger structures with Vail- lant’s series of pigment-spots along the mantle-margin is a good deal more uncertain. In favour of this view we may cite the similarity of situation and arrangement, although so regular a position as Vaillant describes and figures (J. c. pl. viii. fig. 1) does not agree with my objects, and, further, the cir- cumstance that the larger warts are most certainly pigmented. On this point, unfortunately, my personal recollections leave me completely in the lurch. In order to ascertain the intimate structure of all these so-called Eyes of Tridacna. 439 formations of the margin of the mantle, suitably selected por- tions of the margin were stained with alum-carmine and then divided in different directions into series of cross sections from 0°0125 to 0-01 millim. in thickness. The result was very surprising. From the scanty statements of Vaillant it might have been anticipated that the histological investiga- tion would reveal a highly organized eye. ‘ Notwithstanding the volume of these organs,” says Vaillant (/.¢c. p. 135), “ which in large individuals measure not less than 2-3 millim. at their base, I was unable, on account of the thickness and opacity of the tissues, which render dissections very difficult, in definitely finding in them the constituents which have been described in some other Mollusca, and especially in the species of Pecten. Near the apex of the tubercle there is a spot of dark pigment, which may be regarded as a choroid ; and, further, in successful preparations, when such a wart is examined from the side, we see a convex transparent cap- sule, which might perhaps be assimilated to a cornea.” These exceedingly cautious assertions, however, agree so little with the actual conditions that it is difficult to say what Vaillant really saw. For his excuse it may be indicated that his method of investigation must necessarily have exposed him to the most serious illusions. Let us first of all examine the larger wart-like elevations which stand at a distance from the margin of the mantle. In these the first section in any direction teaches us the important fact that the warts themselves are not eyes or other special organs of any kind, inasmuch as their structure perfectly agrees with that of the mantle. But in the warts themselves there are in small numbers some very peculiarly constructed organs of microscopic minuteness, which perhaps might be eyes and which must here be somewhat closely examined in the first place. The organs in question have the general form of a shallow flask with a broad belly and a short wide neck. They lie immediately beneath the epithelium and are so oriented that the belly is turned inwards and the neck outwards, so that their long axis is perpendicular to the epithelial surface. Even on the largest warts we do not find more than ten or twelve such organs; on smaller ones fewer in proportion to their size. With rare exceptions, in which we find individual organs on the extreme periphery of a wart, they throughout prefer the median regions ; their favourite place is the surface of the wart turned towards the mantle-margin, which descends abruptly towards the crescentiform furrow. Here we find about 75 per cent. of their whole number, the) remainder 30 440 M. J. Brock on the being pretty uniformly distributed over the most elevated part of the wart. Exceptionally a flask-shaped organ occurs on the outer declivity of the crescentiform furrow, therefore really outside the domain of the wart itself. The “ flask- shaped organs,” as we will name them for the present, usually stand in groups of two or three close together, but not unfrequently singly. Their size varies little. I found the greatest long diameter of a well-developed organ to be 02 millim., while the greatest transverse diameter amounted to 0°15 millim. This would be sufficient to enable them to be recognized under the lens even in a fresh torn preparation, that is to say, supposing them to be sufficiently differentiated from the surrounding tissue, which I greatly doubt. The minute structure of a flask-shaped organ is compara- tively simple. The whole is surrounded by a thin membrane, visible in sections as a strong contour, and which here and there contains imbedded fusiform nuclei. The chief contents consist of large cells, which in life are probably nearly round, but in my preparations irregularly polygonal, in consequence of the shrivelling, which cannot quite be avoided. These cells also possess a distinct membrane, recognizable as a thick contour ; their protoplasm is quite free from granular inclu- sions, and in life probably perfectly transparent and strongly refractive. In my chromic-acid and osmium preparations it had acquired a finely reticular character, no doubt a pheno- menon of coagulation ; while in the alcoholic preparations a dully-lustrous fat-like substance had separated in large drops. The remarkably small, perfectly spherical nucleus is placed quite excentrically on a part of the membrane. The greatest diameter of these “ transparent cells” is 15-25 mw, that of their nuclei 3-5 pw. These transparent cells are surrounded, like a nut by its shell, by a somewhat differently constituted layer, which extends directly inwards from the external limiting mem- brane. This ‘external layer” is most perfectly developed at the bottom of the bellied part of the flask-shaped organ (which lies away from the surface of the mantle), and thence advances forwards, but without ever attaining the fore- most part, that is to say, to keep up the comparison, the mouth of the flask. On the whole, this cell-layer is charac- terized by great irregularity. Not only do the individual cell-elements composing it often project irregularly into the cavity of the flask, but their arrangement is also sometimes interrupted; there occur in it larger and smaller gaps, into which the transparent cells penetrate and thus come into direct contact with the limitimg membrane. In contrast to the so-called Eyes of Tridacna. 441 transparent cells those of the outer layer appear very opaque, owing to their coarsely granular protoplasm; they are some- what smaller (10-15 4) than the transparent cells, show no recognizable membrane, and are polygonally pressed against one another. Their round nucleus, averaging 3-5 mw in diameter, is not placed excentrically, but more in the centre. It is exceedingly remarkable and ought to be particularly noted that I have never seen a nerve passing to a flask-shaped organ. With the anterior neck-like portion the organs frequently reach immediately under the epithelium, but just as often the thin layer of connective tissue, which forms the boundary between the tissue of the mantle and the epithelium, inter- venes between them. The epithelium is the moderately thick, one-layered, vibratile cylinder-epithelium, with basal nuclei and thin, strongly refractive cuticle, which is suft- ciently well known in the mantle of the Lamellibranchs. On the outer surface of the mantle (the shell-side) a great num- ber of elongate, flask-shaped, unicellular mucus-glands open among the epithelium; these, when stained with alum- carmine, show very distinctly the framework-substance recently described by List * and myself in these elements. The flask-shaped organs often project outwards more or less strongly, so as to push out the epithelium covering them ina conical form. ‘This peculiarity is generally much better deve- loped in those organs which we find upon the smaller (and probably younger) warts than in those which belong to older structures. With regard to their epithelial coat also a dis- tinction may be set up. Throughout this is somewhat thinned over the flask-shaped organs, but in the younger much more than in the older ones. While in the latter the differ- ence from the normal epithelium is but small and often scarcely perceptible, the epithelial covering over the younger struc- tures is often reduced to a pavement-epithelium scarcely visible in profile. We have just spoken of older and younger warts, and this gives the opportunity of going somewhat more into detail upon the relations of the two structures, which in description we have in the first place treated separately. If we examine the minute structure of one of the undeveloped structures near the margin of the mantle, which appear to the naked eye rather as scar-like indrawn depressions, it 1s soon seen that no principal differences from the larger warts exist in * J. H. List, “ Zur Kenntniss der Driisen im Fusse von Tethys jfim- briata, L.,” Zeitschy. f. wiss. Zool. Bd. xly. p. 281; and J. Brock, cid. xliy. p. 883. 442 M. J. Brock on the them. Here also we find flask-shaped organs in the typical position at the inner wall of the “ fosse,” or more rarely upon the still very low dome of the wart which is just swelling up. But their number is small, varying only from one to three; and moreover, as already stated, they project more strongly above the surface, and push out the much thinned epithelium of the mantle into a bump at this spot. With respect to size and the details of the minute structure there is, however, absolutely no difference between them and the flask-shaped organs of the larger warts. If we examine more exactly the external relief of these younger structures it is not difficult to find evident incipient stages, in which only a deep narrow inversion of the epithelium of the mantle represents the first trace of the future “ fosse,” while within this the future tubercle is either not indicated at all or only by a broad, low, scarcely perceptible elevation. From these incipient stages up to typically developed warts all possible intermediate forms may be found, and hence there seems to us to be no doubt that the smaller structures near the margin of the mantle are developmental stages of the typical large warts. If this conclusion be correct, this development has certainly the remarkable peculiarity of showing that first of all the ‘‘fosse”’ surrounding the wart on the side towards the mantle-margin sinks in, and the wart only then begins to swell up above the surface of the mantle. If we add to this that our younger specimen of 7’ridacna, in which the mantle- margin measures only 13 centim, in length, shows only such younger organs towards the margin, and, indeed, in rather small numbers (in all about fifty were counted upon each mantle- margin), and, on the other hand, not a single distinctly pro- jecting wart, we are not unjustified in coming to the conclu- sion that during the whole life of the animal new-formation of warts goes on continually, starting from the margin of the mantle *. With regard to the formation of the flask-shaped organs we have unfortunately no direct observation. But from the circumstance that they occur typically developed in the youngest warts, it at least follows with some certainty that their formation precedes that of the warts. Therefore as the place where a new flask-shaped organ originates is not marked externally by change in relief of the surface of any kind, it is clear that only some very fortunate chance could throw any light upon the production of a flask-shaped organ in the adult * The development of the warts sometimes attains such an extreme degree that they begin to be constricted off from the parent-surface and give origin to short-stalked clavate or mushroom-like structures. so-called Eyes of Tridacna. 443 animal. It may, however, be admitted that for a long time a new-formation of such organs must take place in the larger warts, for a comparison of the number of flask-shaped organs of the larger warts with the very much smaller number in younger structures leaves only the alternative between this supposition and the much more improbable one of a sub- sequent fusion of several smaller warts into one large one; but even here it is remarkable that I have never been able to observe a flask-shaped organ tn statu nascendi. How- ever, I will readily admit that I have not devoted much time to seeking for it, as in connexion with the chief interest which attaches to these mysterious organs, namely their function, no light is to be expected from developmental history. Throughout, in all attempts to attribute any definite func- tion to these organs, we find ourselves in a peculiarly unfa- vourable position. In the first place, because there are no available observations as to the behaviour of the living animal, as to undoubted sensorial perceptions, or the like, which might be brought into connexion with the flask-shaped organs. Further, because we know nothing definite as to the pigment, which, as we have seen, is undoubtedly present during life, and its arrangement relatively to the organs, a point which would have to be considered in the first line in every attempt at interpretation. And, finally, because we know even the histological elements which compose the flask-shaped organs only in the preserved state. We do not know whether the transparent cells are as strongly refractive during life as we suppose them to be from our preparations ; we know nothing as to the constitution of the cells of the “external layer” during life. ‘Thus any serious attempt at interpretation must for the present remain in suspense. Nevertheless we believe we shall not go wrong in decidedly rejecting any interpretation of our organs as eyes. ‘The only things that might be adduced in favour of this interpretation is the resemblance of the “ transparent cells” to the lenses of many Invertebrates, and above all the exceedingly favourable position of the organs for visual perception; but how many and important are the reasons against it! Above all, at any rate, the want of any large nerve-trunk running to the organ and of a perceptive layer, for we cannot expect even the boldest imagination to regard the ‘external layer” as a retina *. * We know very well that precisely among the Mollusca “eyes” have frequently been described to which no large nerve-trunks could be proved to run; but in all these cases the interpretation, although assailable, is to a certain extent justified, if only because the organs in question agreed 444 M. J. Brock on the Occurrence of A much more probable interpretation is that the flask-shaped organs are luminous organs. If the cells of the “ external layer’ have the faculty of shining, the “ transparent cells ” might perhaps act as prisms. ‘This depends, however, very much on whether the distribution of the pigment, which we do not know, supports such an interpretation. Whether any luminosity really occurs during life is not known *, and, indeed, not at all probable, as from the abundance of the Zrz- dacne in the whole Indo-Pacific region so remarkable a phe- nomenon could hardly have remained unobserved until now. Perhaps my respected friend Dr. Sluiter, when these lines come under his notice, may be induced to make some obser- vations upon the point in question. With the exception of some superficial and illusory resemblances there is no relation to the luminous organs of the Scopelide. The only organs closely in structure with undoubted eyes (Patella, see P. Fraisse, Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxv. p. 468; moreover, as I now find, Hilger has recently demonstrated the nerve of the eye of Patella, see Morph. Jahrb, Bd. x. p- 358, 1884), or at least because physiological experiments proved the animal to be extraordinarily sensitive to light (as especially in the cases recently described by Sharp and Patten; see B. Sharp, “ On the Visual Organs in Lamellibranchiata,” Mitth. Zool. Stat. Neapel, Bd. v. p. 447, and W. Patten, “ Eyes of Molluscs and Arthropods,” eed. Bd. vi. p. 542). But no special sensitiveness to light can be absolutely proved in Tredacna ; indeed, Vvidaena is so little sensitive that usually it is only upon direct contact that it retracts the margins of the mantle and closes its shell. * I certainly thought that I was on the track of a conclusive observa- tion when I read as follows in the treatise on the Invertebrata, edited by O. Schmidt, in Brehm’s ‘Thierleben’ (ed. 2, Bd. x. p. 887) :—* Besides many singular things, as, for example, that the Giant Clams (7ridacna) when they open at night diffuse a bright light or a lustre noticeable from a distance . . . besides these things our Dutchman (Rumph) cites some examples of the size and strength of Zridacna gigas,’ &c. But a com- parison with the original showed that O. Schmidt had either read the passage in question hastily or misunderstood it. At p. 152 of his ‘ Am- boinsche Rariteitkamer’ (first Amsterdam edition of 1705) Rumphius says :—“ They relate many singular things of a large Bia garu ( Dridacna gigas) which is to be seen ina lagoon of the island ‘Timor Laut, which on opening at night is said to emit a bright light or lustre, which may even be perceived from afar.” Thus it is only a pleasant tale of the natives. It may be remarked ex passant that Rumphius is well known to have been a German, born in Hanau, as, indeed, is to be read upon the title- page of his ‘ Rariteitkamer ’ and also under his portrait behind it, although “Totus Belga fide et calamo,” as is added with an elegant compliment to his adopted country in the distichs in his honour placed under the latter. As, in my eyes, Rumph, although a dilettante, was a naturalist of the first rank, who far exceeded most of his contemporary professional naturalists not only in accuracy of observation, but also in critical acute- ness, [ would not let pass this opportunity of correcting an error which may easily receive the widest diffusion through so popular a work as Brehm’s ‘ Thierleben.’ Pseudochlorophyll-corpuscles in 'Tridacna. 445 which show in their structure a decided resemblance to the flask-shaped organs, the so-called “ eyes” on the tentacles of Cardium (see Patten’s figure, lc. Taf. xxxi. fig. 112), are unfortunately very doubtful as regards their function, although the opinion that they are luminous organs is by no means to be regarded as disproved *. It is well known that the symbiosis of unicellular Algz with Evertebrata of the most different classes discovered by Geza Entz and K. Brandt has never ceased to be a matter of the most lively interest. I believe, therefore, that I shall earn the thanks of many by adding to the known cases of this symbiosis a new one which may claim the greater interest as only one instance of the kind among the Mollusca is to be found in literature. The very first incision which I made through the mantle-margin of a T’ridacna showed me, to my astonishment, all the available interstices of the tissue densely packed with ‘6 green cells”? (pseudochlorophyll-corpuscles) , and, as I found in the course of my investigation, this con- dition prevailed in all my specimens and in all parts of the mantle. It is true that the interest which would otherwise attach to this discovery was considerably weakened by the circumstance that it was made only on preserved animals. As the strict scientific proof that the colouring-matter of these green cells is chlorophyll can no longer be produced, readers of too critical a disposition may be inclined in regard to the new discovery to pass to the order of the day. In opposition to this I would point out that my only purpose here is to com- municate briefly the observations made, which I am justified in doing, and, to a certain extent, obliged to do. When once attention is directed to these things the investigation of the questionable chlorophyll in fresh material will probably not have to be very long waited for. The ‘ chlorophyll-corpuscles”’ in question are certainly true cells, as, without exception, they possess an approxi- mately central small nucleus with a distinct nuclear frame- work, which becomes very deeply coloured in the staining reagents employed (Grenacher’s alum-carmine). In general the nucleus is spherical, but sometimes oblong or reniform, * Carriére (‘ Die Sehorgane der Thiere,’ Munich, 1885, p. 97) certainly observed no spontaneous luminosity when the outer light was excluded ; but a function dependent upon nerve-influence, such as luminosity cer- tainly is, need not occur at all times. 446 M. J. Brock on the Occurrence of and not unfrequently, especially in alcoholic preparations, strikingly stelliform, to which Prof. Graf Solms called my attention. The increase by transverse division, which is frequently to be observed, may also be cited among the cri- teria of cell-nature. Further, they are spherical bodies of 6- 8 w in diameter (nucleus 2 ~), the contour of which appears so sharply and definitely that the assumption of a special (cellulose ?) envelope* seems to be justified. From the numerous vacuoles which permeate it the protoplasm has a frothy character; usually a ring of larger vacuoles surrounds the nucleus, and between this and the membrane there are numerous smaller ones. But the most multifarious other arrangements also occur. ‘The green colouring-matter, which is fixed by chromic acid but extracted by alcohol, is not gene- rally diffused through the protoplasm, but localized in small round corpuscles (chlorophyll-bearers), which are distributed through the cell in variable numbers difficult to determine. However, their quantity suffices to cause the whole cell to appear of a lively green colour under low powers. Whether the green granules are situated in the vacuoles or in the pro- toplasm is difficult to decide from sections; but I regard the latter as far more probable. Other points in the structure of the pseudochlorophyll-cor- puscles I have been unable to make out clearly. In spirit- preparations, in which, as already stated, the green colouring- matter has been entirely extracted, the granules of the proto- plasm, which bore the colouring-matter, have also become very indistinct, as their refractive power too nearly approaches that of the rest of the protoplasm. It is only where (in the microscopic image) they lie over a large vacuole that they are very distinctly visible. ‘The vacuoles, however, in their form and distribution are, on the contrary, particularly clearly seen in spirit-preparations from which the colouring-matter has disappeared. ‘The very tine, strongly refractive, almost dust- like granules which I sometimes found scattered through the protoplasm have remained quite inexplicable to me as regards their nature and significance; but [ must mention that on treating sections of Zridacna hardened in osmium with iodized solution of iodide of potassium for a very different purpose (see p. 450), fine, dust-like, violet-blue granules made their appearance in many of the green cells, while in spirit- preparations chloride of zinc and iodine coloured the whole of the cell-contents deep blue-black. How these two results are to be reconciled, and whether the blue granules are iden- * The test with chloride of zine and iodine was not unequivocally successful. Pseudochlorophyll-corpuscles in Tridacna. 447 tical with the above-mentioned granulations, I do not know; but at any rate it may be regarded as certain that the cell- contents contain starch. The seat of the green cells is not determinable at the first glance. It is indeed quite clear that they never occur intra- cellularly, like the yellow cells of the Actiniz for example. For this indeed the tissues of the Mollusca are much too small- celled. But whether they are in the interstices of the tissue or in the blood-passages is more difficult to decide without injections. Fortunately the numerous blood-corpuscles intermixed with them help us into the right road; we have to do only with blood-sinuses, as, moreover, the form and distribution of the spaces filled with the green cells would almost alone render certain. ‘The injection effected by them is frequently so perfect as to give us a distinct picture of the lacunar system in the mantle; and of the subepithelial layer of the mantle- tissue we sometimes obtain representations which to some extent resemble those recently given by P. Schiemenz*. In this way we are taught that the flask-shaped organs must be surrounded by large blood-sinuses, as an enormous accumula- tion of green cells regularly occurs around them. On the other hand, in the larger vessels with distinct walls which are distributed im the mantle I have never met with green cells. The only observation of the occurrence of pseudochloro- phyll-corpuscles in Mollusca that literature has to show is due to K. Brandt and relates to Hlysta viridis t. In this species they le in the ‘system of contractile tubes in the mantle ;””? what Brandt means by this is somewhat obscure, but we may not be much mistaken in assuming that the vas- cular system is referred to. ‘his would agree with Tridacna ; but in other respects there is considerable difference in the green cells of Elysta according to Brandt’s description and figures (loc. cit. figs. 90-93). They are much smaller and of much more irregular form than those of Zir¢dacna, and the emerald-green colouring-matter is not localized in separate granules, but uniformly permeates the protoplasm. As is well known Schmitz ¢ has recently adduced evidence * Paulus Schiemenz, ‘‘ Ueber die Wasseraufnahme bei Lamellibranch- iaten und Gastropoden,” I., Mitth. Zool. Stat. Neapel, Bd. vii. Heft 3, Taf. xvi. figs. 8, 9. + K. Brandt, “‘ Ueber die morphologische und physiologische Bedeu- tung des Chlorophylls bei Thieren,” in Mitth. Zool. Stat. Neapel, Bd. iy. . 245, : { F. Schmitz, “ Die Chromatophoren der Algen,” in Verh, naturh. Ver. preuss. Rheinl. und Westt., Jahrg. xl. (1883) p. 1. 448 M. J. Brock on the that the old supposition that the chlorophyll is uniformly diffused in the protoplasm in the unicellular Alge is erro- neous; on the contrary, according to him all true Alge have formed chlorophyll- bearers. We cannot abstain from men- tioning this memoir at any rate in passing, as our own obser- vations agree so well with it; moreover it is known that in the majority of the green corpuscles found in animals the chlorophyll is localized in special chlorophyll-bearers. The question whether the green cells of Zrédacna are true uni- cellular Alge or only developmental stages of them must be very superfluous when even tle vegetable nature of these structures cannot be established with perfect certainty. Upon this point it may be noted here en passant that the latter opinion, put forward by Geza Entz, on account of which Brandt gave up his generic name Zoochlorella, has recently been disputed by Klebs * in the most decided manner, And it cannot be denied that of the diagnosis which Klebs (@oc. cit. p. 332) gives for the genus Plewrococcus much is applic- able to the green cells of Titdacna; but we need hardly say expressly that we will not therefore announce the latter as a new species of Pleurococcus +. The place in which we find the green cells in Tridacna is unusual. The ordinary locality of the vegetable symbionts is in the tissue, @. e. the cells of the host ; hitherto they have only rarely been found floating freely in the cavities of its body. It we interpret Brandt’s expression correctly (see .447) Elysia viridis is also in the same case ; in the Kphyre ot Cotylorhiza, Claus found chlorophylloid Alge freely floating in the gastrovascular space |; Chun refers to yellow cells in the vessels of Veledla§; and Silliman saw Algee deposited in the intercellular spaces of the body-parenchyma in a North- American freshwater Turbellarian, Mesostoma viviparum, * G.Klebs, “ Ueber die Organisation einiger Flagellatengruppen und ihre Beziehungen zu Algen und Infusorien,” in Unters. botan. Inst. Tubingen, Bd. i. p. 258. + At any rate, as Prof. Graf Solms has likewise had the goodness to point out to me, the green cells of 7ridacna are quite different from those of other classes of animals if only by the great number and spherical form of their chlorophyll-bearers. ‘lhe green cells of Hydra have a single hood-like chlorophyll-hearer, and increase by tetrad-formation (see, for example, the figures given by Hamann, Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. Bd. xxxvii. Taf. xxvi. figs. 4-7), as also those of the Infusoria. t C. Claus, “ Die Ephyren von Cotylordiza und Rhizostoma und ihre Entwicklung zu achtarmigen Medusen,” in Arb. Zool. Inst. Univ. Wien, Bd. v. § C. Chun, “ Ueber die geographische Verbreitung der pelagisch- lebenden Seethiere,” in Zool. Anz, 1886, no. 215, p. 72. Blood-corpuscles of Tridacna. 449 Sill.* I am not acquainted with other cases of the same kind. But, at any rate, the Algal vegetation in the system of blood-lacunz in the mantle of Trédacna proves that there can be no question of any “ current” of blood in them worth mentioning. However, it cannot be denied that Alga (always supposing them to be such) must yield a very valu- able enrichment of any animal blood, as the oxygen which they develop under direct exposure to light must be immedi- ately absorbed by the blood-plasma, and so benefit the animal to a great extent. That there can be no question of evena temporary or partial nourishment by the vegetable symbionts in the case of an animal so large and requiring so much nutriment as a Zr¢dacna is a matter of course, even if this theory, set up by G. Entz and Brandt, were not to be re- garded as already seriously shaken. Some minor observations made in the course of the above investigation, but which have no other connexion therewith, may here find a place in conclusion. One of my observations relates to the blood-corpuscles. In my preparations I found these always fixed in a peculiar manner. The protoplasm had distinctly separated into two different constituents—a perfectly hyaline part in which the nucleus was always situated excentrically, and a “ protoplasmatic” part, which showed a very marked fibrous coagulation. It was remark- able that in all three of my Zridacne, which had been treated with quite different reagents, namely chromic acid, alcohol, and osmium, the blood-corpuscles appeared altered in this manner, and, indeed, in each preparation the whole of them without exception, not only those of the deeper layers of tissue, but also those belonging to the subepithelial layers, which one would have supposed must have been killed and fixed almost instantaneously by the reagent employed. I am at present quite unable to offer any explanation of this peculiar phenomenon. ‘rhe following peculiarity of the blood of Tridacna may have more interest. I believe that the only known formed constituents are the ordinary amceboid blood-cells. But in Tridacna 1 succeeded in detecting, although very sparingly, a second very characteristic cell-element of the blood. ‘These were rounded or oval, lobate, or otherwise irregularly formed * Silliman, “ Beobachtungen iiber die Siisswasserturbellarien Nord- amerikas,” in Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. Bd. xli. p. 62. 450 M. J. Brock on the cells, the perfectly hyaline protoplasm of which is throughout so completely stuffed with strongly refractive granules of a fatty lustre that I could not even find a cell-nucleus. The granules of the contents, averaging 0°5-1 mw in diameter, are regularly polygonal rather than rounded ; in osmium they become brown rather more strongly than the protoplasm, and also acquire a deep colour in borax-carmine. We find these “ granule-cells,” which usually attain twice or three times the size of the ordinary blood-cells, intermixed with these and the Alge in the blood-lacune, where they generally lie close to the walls, often in recess-like depres- sions. If such a depression is seen from the side in a section peculiar images are produced, as though the cell lay free in the interlacunar tissue; and misled by this, I thought for a long time that I had to do with true wandering cells, but I gave up this notion on finding that the explanation above given is quite sufficient. The frequency of the “ granule-cells”” is very variable. They are wanting in none of my three individuals of T’ri- dacna; but while in the specimen treated with chromic acid and alcohol they always occur singly and so sparingly that I often had to examine several sections in order to find one, they occurred in the osmium-specimen in such abundance that every section showed at least half a dozen of them. The causes of this phenomenon are quite unknown to me. In order to understand these peculiar cells it is most neces- sary to make out the chemical nature of their contained cor- puscles. For reasons which are not far to seek I at first thought of glycogen; but I did not succeed in obtaining the characteristic glycogen-reaction with a solution of iodine and iodide of potassium prepared in accordance with Barfurth’s prescription *. Whether this failure is to be ascribed to the hardening with osmium or to the processes of imbedding in paraffin may be decided by better chemists than myself—at any rate from the rarity of the “ granule-cells” in my other two Tridacne I was limited to the osmium-specimen for this microchemical test. The resemblance of the “ granule-cells ” to certain cells of the interstitial connective substance of the Pulmonata, which were discovered by Semper and reinvestigated and further described by me some years ago |, is very remarkable. The * D. Barfurth, “ Vergleichend-histochemische Untersuchungen iiber das Glycogen,” in Arch. fiir mikr. Anat. Bd. xxv. p. 260. + J. Brock, “ Untersuchungen tiber die interstitiellen Bindesubstanzen der Mollusken,” in Zeitschr. f. wiss, Zool. Bd. xxxix. p. 40 (1883), Blood-corpuscles of Tridacna. 451 reaction of the contained granules with osmic acid and basic colouring-matters agreed exactly in the two kinds of cells. In the Pulmonata also no evidence of glycogen was adduced, but that we have to do with glycogen or a similar body is at least probable since we know from Barfurth * that in the Pulmonata glycogen is at times accumulated in great quantity in the plasma-cells or Leydigian cells of the interstitial connective substance. The much-discussed question of the intercellular spaces of the epithelium of the Mollusca has now, we believe, found its definitive solution in the recently published memoir by Schiemenz ft. The intercellular spaces are not artificially produced, although their supposed stomata may be; they do not reach the surface of the epithelium, but terminate czecally in sharp points between the epithelial cells. Although the existence of intercellular spaces has been placed beyond a doubt by means of injections (Schiemenz, Nalepa) and by the observation of fresh objects (Leydig &c.), the question deserved consideration how far intercellular spaces may be artificially produced by reagents causing hardening and shrivelling. Schiemenz has already raised this question when he brought forward this very objection to my observations of intercellular spaces in the epithelium of the pedal glands of the Pulmonata f. In this particular case Schiemenz’s scruples were unfounded, for no one will doubt that intercellular spaces which regularly function as the efferent ducts of glands, and are often found filled with the secretion of the glands, are formed during life§. But as to the matter itself he is un- doubtedly in the right. Of my three Tridacne the osmium and chromic-acid specimens showed a densely closed palis- sade-epithelium without the smallest interstices between the individual cells, while the spirit-specimen has the whole epithelium traversed by numerous large typical intercellular spaces. Only one of the two can represent the natural con- * Barfurth, loc. cit. pp. 825 et seqq. + Paulus Schiemenz, ‘‘ Ueber die Wasseraufnahme bei Lamellibran- eens und Gastropoden,” Il, in Mitth. Zool. Stat. Neapel, Bd. vii. Heft 3. t Schiemenz, loc. cit. p. 428. § Although I have in the same place adduced the intercellular spaces of the epithelium of the pedal glands as evidence for the existence of such formations in general, this can no longer apply now that we know the true nature of the permanently closed typical intercellular passages, The two are quite different things, which must be kept apart. 452 On the Presence of Ossa transversa in a Chelonian. dition, and from the prevalent opinions as to the value of the three reagents employed we must unanimously declare against the spirit-specimen and the intercellular spaces. Others also appear to have made similar observations. In a recent French memoir upon the histology of the Lamellibranchs * we find the epithelium everywhere represented as closed, only one figure shows, exactly like my spirit-specimen of Trédacna, the epithelium traversed by numerous “ intercellular spaces.” LXII.—On the Presence of Ossa transversa in a Chelonian. By G. A. BOULENGER. THE object of this note is to record the presence of transverse bones in the skull of Hydraspis Hilairii, Schw. ‘The absence of that element had hitherto been regarded as characteristic of the order Chelonia. Lower view of anterior part of skull. As may be seen from the above figure, the bone (ér.) is intercalated between the pterygoid, the palatine, the maxillary, and the jugal; it is suturally united with the latter only anteriorly and posteriorly, its outer border being free. * L, Roule, “ Recherches histologiques sur les Mollusques lamelli- branches,” in Journ. Anat. et Physiol. tome xxiii, (1887), p. 31. The figure referred to is pl. y. fig. 8, Bibliographical Notices. 453 This discovery again shortens the gap between the Chelo- nians and the typical Reptilia. The group to which Hy- draspis belongs is characterized by distinct nasals, separate dentary bones, and strong transverse processes to the cervical vertebrae, and is in those respects altogether of a more gene- ralized type than the other Testudinata ; however, as regards the shell and pelvis it stands apparently a step in advance, and the Pleurodira have for that reason been regarded, per- haps erroneously, as the most specialized type. Geologically, so far as the record goes and if Dr. Baur’s recent views on certain Triassic Chelonians be correct, they are the oldest. The Wealden Peltochelys Duchastelit, the type specimen of which I was permitted to examine by my friend M. Dollo, is unquestionably closely related to Hydraspis and Chelodina. I have a suspicion that it will prove to be the young of Plesiochelys. It is undeniable that all the discoveries that have been made of late give support to the view first expressed by Cope, nearly twenty years ago, on the affinities of those two groups, the Cheloniaand the Rhynchocephalia, the systematic position of which has given rise to so much controversy. BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES. A Textbook of Biology. By J. R. Atyswortu Davis. London: Charles Griffin & Co., 1888. Mr. Davis has designed this textbook in order to meet the require- ments of the Intermediate Science and Preliminary Scientific Exami- nations of the London University. Such a work can never be one of a high class, for it must be limited by the conditions of the syllabus of a given body; in this case the body is not a teaching, but only an examining one. Mr. Davyis’s book must therefore be tested solely by the syllabus to which it professes to afford an aid. The exposition of the simple facts of anatomy and physiology is generally accurate, but we do not think it is better done than in a number of other works, such as those of Huxley and Martin, or Marshall and Hurst. So far as the work is, as it claims to be, an introduction to theoretical biology, it is clear from the conditions imposed that it must be more or lesg unsatisfactory in correspondence with the powers and characteristics of the writer. For us the whole has too much the air of a cram- book to justify us in recommending it from this point of view; we believe that the following explanation is the worst in the book, but the mental calibre of the writer may perhaps be judged from it. We find in the glossary, “ Apodeme (amddnyos, absent from home), in the Crayfish.—One of the elements of the endophragmal system,” Mr. Davis not only should have learnt that in Greek there is ¢ and n, but he should have learnt too that explanations should explain before he set to work on a glossary. The figures are partly original Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. i, 31 454 Miscellaneous. and partly borrowed: the latter vary in quality; the former are, without exception, the worst we have seen for a long time. Proceedings of the Bristol Naturalists’ Society, n. 8. vol. v. (1886-87), pt. ii. pp. 95-206 : Engineering Section, pp. 1-94. Bristol, 1887. Tus part of the Bristol Naturalists’ Society’s Proceedings opens with a paper on “ Bristol Building Stones ” by Prof. Lloyd Morgan ; the various local rocks available for the purpose are described, the principal buildings constructed of them being mentioned, and par- ticulars of their resistance given. In a second paper, ‘“‘On the Origin of Mountain-Ranges,” Prof. Morgan criticizes Mr. Mellard Reade’s views, and offers some general suggestions on this difficult subject. Further geological information appears in the Engineering Section, Mr. Charles Richardson giving a valuable paper on the Severn Tunnel, Several interesting and useful sections are given as illustrations to the thirty pages of text; and the whole forms, with some notes by Prof. Morgan, an important contribution to local and applied geology. In the Botanical Section Mr. J. W. White contributes some sup- plemental notes to the “Flora of the Bristol Coal-field,” and Mr. C. Bucknall continues his valuable papers on the Fungi of the Bristol district, illustrating this portion of his work with four plates. Some interesting notes apropos of the tercentenary of the potato are contributed by Mr. G. F. Burder. Local Zoology is taken in charge by Mr. H. J. Charbonnier, who catalogues the Reptilia, Amphibia, and Pisces observed by him in the district. The local Meteorology is chronicled by Messrs. G. F. Burder and H. B. Jupp. Many short papers and abstracts of papers also appear in this part il., amongst which we may mention :—E. W. Phibbs, “ Note on a Sacred War Trophy from Ecuador, consisting of a Human Scalp and Face;” W. P. Mendham, ‘“‘ The Deposition of Smoke and Dust by means of Electricity ;” Prof. W. Ramsay, “On Colour Blind- ness;”’ Thomas Morgan, “ Chilled Iron;” J. W. I. Harvey, ‘“ On the Method adopted to Compound a Pair of Ordinary Oscillating Paddle-wheel Engines ;” and G. W. Sutcliffe, “ Notes on Stationary Engines.” MISCELLANEOUS. On the “Nursing ”-habits of Dendrobates, as observed by A. Kappler. By G. A. BovLencer. A sHort time ago Messrs. Cope and H. 8S. Smith * announced the startling discovery that a South-American frog, Dendrobates brac- catus, Cope, carries its tadpoles on its back; these tadpoles differ in no respect from the normal type, and simply adhere (by the mouth ?) to the back of the parent. Mr. Smith observes that the tadpoles ‘“‘ were moist and glistening, as if they had just been taken from water, though the sun was shining hotly over them.” It isa great * Amer. Nat. 1887, p. 307. Miscellaneous. 455 pity that Mr. Cope, who describes the specimen on which the larvae were found, should not have taken the trouble of ascertaining its sex, instead of contenting himself with the statement “The free tadpole is carried on the parent.” The explanation of this extraordinary mode of “nursing” is to be found in a contribution by Hr. Aug. Kappler * to the life-history of Reptiles and Batrachians in Dutch Guiana. We have here to do with a quite new mode of parental provision for the safe rearing of the brood, and I append a translation of Hr. Kappler’s remarks :— “Dendrobates trivittatus, Spix. “During the rainy season the female oviposits in small puddles, where the eggs are hatched, after which the frog removes the young tadpoles to other (larger) puddles. This is accomplished, as I have myself several times witnessed, by the frog entering the water, when all the tadpoles gather round and suck on to the parent, which leaves on its journey with an investment of from twelve to eighteen young tadpoles, 6 or 7 millim. long. Whether it is the male or the female that undertakes the carriage is unknown to me.” It is to be hoped that Messrs. Smith and Kappler’s interesting observations may be before long supplemented by fuller accounts. Naturalists in the tropics do not seem to be fully aware of the rich mine of investigation which the breeding-habits of Batrachians afford them. The more our knowledge advances the more we realize the immense amount of secondary modifications in the development of Batrachians, quite irrespective of their relationships. What is more remarkable than the similarity of the eggs and the nursing- habits of such widely remote forms as Alytes, Ichthyophis, Desmo- gnathus, and Amphiuma ? It is, however, held by Mr. Ryder + that this similarity between Ichithyophis and Amphiuma is “a confirmation of Prof. Cope’s con- clusions as to the taxonomic relations of these two types, and a very interesting instance of the way in which embryological data may become available.” On the Formation of the Antherozoids of the Hepatice. By M. Lecrerc pu Santon. The antheridia of the Hepaticze are formed by an aggregation of rounded or oval cells. The cells of the superficial layers remain sterile and form the envelope ; the interior cells play a more impor- tant part—each of them forms a motile antherozoid, capable of fecundating the oosphere and converting it into an ovum. How does a cell, formed of a nucleus surrounded by protoplasm and a membrane, become converted into a spiral filament endowed with motion? The authors who have studied the formation of the antherozoids have answered this question in very different ways. According to some the nucleus disappears, and it is the protoplasm that furnishes the spiral filament ; according to others the protoplasm does not perform any essential part, and it is the nucleus that, by elongating and coiling itself, directly forms the antherozoid. At the close of my researches upon the Hepatice I shall propose a third * Das Ausland, 1885, p. 858. + Amer, Nat. 1888, p. 182. 456 Miscellaneous. solution, which appears to me to be more in accordance with the facts than the preceding. Asa first example I shall take Metzgeria furcata. The antheridia occur in involucra which are almost entirely closed and are situated themselves on the lower surface of the frond. When the mother- cells of the antherozoids have ceased dividing, the middle part of the membrane surrounding them soon dissolves; each cell is then com- pletely free, only surrounded by a very delicate membrane, which will afterwards disappear. The nucleus, which was at first central, approaches the surface of the cell without changing in form or dimensions. At the same time all round the cell, following a great circle which touches the now excentric nucleus, a delicate thread of protoplasm is differentiated, becomes homogeneous and brilliant, and is coloured only with great difficulty by the ordinary reagents of the protoplasm and nucleus. This is the first indication of the forma- tion of the antherozoid. It is to be observed that, at this period, the nucleus has not notably changed in form. We cannot there- fore say that the nucleus alone forms the antherozoid by becoming elongate and slender. It is true that the nucleus has a point of contact with the filament ; but by treatment with hematoxylin the colourless filament may be traced over the surface of the nucleus, now strongly stained violet. This first phase of the formation of the antherozoid is of short duration, and appears to me to have hitherto escaped the notice of observers. Ina rather more advanced state the different parts of the mother-cell retain the same relative positions; but the filament is thicker and more intimately united with the nucleus, the nucleus itself is smaller, and the protoplasm less dense. The filament therefore grows at the expense of the nucleus and protoplasm. Still later the nucleus seems to have completely disappeared ; its substance has been entirely employed in enlarging the antherozoid. The protoplasm also has almost completely disappeared ; we see only a colourless space in the midst of the ring formed by the antherozoid. The direct observation of this stage of development led some authors to suppose that the nucleus disappeared and that the protoplasm then became condensed at the periphery of the cell to form the antherozoid. Soon afterwards the ring breaks, the filament elongates itself and becomes more slender, and gradually acquires the form of the adult antherozoid. It is only at this period that the two cilia appear at one of its extremities. The antherozoids of the other Hepatic that I have studied (Radula complanata, Frullania dilatata, and Alicularia scalaris) are formed exactly in the same way as those of Metzgeria furcata. As these different species belong to groups pretty distinct from each other there is reason to suppose that the mode of formation of the antherozoids is very uniform in the family Hepatice. I hope, however, to extend my observations to a greater number of species and to publish figures which are necessary for the completion of such descriptions as those which I have just given. The technical processes which I have employed in my observa- tions are those which are ordinarily adopted in the investigation of the nucleus. ‘To obtain good results, however, I have been obliged Miscellaneous. 457 not to make use of materials hardened in alcohol; under such con- ditions, in fact, it becomes diffieult to distinguish the protoplasm from the nucleus. In certain cases, at any rate, I think I may ascribe the mistakes of some authors to the use of materials hardened in alcohol. Treatment with hypochlorite of soda in very dilute solution has furnished good results. To sum up: the antherozoids of the Hepatice are formed at the same time by the nucleus and the protoplasm of the mother-cell. The body of the antherozoid, therefore, not corresponding solely to the nucleus of the mother-cell, but to the nucleus and protoplasm together, there is not only a change of form of the elements of the cell, but there is at the same time a change of properties and of structure. The body of the antherozoid, which is more refractive and more homogeneous than the protoplasm or the nucleus, is also more difficult to stain with reagents, especially at the commence- ment of its formation. A complete transformation of the elements of the cell has taken place; we may therefore say that in becoming converted into an antherozoid the mother-cell has undergone a total renoyation.— Comptes Rendus, March 19, 1888, p. 876. On the Gemmules of some Marine Siliceous Sponges. By M. E. Topsenr. As in the Spongille, multiplication by means of gemmules is observed in adddition to sexual reproduction in many siliceous sponges common on the shores of the Channel and belonging to different families, such as Chalina oculata, C. gracilenta, Cliona vastifica, and Suberites ficus. The asexual germs which originate in the deeper parts of these various sponges consist essentially (1) of rather large elements, darkened by a great accumulation in their protoplasm of large shining granules, which conceal the cell-nucleus; and (2) of a keratode envelope. In none of the marine species here in question do the gemmules attain the same degree of complication as those of the Spongille ; their envelope is not pierced by a foramen, and the spicules with which it is often armed are not special ones. The gemmules of Chalina oculata are, however, still rather com- plex. They are developed in small numbers (not more than thirty) in the lower region of the hard and apparently lifeless peduncle of this branching sponge. Attached to the yellowish fibres of the skeleton they appear as ovoid bodies of a milk-white colour, three or four times the size of the gemmules of Spongilla fluviatilis for example. Their keratodic envelope is supported throughout its whole extent by acerate spicules arranged parallel to each other ; further, some horny fibrils, also containing spicules, intercross in the middle of the internal cellular mass. Bowerbank, without knowing it, had discovered these gemmules in a very short piece of peduncle which he took for a new sponge (Shetland Islands) and named Diplodemia vesicula. From the description of this species and its ovaries, O. Schmidt in 1870 thought he recognized a fragment or a young form of a Chalinean, Now it seems no longer doubtful that the unique Diplodemia is the broken foot of a Chalina oculata. 458 Miscellaneous. Chalina gracilenta spreads over stones and shells, and its gem- mules, always in considerable number, become organized directly against its support; they are rounded, whitish, and generally measure hardly more than 0-25 millim. in diameter; they are found disseminated or pressed against each other, and in the latter case the envelope of each of them remains independent of that of its neighbours ; here again the capsule is armed with spicules, but no skeletal production traverses the cavity of the corpuscle, its small dimensions rendering quite unnecessary the formation of an internal framework. It is also in contact with the support, that is to say adherent to the walls of the perforated galleries, that the gemmules of Cliona vastifica are developed. They vary much in form and dimensions, but they are distinguished at the first glance by the bright red colour of their cells. They have only an incomplete envelope to separate them from the mass of the sponge ; the calcareous substance, riddled with little pits, upon which they are moulded, protects them on the other side. ‘he capsule contains no spicules in its substance, but in general it is lined with a layer of these organites arranged tangentially to the mass and parallel to each other ; generally also a few spicules are found scattered in the interior cellular mass. The three kinds of spicules of the sponge may be combined in these various positions, or one of them may occur to the exclusion of the others. More rarely the gemmules are absolutely devoid of spicules. Lastly, what Carter called ‘‘ the ovigerous layer of Suberites do- muncula” is by the last evidence a layer of true gemmules. We know the part contributed by the English author to the knowledge of the gemmules of the Spongille, and yet in his note (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1883, xii. p. 80) he has not made the least allusion to these asexual germs. The gemmules of Suberites domuncula (of the Mediterranean) and those of its near relative, S. ficus (of the Channel), have the same structure and occupy the same position. ‘They are reduced to the essential elements, a capsule and cells. Always in juxtaposition, they cover with a continuous layer the shell or stone to which the sponge is attached. Carter very well describes these reproductive bodies ; but having observed that their capsule became thinner in contact with the sup- port, he regarded them as ova incapable of development until such time as, this support being destroyed, it becomes possible for the embryo to make a passage through the thin portion of the envelope. It is true that from what he says he had observed our Suberites ficus only on 6th January, 1870, and 4th September, 1877, at periods when the gemmules in repose appeared to him like ova all in the same stage of development ; now these germs are formed at the end of summer and emit their contents in the spring by rupture of their capsule ; and if Carter had had the opportunity of examining Sub- erites in May and June, he would have seen the capsules in position, but empty, and ruptured on their convex side. At present Cliona vastifica is the only known sponge of which the gemmules do not all arrive at maturity in the spring; they may be found all the year round in its lobes, even at the time when sexual reproduction takes place.—Comptes Rendus, April 30, 1888, p. 1298. 459 INDEX tro VOL I. AcRm@mA, new species of, 210. — Andromacha, life-history of, 359, Asthalodes, characters of the new genus, 270. Aheetulla, new species of, 325. Amblyurus, on the genus, 356, Anarthropora, new species of, 76. Antherozoids of the Hepaticze, on the formation of the, 455. Anthops, characters of the new genus, 156. Apate, note on the sexes in the ge- nus, 348. Apaustus agraulia, life-history of, 360. Apus, new species of, 164. Archezopteris hibernica, on the fruc- tification and affinities of, 412. Aristobia, new species of, 276. Artemia, new species of, 164. Astacus, on a parasite of, 233, Atella, new species of, 97. Barentsia, new species of, 226. Bather, F. A., on shell-growth in Cephalopoda, 298, 376, 421, Batrachia, new, 101, 187, 343; from Santa Catharina, list of, 415. Beddard, F. E., on the reproductive organs of Phreoryctes, 389. Bell, Prof. F. J., on a remarkable Ophiurid from Brazil, 368. Belonorhynchus, on the 354. genus, Belonostomus Anningiw, on the ge- neric identity of, with Belono- rhynchus, 354, cinctus, on a mandible of, 381. Beyrichia, new varieties of species of, 400. Bipora, characters of the new ge- nus, 15, Blake, Prof. J. F., on shell-growth in Cephalopoda, 376. Blochmann, Dr. F., on the reproduc- tion of Euglypha alveolata, 27. Bonnier, J., on two new genera of Epicarides, 234, Boodon, new species of, 329. Books, new:—Giard et Bonnier’s ‘Contributions 4 l’étude des Bo- pyriens,’ 51; Potts’s ‘ Freshwater Sponges, 53; Nicholson’s ‘ Man- ual of Zoology,’ 55; Holder's ‘Living Lights,’ 57; Trimen’s ‘South-African Butterflies,’ 228 ; ‘Bergens Museum Aarsberetning,’ 228; Cotes and Swinhoe’s ‘ Cata- logue of the Moths of India,’ 310; Bonnier’s ‘Catalogue des Crusta- cés Malacostracés recueillis dans la Baie de Concarneau,’ 311; ‘ Trans- actions of the Cumberland and Westmorland Association for the Advancement of Literature and Science,’ 380; Davis’s ‘ Textbook of Biology,’ 453; ‘ Proceedings of 460 the Bristol Naturalists’ Society,’ 454. Bostrichids, remarks on the, 348. Bot-larve in the Terrapin, on, 231. Boulenger, G. A., on two new Cha- meeleons from Madagascar, 22; on Molge meridionalis, 24; on new Reptiles and Batrachians from Madagascar, 101; on the affinity of the North-American lizard- fauna, 107; on new Brazilian Ba- trachia, 187; on new Reptiles and Batrachians from New Guinea, 343; on the characters of the Pelomedusidee and Chelydida, 346; list of Batrachians from Santa Catharina, 415; on the presence of ossa transversa in a Chelonian, 452; on the “nursing ”- habits of Dendrobates, 454. Brock, J., on the so-called eyes of Tridacna and the occurrence of pseudochlorophyll - corpuscles in the vascular system of the Lamel- libranchiata, 455. Butler, A. G., on three new Chalco- siide, 47; on Lepidoptera from North-west India, 132, 196; ona new species of Teracolus, 417. Cae-Gwyn cave, notes on the, 58. Ceenophrada, characters of the new genus, 350. Calamelaps, new species of, 323. Callulops, characters of the new ge- nus, 345. Carter, H. J., on two new genera allied to Loftusia, 172; on the opaque scarlet spherules found in the chambers and canals of many fossilized Foraminifera, 264. Causus, new species of, 331. Cephalopoda, on shell-growth in, 298, 376, 421. Cetonia, new species of, 194. Chameleon, new species of, 22, 103. Charaxes, new species of, 210. Chelonian, on ossa transversa in a, 452. Chelydidz, on the characters of the, 346, Chrysochroa, new species of, 264. Cicada, new species of, 297. Cicadetta, new species of, 375. Cicadidee, new, 291, 370. Clionz, on the supposed peripheral processes of the, 68. INDEX. Cours, new, 190, 194, 260, 270, 350. Coronella, new species of, 103. Corynoporella, characters of the new genus, 215. eoeapenins new species of, 292, 371, Cribrilina radiata, new variety of, 75. Crocidura, new species of, 428. Crossochilus, new species of, 431. Crustacea, on the podophthalmous, of the Bay of Marseilles, 66; on two new Branchiopod, 164. Cryptops postica, note on, 283. Cryptotympana, new species of, 296, Cynthia, new species of, 95. Cyriocrates, new species of, 276. Danais, new species of, 90, 210. Day, F., on the Bib and Poor-Cod, 151; on Trachinus draco and T. vipera, 351. Dendrobates, on the “nursing ”- habits of, 454. Diadema, new species of, 98. Dianeura, characters of the new genus, 49, Didelphys, new species of, 158. Dihammus, new species of, 275. Dinoderus substriatus, note on, 348. Dinosauria, on the classification of the, 61. Diplcecium, characters of the new genus, 73. Distant, W. L., on new Cicadide, 291, 370. Dobson, G. E., on two new Indian Soricide, 427. Doleschallia, new species of, 98. Doratopteryx, new species of, 48. Dromicus, new species of, 104. Duncan, Prof. P. M., on the anatomy of the Temnopleuride, 109; on Glyphastreea sexradiata, 160, Dundubia, new species of, 292. Elapomorphus, new species of, 323. Elapsoidea, new species of, 332. Elotris, new species of, 430, Eneemia caminza, life-history of, 561, : Engystoma, new species of, 416. Entomostraca, notes on the Palzo- zoic bivalved, 395. Epepeotes, new species of, 271. Hpicarides, on two new genera of, »)« INDEX. Escharoides, new species of, 82. Euglypha alveolata, on the repro- duction of, 27. Kupemphix, new species of, 187. Euplcea, new species of, 90. Eutzeniopsis, characters of the new genus, 277. Kyes, on the so-called, of Tridacna, . 435. Fewkes, J. W., on the existence of deep-sea Medusee, 247 ; on a new Physophore, 317; on a new mode of life among Medusze, 362. Fishes, on the, of the Yangtsze- Kiang, 429, Fistulipora incrustans, on the struc- ture of, 237. Foraminifer, on a new, 311. Foraminifera, on the opaque scarlet spherules found in the chambers and canals of many fossilized, 264. Frog-tadpole, on the infection of a, by Saprolegnia ferax, 162. Fungi, on a new genus of, parasitic in the kidney of the Molgulide, 386. Gadus luscus and G. minutus, on, 151. Gahan, C. J., on new Lamiide, 190 ; on new Longicorn Coleoptera 270. Ganoid, note on an early Mesozoic, 354, Genyodonta, new species of, 261. Geological Society, proceedings of the, 58, 230, 381. Giard, Prof. A., on two new genera of Epicarides, 254; on parasitic castration in the genera Paleemon and Hippolyte, 314; on Nephro- myces, a new genus of fungi para- sitic in the kidney of the Molgu- lide, 386. Glyphastreea sexradiata, note on, 160; on the identity of the type species of, with that of Septastreea, D’Orbigny, 382. Godman, F. D., on new Lepidoptera from the Solomon Islands, 90, 209. Goeana, new species of, 291. poe pyrobola, life-history of, 361. Gourret, P., on the podophthalmous Crustacea of the Bay of Mar- seilles, 66. 461 Ginther, Dr. A., on reptiles from China, 165; onnew African snakes, 322; on the fishes of the Yangtsze- Kiang, 429. Haliotis, on an abnormal growth in a species of, 419. Halys, new species of, 171. Hamadryas, new species of, 95. Haplohammus, new species of, 274. Haplothrix, characters of the new genus, 278. Hatschek, Dr. B., on the significance of sexual reproduction, 163. Heilprin, Prof. A., on the North- American Lizard-fauna, 24. Hepaticze, on the formation of the antherozoids of the, 455. Heteroclytomorpha, new species of, 192. Heteromeyenia, 313. Hexarthrius, new species of, 260. Hincks, Rey. T., on the Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence, 214. Hinde, Dr. G. J., on the genus Sep- tastreea, D’Orbigny, and the iden- tity of its type species with that of Glyphastrza, Duncan, 382. Hippolyte, on parasitic castration in, 514. new species of, Homaloptera, new species of, 435. Homoptera, on new oriental, 291. Hornera, new species of, 85. Huechys, new species of, 291. Hughes, Prof. T. M‘K., on the Cae- Gwyn cave, 58. Hydraspis Hilairii, on the presence of transverse bones in the skull of, 452, Hyla, new species of, 188, 417. Hypsa nesophora, life-history of, 360. } Idmonea, new species of, 83. Tguanodon, new species of, 58. Imhof, Dr. O. E., on a new Cheto- pod, 232. Janson, O. E., on new Cetoniide, 194, Jones, Prof. T. R., on the Paleozoic bivalved Entomostraca, 395. Keller, Dr. C., on the formation of vegetable mould by the action of certain animals, 68. Kidston, R., on the fructification and affinities of Archeopteris hiber- nica, 412. Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 6. Vol. 1. 32 462 Kirkpatrick, R., on the Polyzoa of Mauritius, 72. Kloedenia, new species of, 398. Kunstler, J., on a new Foraminifer, 311. Lake-fauna, on the pelagic, of Au- verene, 63. Lamellibranchiata, on the occurrence of pseudochlorophyll-corpuscles in the vascular system of the, 455. Langaha, new species of, 105. Leidy, Prof., on bot-larvee in the terrapin, 251. Lepas, on the first changes in the fecundated ovum of, 160, Lepidoptera from North-west India, on, 182, 196; life-histories of nine Australian, 357 ; new, 47, 90, 207, 209, 417. Lepralia, new species of, 78. Leptodactylus, new species of, 187. Leptopsaltria, new species of, 370. Leuronotus, characters of the new genus, 190. Libythea, new species of, 211. Lizard-fauna, on the affinity of the North-American, 24, 107. Loftusia, on the affinities of the genus, 11; on two new genera allied to, 172. Lophopus, note on the genus, 61, Lendenfeldi, note on, 159. Lydekker, R., on a new Iguanodont and other Dinosaurs, 58; on the nomenclature of three genera of fossil Mammalia, 584. Lygosoma, new species of, 343. Macronota, new species of, 262. Mammalia, new, 155, 158, 427; on the nomenclature of three genera of fossil, 584. Mantella, new species of, 106. Mason, G, E., on a new earth-snake, 184. Medusze, on the existence of deep- sea, 247; on a new mode of life among, 362. Megalania, on the extinct Reptilian genus, 85. Meiolania, on the extinct Reptilian genus, 85. Membranipora, new species of, 74. Membraniporella, new species of, 216. Messaras, new species of, 97. Metzeria furcata, on the antherozoids of, 456. INDEX. Micoureus, new species of, 158. Microcyphus zigzag, on the ambu- lacra of, 113. Millarella, characters of the new genus, 178. Mills, H., on a new freshwater _ sponge, 313. Misgurnus, new species of, 434. Molge meridionalis, notes on, 24. Molgulidee, on a new genus of fungi parasitic in the kidney of the, 386. Monohammus, new species of, 273. Mould, on the formation of vegetable, by certain animals, 68. Mucronella, new species of, 81. Mus, new species of, 157. Myliobatis, on the fossil teeth of, with revision of the English Kocene species, 36; new species of, 45. Mynes, new species of, 99, 211. Nemachilus, new species of, 434, Neopercis, new species of, 62. Nephromyces, characters of the new genus, 386. Neptis, new species of, 98. Nicholson, Dr. H. A., on the struc- ture and affinities of the genus Parkeria, 1. Nussbaum, Prof. M., on the first changes in the fecundated ovum of Lepas, 160. Olliff, A.S., on the life-histories of nine Australian Lepidoptera, 357. Ophionephthys, new species of, 368: Ophiurid, on a remarkable, from Brazil, 568. Orsidis, new species of, 191, Ostracoda, on some Silurian, 395, eae on parasitic castration in, 314, Palegyge, characters of the new genus, 254. Papilio, life-history of three species of, 357 ; new species of, 99, 211. Parkeria, on the structure and affini- ties of the genus, 1, 182. Pelagic fauna of some lakes in Au- vergne, 63. Pelargoderus, new species of, 272. Pelomedusidz, on the characters of the, 346. Peramys, new species of, 158. Perrier, E., on starfishes from Cape Horn, 384. INDEX. Pharsalia, new species of, 279. Philobota bimaculana, life-history of, 360. Phreoryctes, on the reproductive organs of, 389; new species of, 394, Phylactella, new species of, 79. Physophore, on a new, 317. Platypelis, new species of, 106. Pleeophysa, characters of the new genus, 318, Pocock, R. I., on the genus Theatops, 283; on Scolopendra valida and allied species, 335. Polyzoa, on Australian, 13; of Mau- ritius, 72; of the St. Lawrence, 214. Pomponia, new species of, 295, 371. Porella, new species of, 221, 225. Primitia, new species of, 405. Probopyrus, characters of the new genus, 254, Psammophis, new species of, 327. Pseudogobio, new species of, 432. Psorospermium Heeckelii, notes on, 233. Pteralopex, characters of the new genus, 155, Pteropus, new species of, 156, Pyrgus, new species of, 207. Rana, new species of, 345. Reproduction, on the significance of sexual, 163. Reptiles, new, 22, 101, 184, 322, 343; on a collection of, from China, 165. Retepora, new species of, 82. Rhacophorus, new species of, 105. Rhinocalamus, characters of the new genus, 322, Rhinogobio, new species of, 432. Rhinoptera, on an abnormal speci- men of the dentition of, 281. Richard, J., on the pelagic fauna of some lakes in Auvergne, 63. Ridley, S. O., on Lophopus Len- denfeldi, 159. Rosenbergia, new species of, 280. Sablon, L. d., on the formation of the antherozoids of the Hepatice, 455. Salvin, O., on new Lepidoptera, 90, 209. Saprolegnia ferax, on the infection of a frog-tadpole by, 162. Scelotes, new species of, 102. 463 Schizoporella, new species of, 76. Schnetzler, Prof. J. B., on the infec- tion of a frog-tadpole by Sapro- legnia ferax, 162, Scolopendra valida, description of, 325, Scrupocellaria, new species of, 75. Seeley, Prof. H. G., on Thecospon- dylus Daviesi, and on the classiti- cation of the Dinosauria, 61. Septastreea, on the genus, and on the identity of its type species with that of Glyphastreea, 382. Shell-growth in Cephalopoda, re- marks on, 298, 576, 421. Silybura, new species of, 184. Simocephalus, new species of, 528. Simotes, new species of, 169. Siphonops, new species of, 189. Smith, E, A., onan abnormal growth in a species of Haliotis, 419. Smittia, new species of, 79. Snakes, new, 322. Soricidee, on two new Indian, 427. Sormida, substitution of the generic name, for Heteroclytomorpha, 193. Sponge, on a new freshwater, 315. Sponges, on the gemmules of some marine siliceous, 457. Spongille, on the survival of, after the development of swarm-laryze, 340, Spongodes, new species of, 69. Squatina, new species of, 381. Starfishes, on a collection of, from the region of Cape Horn, 584. Stephanopora, characters of the new genus, 75. Stoliczkiella, characters of the new genus, 173, Studer, Dr. Th., on new species of Spongodes, 69, Syringosphera, note on the genus, Ae Tachydromus, on the species of, 166. Temnopleuridz, on the anatomy ot the, 109. Teracolus, new species of, 417. Terrapin, on bot-larvee in the, 231. Theatops, on the genus, 283. Thecospondylus Daviesi, notes on, Thomas, O., on new mammals from the Solomon Islands, 155; on four new species of Didelphys, 158. Tibicen, new species of, 575. 464 Topsent, E., on the supposed peri- pheral processes of the Clione, 68; on the gemmules of some marine siliceous sponges, 457. Trachinus draco and T. vipera, note on, 35]. Tridacna, on the so-called eyes of, and the occurrence of pseudochlo- rophyll-corpuscles in the vascular system of, 455. Trigonoptera, new species of, 193. Trilobites, on, from the Penrhyn Quarry, 60. Typhlops, new species of, 344. Uriechis, new species of, 325. Uroplates, new species of, 101. Vaillant, L., on a new species of Neopercis, 62. Vetrovermis, characters of the new genus, 232. Walter, Dr. A., on two new Bran- chiopod Crustacea, 164. Waterhouse, C. O., on new Coleo- ptera, 260; observations on the Bostrichidee, 348. INDEX. Weltner, M.,on the survival of Spon- gille after the development of swarm-larvee, 340, Whitelegge, T., on Australian Poly- zoa, 13; on the genus Lophopus, 62. Woodward, A.S8., on the fossil teeth of Myliobatis, with revision of the English Eocene species, 36; on the extinct Reptilian genera Me- galania and Meiolania, 85; on an abnormal specimen of the denti- tion of Rhinoptera, 281; note on the genera Belonorhynchus and Amblyurus, 354; on Squatina Cranei and a mandible of Belono- stomus cinctus, 381. Woodward, Dr. H., on_ trilobites from the Penrhyn Quarry, 60. Young, J., on the structure of Fistu- lipora incrustans, 237. Zacharias, Dr. O., on Psorospermium Heeckelii, 285. END OF THE FIRST VOLUME. PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. Vol IPL y. Nat. Hist. $6 UG Ani.& Me | | i Ane 3 8 & § z 2 Mintern Bros. del et lith. DENTITION OF EOCENE SPECIES OF MYLIOBATIS Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. 5.6. Vol. 1. Pll. 3. CHAMALEO? Tit BOETTGERI. a Mintern Bros. del.et lith 1,2. CHAMA LEON Anin.é Mag Nat ists. 6 Vel Lt Pais snc OAS? o) TT Ab ie 7 RARER ig ® as" C rex H.A.Nicholson. del ih ree Lis nes ‘ Mintern Bros . lith, é Ann & Mag. Nat. Hist. $.6.Vol.1. PU.V. Mintern Bros. del.el lith. Bye 1 eet pee I . Uroplates fantasticus. 2. Chameeleon gastrolenia. 3. Coronella torquati. 4.0. mucrops. 5. Dromicus baron. 6. Langaha intermedia, 4 N & ‘ re ' 2 F] a = Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. §.6 Vol. 1 al. VI. del. et lith. Bros Mintern Healt latypelis poll I, Rhacophorus alblabris. warts. . Mantella baron - I) “ Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. S. 6. Vol.f. PU. VIL. Mintern Bros. del.et hth. Aniv.& Mag. Nat. Mist. S. 6. Vol. 1. PU. VIL. Mintern Bros. del.et lith. st.S. 6. Vob.1. Pu. IX. i Ann.& Mag. Nat. lh Mintern Bros. del et. lith Ann.& Mag. Nat. fist. §. 6. Vol. 1. PLX. Mintern Bros, del.et lith. Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. 5.6. Vol. 1. Pu. XI. 9% @ te oe | ye 4 } i } y ae { or y Mintern Bros. imp. A.S.Foord del. et lith to ‘, & . cof + . i a fs # = > i é & 5 ri Peel gc ioe \ J : - { z ra ‘ z 7 ars é é ‘ ~~ * Aye a i ree 4 3 = . : ' R.Mintern del. et hth Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. $. 6. Vol.I. Pl. XI. Mintern Bros. imp. Halys acutus. 5 , “ ’ " t J G Pew 1 Wen te “ “i Pee, Sa Ann & Mag. Nat. Most. $8.6. VoalT PUXM Mintern Bros se, Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. §. 6. Vol. I. PU. XIV. Wake rcice aed Mintern Bros. lth. . u 5 s ry . Vol. I. PL. XV 6 7. Nat.Hist. 8. OMe * & Mac Ann a aE ENT Mintern Bros. lth. T.Hincks del. Annv& Mag. Nat. Hist.S.6. Vol 1. PUXVI. Mintern Bros. lth. Ann& Mag. Nat. Hist. 8. 6. Vol. 1. PUXVIL. i PS ee J.W.F del. Mintern Bros. lith. Anin.& Mag. Nat Hist. 5. 6. Vol. I. PL. XVII. Mintern Bros. Jith Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist, 8.6. Volt. PU. XIX. Mintern Bros, ith. Anan.& Mag. Nab, Hist.S.6.Vob.1.PLXL. ( 6b 6a Mintern Bros. lith. C.W. & A.S.0.del. Ann &Mog.Not.HistS6.Vol.LPUXXI EC.Knight hth West, Newman &Co.imp. Seandinavian Ostracoda. Ann&Mag.Nat Hist S.6.Vol.1. PU. XXII. 7 15e West, Newman&Co.imp OW Knight hth cilia Pate Ark. bl, ce Fic uh Hi Ay Ann.& Mag. Not. Hist.S.6. Vol. PL XXL wu ae Ay etrca Mintern Br = a eee ~ NVINOSHLINS S3!1YVYUdIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITU) w , = w = ; w 20 \ = Ps) iS 7 > Ye SN Ee > = > ps) NS “SX ra Bs) = +59 = SOs a re i m ‘ SS z= m z m (a2) —_ (4p) = ; n SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S31Yyy (2) Zi «® n <= n % = < = , < = = = = x 5 =< ~ & = g = g ‘2 g z = 2; = Zz > —_— ,) eds Zz = S a a P| —NVINOSHLINS eld BRARIES _INSTITUI IC é ul é é =t we 4 ae - fie [acd =. oO “SS ae Oo mar Oo =z ey) za =) Zz SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3IYVUE S ~ S —- 5 | = = Ss a =n > = r = = 0 = = S a - a = z : O “2 yi Zz | NVINOSHLINS S3IYVYUEIT LIBRARIES i 22) = : ” = = = ass = < z = aes Sj = oO Se O : ae Qs 7) ny a ” ” po ed O ¥ ae oO = = = E z = Ss > = > = w” Zz 10 = ae ” > SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILONLILSNI NVINOSHLIWS 7p) S ef S ve a = ae = pf QL = <5 : < : WE < Pe 8 a m = co = YQ co = fe: (@) one fe) i = ; acl z= ee = e o— ! | NVINOSHLINS S3JIYVHYGIT LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTI eS z s A eo Los) oo = co — hy, w Fe) we Ss 0 = Gy 2 2 a = x = OF AGO? =" we : eae (ap) can z w S Ww > SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHLINS S3I1YVuRs <2) Be ” z n & Zit z ty < = ; = & = Vyds Jy. =. = z a 3 : fo Tz = = ARIES SMITHSONIAN NVINOSHLIWS 2 ee) ey eer, eat z NVINOSHLIWS S3IYVYgII = Ss = oy a eS Pe) WY = m0 Na E tis < \ 3 m WY 2 i ” = F ARIES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION ft =z = ‘ = 4 : 9 z ie aS. > S | “ 2 77) Paes INLILSNI_ NVINOSHLIWS S3I1uYVvVYaIt } > *, 4 af zs = nice S or rs) at z es ie w Fo) > 7 m a) INSTITUTION SMITHSONIAN NVINOSHLIWS Ss ay eet ie NVINOSHLINS NOILALILSNI INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI INSTITUTION S31YVYUdIT LIBR INSTITUTION NOILNLILSNI SMITHSONIAN mars, 2 ~*~ KN Oo Re fe) »~ Es z ie ee LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN ID ul. , eet oO / aa = 50 =) = 1 > | 5. : z o NOILNLILSNI NVINOSHIINS |S | z a z = jE Oo aE an) nw ee oO 4 = zy : = = 7) Z LIBRARIES SMITHSONIAN _ If Z n Spe Actions | e a (e) = INSTITUTION SMITHSONIAN ARIES NVINOSHLINS S31YVYaIT LIBRARIES * SMITHSONIAN NVINOSHLIWS S$ n S ” = ie nY : a; B @ Ge 2» Z = a 4 gN& z < a oO — (e) ey Toad es = ‘Wy w 5D \ E 0 z Gy 2 = Se : 2 OL = W's 2 Ek 2 ue 2 Z i RAR | ES SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION NOILALILSNI NVINOSHLINS S$ x a ITHSONIAN NOSHLIWS ITHSONIAN INOSHLINS RARIES LIB Lhe irae eee ay eerie aye TS a OF mami ae WW penptiespaias cnet